unidades automaticas de... · off test r es auto test manual prog mains start load stop engine...

EAOM-210 FL.OEMAUTOMATIC TRANSFER & SWITCHING UNIT

FOR DIESEL/GAS GENERATORSUser Manual

EMKO ELEKTRON K A. .Demirta Org. San. Bolg.Karanfil Sk. No: 6 TR 16369 Bursa / TURKEY

Ý Þþ

PhoneFaksUrlE-mail

: +90 224 261 1900: +90 224 261 1912: www.emkoelektronik.com.tr:[email protected] [email protected]

1

EAOM 210 FL.OEM three phase connections schematic-

FUSE-9

FUSE-8

FUSE-7

FUSE-1

FUSE-2

FUSE-3

FUSE-10

FUSE-11

FUSE-4

FUSE-5

FUSE-6

15

26

32

5

22

12

D+(W.L.)

BA

TT

ER

Y -

8A

8A

Charge Gen.

Oil Pressure

Temperature

Level

Configurable Input-6

29

74

26

21

11

20

10

19

18

17

16

15

30

8

L1

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

Ma

xim

um

~3

00

VM

ax

imu

m ~

30

0V

MA

INS

L2

L3

N

40

39

BATTERY +

BATTERY -

32

31 Solenoid

16A

16A

5A

Start

Configurable Output-2

33

34

35

36

16A

E. Stop


High Temp.Or Configurable Input-5

Low Oil Pres.Or Configurable Input-4

16A

BATTERY +

BATTERY +

M

Ma

ins

C

on

tac

tor

Re

lay

Ou

t.

LO

AD

G

en

. G

nt

Co

ac

tor

Re

lay

Ou

t.

L1

L2

L3

N

Ele

ctr

ter

ck

ica

l in

lo

an

ia

l e

rc

kM

ec

hc

int

lo

43

44

45

46

Horn Out orConfigurable Output-1

BA

TT

ER

Y +

*

* IT

CA

N B

E U

SE

DA

S A

DIG

ITA

L IN

PU

TB

Y S

EL

EC

TIN

G

FR

OM

TH

E P

RO

GR

AM

PA

RA

ME

TE

RS

*

I

I



BA

TT

ER

Y -

OFFTEST

AUTO TEST MANUALRESET

PROG

STARTMAINS

LOAD

STOPENGINERUNNINGENGINERUNNING

N P

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~

VVVV

HIGH TEMPERATUREHIGH TEMPERATURE

FAILED TO STARTFAILED TO START

LOW OIL PRESSURELOW OIL PRESSURE

SPEED FAILURESPEED FAILURE

VOLTAGE FAILUREVOLTAGE FAILURE

CHARGING FAILCHARGING FAIL

RPMRPM

MAINSMAINS

MANUALMANUALTESTTESTAUTOAUTOOFFOFFRESETRESETTESTTEST

PROGPROG

EAOM - 210 FL

STOPSTOP

STARTSTART

GGENGINERUNNINGENGINERUNNING

LOADLOAD

2 3 4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

17

18 20

19 21

22

292827262524

13

3130

1

14 15 16

23

2

The green LED indicates that Generator Voltage is within limits and is ready to take over the load.

The red LED illuminates only when the unit in the Programming Mode.

The green LED indicates that Mains voltage and frequency is within limits and is ready to take over the load.

The LED shows that the load is connected to the mains. It's colour is green.

The LED shows that the load is supplied from the generator. It's colour is green.

The green LED indicates that the engine has started and is running.

In the MAN, AUTO and TEST modes, the green LED indicates that the engine is starting up or is running.

In the MAN, AUTO and TEST modes, the red LED indicates that the engine has stopping or stopped.

This red LED shows that the unit is in the OFF mode.

This red LED shows that the unit is in the AUTO mode.

This red LED shows that the unit is in the TEST mode.

This red LED shows that the unit is in the MANUAL mode.

When this button is pressed, the unit goes into its PROGRAMMING Mode.

This button is used for showing next working screen in normal operation. In Programming mode, it operates as an page changing function or increment function (increase value).

12

345

67

8

91011121314

FUSE-1, FUSE-2, FUSE-3, FUSE-4, FUSE-5, FUSE-6, FUSE-7 1 A. T FUSE-8 - Max. 15 A. TFUSE-9 - Max. 16 A. TFUSE-10, FUSE-11 Max. 5A. T

1- This equipment does not contain any parts and material related to users. Only qualified personnel and technician trained specially should work on this equipment. This equipment contains dangerous voltage inner circuits for human life . There is severe dangerous for human life on the case of unauthorised intervene2- Connect the unit as shown in the appropriate diagram. Be sure to connect the battery supply the right way round and battery negative should be grounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit to facilitate connection.

c

Front Panel Description:

Number Comment

This button closes the mains contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

This button opens the mains contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

This button closes the alternator contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

This button opens the alternator contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

The START button is used for starting the engine when the unit is in the Manual Mode.

The STOP button is used for stopping the engine when the unit is in the Manual Mode.

The LAMP TEST button illuminates all LED indicators.

This button will silence the alarm horn after a failure has been detected.

This button will reset the controller after a failure has been detected.

The OFF button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the OFF Mode.

The AUTO button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the AUTO Mode.

The TEST button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the TEST Mode.

The MAN button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the MANUAL Mode.

Failure Indicators.

This LCD display is used for displaying the electrical measurements during normal operation, and editing/inspecting programming parameters in program mode.

18192021222324252627282930

31

3

17

15

16 This button is used for rotating between Event Log screens in normal operation, and between programming parameters in programming mode.

This button is used for showing previous working screen in normal operation. In Programming mode, it operates as an page changing function or decrement function (decrease value).

Number Comment

4

PARAMETERS

600606060

600600600

VVVVVVVV

60Min Default(MAINS LEVELS PAGE) MAINS LEVELS page Max

Mains Under Voltage

Mains Under Voltage Return

Mains Over Voltage

Mains Over Voltage Return

Mains Under Frequency

360365420415

MAINS UNDER VOLTAGE

HzHzHzHz

20.0 75.020.0 75.020.0 75.020.0 75.0

45.048.054.052.0

Mains Under Frequency Returni

Mains Over Frequency

Mains Over Frequency Return

600

60(dis)

60

60(dis)

600

600

600

VVVVVVVV

60(dis)

Min Default(GEN.VOLT.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR VOLTAGE LEVELS page Max

Generator Under Voltage

Generator Under Voltage Pre-Alarm

Generator Loading Voltage

Generator Over Voltage Pre-Alarm

Generator Over Voltage Pre-Alarm Return

360

370

380

420

60 600

60 600

400

440Generator Over Voltage Shutdown

VVVV

OPERATOR PARAMETERS

MAINS UNDER V.RET.

MAINS OVER VOLTAGE

MAINS OVER V.RETURN

MAINS UNDER FREQ.

MAINS UNDER F.RET.

MAINS OVER FREQ.

MAINS OVER F.RETURN

GEN.UNDER VOLTAGE

GEN.UNDER V.PRE-ALR

GEN.LOADING VOLTAGE

GEN.OVER V.PRE-ALR

GEN.OVER V.PR-A.RET

GEN.OVER VO.SHUTDWN

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to lit the "Mains Okey LED".In Automatic mode, the unit uses these parameters to switch the load between the mains supply and the alternator.

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to display Voltage Failure and Voltage Error Messages. Also, the unit uses Generator Loading Voltage parameter to decide when to take the load. Note-1 : dis = disable

Unit

Unit

Changing and Saving Parameters:The menu of parameters consist of three sections; Operator, Technician and Calibration

parameters. When the button is pressed, the “OPERATOR SECTION” message is

displayed. “TECHNICIAN SECTION” or ”CALIBRATION SECTION” can be selected with

ve buttons. While the “OPERATOR SECTION” message is displaying when the button is pressed, password is asked for accessing to parameters. (Note: If the operator password is zero, password screen is ignored and first parameter page “MAINS LEVELS

PAGE” is displayed). Enter password with and buttons. Press the button to confirm password. If the password is incorrect, the unit will drop out of program mode. If the password is correct the first parameter page (“MAINS LEVELS PAGE”) is displayed.

Operator can access to the next parameter page by pressing the button or access to

the previous parameter page by pressing button. If you want to change the value of parameter, first the correct parameter page is selected. And then the related parameter is

selected by pressing the button. While the name and value of parameter is displaying,

enter the new value by pressing and buttons. Press the button to save the

changed value and access to the next parameter. (Press the button to access to the related parameter page without to save changed value). All parameters are able to change

in this way. If the button is pressed while the parameter page message is displaying, the operation screen is shown.

PROG

N

P

N P

N

P

N P

PROG

PROG

TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS

5

99990Min Default Unit(GEN.CUR/POW.ACT.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER ACTIONS page Max

CT Primary 0CT PRIMARY

Over Current Alarm Time 00 99Short Circuit Alarm Time 00 99Total Energy Clear nono / YesActive Energy Clear

Reactive Energy Clear

nono / Yesnono / Yes

OVER CUR.ALARM TIME

SHORT CIR.ALRM TIME

TOTAL ENERGY CLEAR

ACTIVE ENERGY CLEAR

REACTIVE ENERGY CLR

75.0

30.0

75.0

75.0

Hz30.0(dis)

Min Default(GEN.FREQ.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR FREQUENCY LEVELS page Max

Generator Under Frequency

Generator Under Frequency Pre-Alarm

Generator Loading Frequency

Generator Over Frequency Pre-Alarm

Generator Over Frq Pre-Alarm Return

47.0

48.0

50.0

53.0

52.0

54.0Generator Over Frequency Shutdown

HzHzHzHzHz

30.0(dis)

30.0(dis)

30.0(dis)

30.0

75.0

75.0

75.0

GEN.UNDER FREQUENCY

GEN.UNDER F.PRE-ALR

GEN.LOADING FREQ.

GEN.OVER F.PRE-ALR

GEN.OVER F.PR-A.RET

GEN.OVER FR.SHUTDWN

9999 AVAV

0Min Default Unit(GEN.CUR/POW.LVL.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER LEVELS page Max

Generator Over Current

Generator Short Circuit 0

GEN.OVER CURRENT

GEN.SHORT CIRCUIT 999911

Note-1 : dis = disable

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to display Speed Failure and Frequency Error Messages. Also, the unit uses Generator Loading Frequency parameter to decide when to take the load.

Unit

AVSecSec

ENAB / DISMin Default(MISCELLANEOUS PAGE) MISCELLANEOUS page Max

Sensing Options Generator Frq En/Dis ENABAc System 1

All Warnings Are Latched En/Dis

Mains Failure Detection En/Dis ENABStop / Fuel Selection STOP / FUEL FUELStop Solenoid Time 5 2099

ENAB / DISENAB / DIS

6

SENS.OPT.GEN.F.ENAB

AC SYSTEM

ALL WRN.ARE LTCH.EN

MAINS FAIL.DETEC.EN

STOP/FUEL SELECTION

STOP SOLENOID TIME

Nominal Alternator Frequency 30.0 50.075.0Nominal Speed 500 15005000

NOMINAL FREQUENCY

NOMINAL SPEED

ENAB

SENSING OPTIONS GENERATOR FRQ EN/DISENABLE: Speed sensing will be derived from the generator output frequency.DISABLE: Speed sensing not will be derived from the generator output frequency.

AC SYSTEM 3 PHASE 4 WIRE OR 1 PHASE 2 WIRE0: AC system is 1 phase 2 wire.1: AC system is 3 phase 4 wire.2: AC system is 3 phase 4 wire series delta.

ALL WARNINGS ARE LATCHED EN/DISDisable: Normal operation, the warnings and pre-alarms (except spare inputs, because they have their latching or non-latching selections) will automatically reset once the triggering condition has cleared.Enable: Warnings and pre-alarms will latched when triggered. To reset the alarm either an external reset must be applied to one of the inputs or the 'Reset' pushbutton operated, once the triggering condition has cleared.

MAINS FAILURE DETECTION EN/DISDisable: The module will not monitor the AC mains supply for failure. The AC mains instrumentation will still be active however.Enable: The module will monitor the incoming AC mains supply. Should the supply go out side of limits the module will initiate its automatic mains failure sequence.

STOP/FUEL SELECTIONSelection for the engine has Fuel or Stop selenoid.

STOP SOLEONID TIMEThis timer is used if the unit is confgured to operate an Energise to stop engine. It dictates the duration that the Stop Solenoid output will remain active after the module has detected the engine has come to rest. If the Stop Solenoid output is not configured, this timer will still operate, preventing an immediate restart.

Unit

HzRPM

Sec

0 - 1PHASE 2WIRE1 - 3PHASE 4WIRE2 - 3PHASE 4WIRE SERIES DELTA

ENAB / DISMin Default Birim(ENGINE STAR.OPT PAGE) ENGINE STARTING OPTIONS page Max

Audible Alarm Prior To Starting En/Dis

Number Of Start Attempts

Cranking Time

Crank Rest Time

DIS35

11

1099

105 99

7

AU.ALR.PRIOR STRT.E

NUMBR OF STR.ATTEMP

CRANKING TIME

CRANK REST TIME

Min Default(ENG.CRANK DISCN.PAGE) ENGINE CRANK DISCONNECT page Max

Crank Disconnect On Gen. Frequency

Crank Disconnect On Gen. Voltage

Crank Disconnect On Charge Alt. Voltage

30.0

Crank Disconnect On Oil Pressure

25.0 75.0 Hz30060 (dis) 600 VV6.06.0 (dis) 30.0 VZ1.51.0 (dis) 90.0 BAR

Min Default(ENG.PLANT BATTR PAGE) ENGINE PLANT BATTERY page MaxBattery Undervolts Warning

Battery Undervolts Warning Return

Batt Undervolts Volts Delay

Battery Overvolts Warning

10.0

Battery Overvolts Warning Return

6.0(dis) 30.010.56.0

1.00.0 9.930.029.5

Charge Alternator Warning 9.0

30.0

30.06.0 30.0

Batt Overvolts Delay 1.00.0 9.930.0

6.0(dis)

6.0(dis)

Min Default(ANALOGUE INPUTS PAGE) ANALOGUE INPUTS page Max

Oil Pressure Input Type

Oil Pressure Pre-AlarmOil Pressure Pre-Alarm Return

anlg

Temperature Input Type

0.0 (dis) 99.9 BAR1.40.0 99.9 BAR1.50.0 99.9 BAR

anlg

DIS0 (dis) 300880 300

1050 3000 (dis) 300 %

900 300300

Temperature Pre-Alarm

Level Pre-Alarm

Oil Pressure Shutdown

Temperature Pre-Alarm Return

Temperature Shutdown

Level Shutdown

Level Pre-Alarm Return

CCC

CRNK DISCN.ON GEN.F

CRNK DISCN.ON GEN.V

CRNK DISC.ON CH.G.V

CRNK DISCN.ON OIL P

BAT.UNDER V.WARNING

BAT.UNDR V.WARN.RET

BAT.UNDER VOL.DELAY

BAT.OVER V.WARNING

BAT.OVER V.WARN.RET

BAT.OVER VOL.DELAY

CHARGE ALT.WARNING

TEMP.PRE-ALARM

TEMP.PRE-ALARM RET

TEMP.SHUTDDOWN

LEVEL PRE-ALARM

LEVEL PRE-ALARM RET

LEVEL SHUTDOWN

TEMP.INPUT TYPE

OIL PRES.SHUTDOWN

OIL PRES.PRE-AL.RET

OIL PRES.PRE-ALARM

OIL PRES.INPUT TYPE

%%0 (dis)

DIS

DIS

DIS

AUDIBLE ALARM PRIOR TO STARTING EN/DIS ENABLE: The audible alarm will sound before the engine starts. The sounder will become active once the start delay is initialised, it will remain active until either the engine reaches crank disconnect speed or pre-heat timers are cancelled.

NUMBER OF START ATTEMPTSThis value is the number of times the module will attempt to start the generator. Should the generator start the module will not attempt further starts. If the generator does not start after the final attempt, the module will give a 'Fail to start' alarm.

CRANKING TIME This is the maximum amount of time that the module will energise the starter motor for during starting attempts once the starter has engaged.

CRANK REST TIME This is the amount of time the module will wait for between start attempts. This is to allow the starter motor to cool and the starter batteries to recover.

SecSec

UnitVZVZ

VZVZ

Sec

SecVZ

Unit

Unit0 - Dis (Disable)1 - nc (Normally close)2 - no (Normally open)3 - anlg (Analogue)

0 - Dis (Disable)1 - nc (Normally close)2 - no (Normally open)3 - anlg (Analogue)

8

Min Default Unit(CANBUS CONFIG. PAGE) CANBUS CONFIGURATION page Max

Expansion Module SelectionEXPANS. MODUL SELECT ENAB/ DIS DIS

Min Default Unit(ANALG.SENDR LIN.PAGE) ANALOGUE SENDER LINEARISATIONS page Max

Oil Pressure Sender 0Oil Pressure 0

0 6500.0 BAR

R99.9

0 6500.0 BAR

R99.9

0 6500.0 BAR

R99.9

0 6500.0 BAR

R99.9

0 6500.0 BAR

R99.9

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

0 6500

R300

100

40258050

14075

185100



Oil Pressure Sender 3Oil Pressure 3Oil Pressure Sender 4Oil Pressure 4Temperature Sender 0Temperature 0Temperature Sender 1Temperature 1Temperature Sender 2Temperature 2Temperature Sender 3Temperature 3Temperature Sender 4Temperature 4Level Sender 0Level 0Level Sender 1Level 1Level Sender 2Level 2Level Sender 3Level 3Level Sender 4Level 4

C

C

C

C

C

OIL PRESS.SENDER 0

OIL PRESSURE 0

OIL PRESS.SENDER 1

OIL PRESSURE 1

OIL PRESS.SENDER 2

OIL PRESSURE 2

OIL PRESS.SENDER 3

OIL PRESSURE 3

OIL PRESS.SENDER 4

OIL PRESSURE 4

TEMP.SENDER 0

TEMPERATURE 0

TEMP.SENDER 1

TEMPERATURE 1

TEMP.SENDER 2

TEMPERATURE 2

TEMP.SENDER 3

TEMPERATURE 3

TEMP.SENDER 4

TEMPERATURE 4

LEVEL SENDER 0

LEVEL 0

LEVEL SENDER 1

LEVEL 1

LEVEL SENDER 2

LEVEL 2

LEVEL SENDER 3

LEVEL 3

LEVEL SENDER 4

LEVEL 4

160.0

65030

803.01164.0

1505.5

1847.0

13463518544

10538

117

OIL PRESSURE INPUT TYPE This section is used to configure the Oil Pressure sender input.DýS: The Oil Pressure input will not be monitored.1: digital & closed for low oil pressure : The Oil pressure input is fed from an engine mounted digital pressure switch. This switch returns a closed signal during low oil pressure conditions (and engine at rest), once oil pressure is established the switch will open.2: digital & open for low oil pressure : The Oil pressure input is fed from an engine mounted digital pressure switch. This switch returns an open signal during low oil pressure conditions (and engine at rest), once oil pressure is established the switch will close.3: analog : Oil press. input is connected to a resistive type engine mounted oil pressure transducer.

TEMPERATURE INPUT TYPE This section is used to configure the Coolant Temperature sender input.DýS: The Coolant Temperature input will not be monitored.1: digital & normally closed : The Coolant Temperature input is fed from an engine mounted digital temperature switch. This switch returns a closed signal during low temperature, should the temperature rise above the switch manifacturers trip point the switch contact will open.2: digital & normally open : The Coolant Temperature input is fed from an engine mounted digital temperature switch. This switch returns an open signal during low temperature, should the temperature rise above the switch manifacturers trip point the switch contact will close.3: analog : The Coolant Temperature input is connected to a resistive type engine mounted temperature transducer.Note: If the Level Pre-alarm and Level Shutdown parameters are selected as disable, the Level showing is ignored.

Min Default Unit(DIG.CNF.INPUT-1 PAGE) DIGITAL CONFIGURABLE INPUT (1) page Max

0

2

20(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

9

0

1

4

24 2

3

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY

0 - DISABLE1 - USER CONFIGURED2 - SELECT FROM LIST

IF USER CONFIGUREDPOLARITY0 - CLOSE TO ACTIVATE1 - OPEN TO ACTIVATE

IF USER CONFIGUREDINDICATION0 - STATUS1 - WARNING NON-LATCHING2 - WARNING LATCHING3 - ELECTRICAL TRIP4 - SHUTDOWN

IF USER CONFIGUREDACTIVATION0 - ACTIVE FROM STARTING,1 - ACTIVE FROM SAFETY ON,2 - ALWAYS ACTIVE.

IF SELECT FROM LIST0 - REMOTE START1 - AUXILIARY MAINS FAIL2 - SIMULATE LAMP TEST BUTTON3 - SIMULATE HORN RESET BUTTON4 - SIMULATE ALARM RESET BUTTON5 - SIMULATE OFF BUTTON6 - SIMULATE AUTO BUTTON7 - SIMULATE TEST BUTTON8 - SIMULATE MANUAL BUTTON9 - SIMULATE START BUTTON10 - SIMULATE STOP BUTTON11 - GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY12 - GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT13 - MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY14 - MAINS LOAD INHIBIT15 - AUTO RESTORE INHIBIT16 - AUTO START INHIBIT17 -PANEL LOCK18 - SCHEDULED RUNS INHIBITED19 - RESET MAINTENANCE ALARM20 - TRANSFER TO GENERATOR/OPEN MAINS21 - TRANSFER TO MAINS/OPEN GENERATOR22 - REMOTE INHIBIT23 - TEST ON LOAD24 - GENERATOR IS SUPPLYING THE LOAD IN OFF MODE

INPUT TIME DELAY


0

2

20(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

10

0 4

24 2

3

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY



IF USER CONFIGUREDINDICATION0 - STATUS1 - WARNING NON-LATCHING2 - WARNING LATCHING3 - ELECTRICAL TRIP4 - SHUTDOWN



INPUT TIME DELAY

0(dis)


0

2

2 0(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

11

1 1

24 4

5

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY



IF USER CONFIGUREDINDICATION1 - WARNING NON-LATCHING2 - WARNING LATCHING3 - ELECTRICAL TRIP4 - SHUTDOWN



INPUT TIME DELAY


0

2

20(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

12

1

2

1

25 25

0

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY




IF SELECT FROM LIST0 - REMOTE START1 - AUXILIARY MAINS FAIL2 - SIMULATE LAMP TEST BUTTON3 - SIMULATE HORN RESET BUTTON4 - SIMULATE ALARM RESET BUTTON5 - SIMULATE OFF BUTTON6 - SIMULATE AUTO BUTTON7 - SIMULATE TEST BUTTON8 - SIMULATE MANUAL BUTTON9 - SIMULATE START BUTTON10 - SIMULATE STOP BUTTON11 - GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY12 - GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT13 - MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY14 - MAINS LOAD INHIBIT15 - AUTO RESTORE INHIBIT16 - AUTO START INHIBIT17 -PANEL LOCK18 - SCHEDULED RUNS INHIBITED19 - RESET MAINTENANCE ALARM20 - TRANSFER TO GENERATOR/OPEN MAINS21 - TRANSFER TO MAINS/OPEN GENERATOR22 - REMOTE INHIBIT23 - TEST ON LOAD24 - GENERATOR IS SUPPLYING THE LOAD IN OFF MODE25 - LOW OIL PRESSURE

INPUT TIME DELAY



0

2

20(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

13

1

2

1

25 25

0

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY




IF SELECT FROM LIST0 - REMOTE START1 - AUXILIARY MAINS FAIL2 - SIMULATE LAMP TEST BUTTON3 - SIMULATE HORN RESET BUTTON4 - SIMULATE ALARM RESET BUTTON5 - SIMULATE OFF BUTTON6 - SIMULATE AUTO BUTTON7 - SIMULATE TEST BUTTON8 - SIMULATE MANUAL BUTTON9 - SIMULATE START BUTTON10 - SIMULATE STOP BUTTON11 - GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY12 - GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT13 - MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY14 - MAINS LOAD INHIBIT15 - AUTO RESTORE INHIBIT16 - AUTO START INHIBIT17 -PANEL LOCK18 - SCHEDULED RUNS INHIBITED19 - RESET MAINTENANCE ALARM20 - TRANSFER TO GENERATOR/OPEN MAINS21 - TRANSFER TO MAINS/OPEN GENERATOR22 - REMOTE INHIBIT23 - TEST ON LOAD24 - GENERATOR IS SUPPLYING THE LOAD IN OFF MODE25 - HIGH TEMPERATURE

INPUT TIME DELAY



0

2

2 0(dis)

10

4

20

0

2500 sec

14

1 1

24 7

5

DIS,USERCNF.OR LIST

POLARITY

INDICATION

ACTIVATION

SELECT FROM LIST

INPUT TIME DELAY





INPUT TIME DELAY


CONFIGURABLE INPUTS SELECTIONS

0 REMOTE START/STOPIn AUTO mode, if one of the configurable inputs are selected as 0 (Remote Start), the module doesn't perform the mains failure control in order to start the generator. In AUTO mode, if one of the configurable inputs are selected as 0 (Remote Start) and this input is active, then the module will perform the start sequence. If the input is passive module will perform the stop sequence.

1 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILThe Eaom-210 Fd module will monitor the incoming single or three phase supply for Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Over Frequency or Under Frequency. It may be required to monitor a different mains supply or some aspect of the incoming mains not monitored by the Eaom-210 Fd. If the devices providing this additional monitoring are connected to operate this input, the Eaom-210 Fd will operate as if the incoming mains supply has fallen outside of limits, the generator will be instructed to start and take load. Removal of the input signal will cause the module to act if the mains has returned to within limits.

2 SIMULATE LAMP TEST BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Lamp Test' button and is used to provide a remotely located Lamp Test push button.

3 SIMULATE HORN RESET BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Horn Reset' button and is used to provide a remotely located Horn Reset push button.

4 SIMULATE ALARM RESET BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Alarm Reset' button and is used to provide a remotely located Alarm Reset push button.

5 SIMULATE OFF BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Off' button and is used to provide a remotely located Off mode push button.

6 SIMULATE AUTO BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Auto' button and is used to provide a remotely located Auto mode push button.

7 SIMULATE TEST BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Test' button and is used to provide a remotely located Test mode push button.

8 SIMULATE MANUAL BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Manual' button and is used to provide a remotely located Manual mode push button.

9 SIMULATE START BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Start' button and is used to provide a remotely located start push button.

10 SIMULATE STOP BUTTONThis input mimic's the operation of the 'Stop' button and is used to provide a remotely located Stop push button.

11 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARYThis input is used to provide feedback to allow the Eaom-210 Fd to give true indication of the contactor or circuit breaker switching status. It should be connected to the generator load switching device auxiliary contact.

12 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBITThis input is used to prevent the Eaom-210 Fd from loading the generator. If the generator is already on load, activating this input will cause the Eaom-210 Fd to unload the generator. Removing the input will allow the generator to be loaded again. Note: This input only operates to control the generator-switching device if the Eaom-210 Fd load switching logic is attempting load the generator. It will not control the generator-switching device when the mains is on load.

13 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARYThis input is used to provide feedback to allow the Eaom-210 Fd to give true indication of the contactor or circuit breaker switching status. It should be connected to the generator load switching device auxiliary contact.

15

14 MAINS LOAD INHIBITThis input is used to prevent the Eaom-210 Fd from loading the mains supply. If the manis supply is already on load, activating this input will cause the Eaom-210 Fd to unload the mains supply. Removing the input will allow the mains to be loaded again. Note: This input only operates to control the mains-switching device if the Eaom-210 Fd load switching logic is attempting to load the mains. It will not control the mains-switching device when the generator is on load.

15 AUTO RESTORE INHIBITWhen module in the AUTO mode. In the event of a remote start / mains failure the generator will be instructed to start and take load. On removal of the remote start signal / mains return the module will continue to run the generator on load until this AUTO RESTORE INHIBIT input is removed. Once the input is removed the module will transfer the load back to the mains supply and follow a normal generator stop sequence. This input allows the module to be fitted as part of a system where the manual restoration to mains is controlled remotely or by an automated system.

16 AUTO START INHIBITThis input is used to provide an over-ride function to prevent the Eaom-210 Fd from starting the generator in the event of a remote start / mains out of limits condition occurring. If this input is active and a remote start signal / mains failure occurs the Eaom-210 Fd will not give a start command to the generator. If this input signal is then removed, the Eaom-210 Fd will operate as if a remote start / mains failure has occurred, starting and loading the generator. This function can be used to give an 'AND' function so that a generator will only be called to start if the mains fails and another condition exists whish requires the generator to run. If the 'Auto Start Inhibit' signal become active once more it will be ignored until the module has returned the mains supply on load and shutdown.

17 PANEL LOCKThis input is used to provide security to the installation. If the panel lock input is active, the module will not respond to operation of the mode select or start buttons. This allows the module to be placed into a spesific mode (such as Auto) and than secured. The operation of the module is not affected and the operator will still be able to view the various instrumentation pages etc. Note: External control sources (i.e. Simulate Start Button) are not affected by the panel lock input and will continue to operate normally.

18 SCHEDULED RUNS INHIBITEDThis input is used to prevent the generator for starting in the event of a programmed scheduled run occurring. While the input is active no scheduled runs will occur. If the input is active when a schedule run is called for, and is removed during the running period the gen-set will start and complete any remaining scheduled running time.

19 RESET MAINTENANCE ALARMThis input used to reset the maintenance alarm. When activated it will reset the maintenance counter to the pre-configured value (i.e. 250 hours). If the maintenance alarm is configured to monitor the monthly service interval this will also be reset to the pre-configured period. (i.e. 6 months).

20 TRANSFER TO GENERATOR/OPEN MAINSThis input is used to transfer the load to the generator when running in Manual mode.

21 TRANSFER TO MAINS/OPEN GENERATORThis input is used to transfer the load to the mains supply when running in Manual mode.

22 REMOTE INHIBITIn AUTO mode, if one of the configurable inputs are selected as 22 (Remote Inhibit) and this input is active, the module will inhibit the generator for starting. In the other hand, if this input is active while the generator was starting, the module will stop the generator.

23 TEST ON LOAD If this input is active when the unit is in test mode, load is transferred to the generator to do the test on load. If the input is not active, test is done without load.

24 GENERATOR IS SUPPLYING THE LOAD IN OFF MODE If this input is active when the unit is in OFF mode, the power is calculated. If the input is not active, the power is not calculated.

25 LOW OIL PRESSURE (FOR CONFIGURABLE INPUT-4)This input is used as the oil pressure failure input.

25 HIGH TEMPERATURE (FOR CONFIGURABLE INPUT-5)This input is used as the temperature failure input.

16

17

Min Default Unit(CONFIG.OUTPUT-1 PAGE) CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (1) page Max

010

930 0

POLARITY

FUNCTION 0 NOT USED1 AUDIBLE ALARM2 ALARM RESET3 AUTO START INHIBIT4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILURE5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGE6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUN8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILURE9 COMMON ALARM10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARM12 COMMON WARNING ALARM13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARM14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWN15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESS16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVE17 DIGITAL INPUT1 ACTIVE18 DIGITAL INPUT2 ACTIVE19 DIGITAL INPUT3 ACTIVE20 DIGITAL INPUT4 ACTIVE21 DIGITAL INPUT5 ACTIVE22 DIGITAL INPUT6 ACTIVE23 EXPANSION INPUT1 ACTIVE24 EXPANSION INPUT2 ACTIVE25 EXPANSION INPUT3 ACTIVE26 EXPANSION INPUT4 ACTIVE27 EXPANSION INPUT5 ACTIVE28 EXPANSION INPUT6 ACTIVE29 EXPANSION INPUT7 ACTIVE30 EXPANSION INPUT8 ACTIVE31 RESERVED32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER START33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STOP34 EMERGENCY STOP35 FAIL TO START ALARM36 FAIL TO STOP ALARM37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISED38 RESERVED39 GENERATOR AT REST40 GENERATOR AVAILABLE41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSE43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPEN44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN53 RESERVED54 GENERATOR STOPPING55 HORN OUTPUT56 LAMP TEST57 LEVEL PREALARM 58 RESERVED59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARM60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE62 MAINS FAILED TO OPEN63 MAINS FAILURE64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCY65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGE66 MAINS LOAD INHIBIT67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCY68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGE69 NO LOADING COMMAND70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARM71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWN72 OVER CURRENT73 RESERVED74 RESERVED75 PANEL LOCK76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)80 REMOTE START PRESENT81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESS82 SHORT CIRCUIT83 START RELAY ENERGISED84 STARTING ALARM85 STARTING ALARMS ARMED86 STOP BUTTON PRESSED87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODE88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODE89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODE90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODE91 RESERVED92 RESERVED93 WAITING FOR GENERATOR

POLARITY0 - NORMALLY OPEN1 - NORMALLY CLOSED

18

Min Default Unit(CONFIG.OUTPUT-2 PAGE) CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (2) page Max

010

930 0

POLARITY

FUNCTION 0 NOT USED1 AUDIBLE ALARM2 ALARM RESET3 AUTO START INHIBIT4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILURE5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGE6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUN8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILURE9 COMMON ALARM10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARM12 COMMON WARNING ALARM13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARM14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWN15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESS16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVE17 DIGITAL INPUT1 ACTIVE18 DIGITAL INPUT2 ACTIVE19 DIGITAL INPUT3 ACTIVE20 DIGITAL INPUT4 ACTIVE21 DIGITAL INPUT5 ACTIVE22 DIGITAL INPUT6 ACTIVE23 EXPANSION INPUT1 ACTIVE24 EXPANSION INPUT2 ACTIVE25 EXPANSION INPUT3 ACTIVE26 EXPANSION INPUT4 ACTIVE27 EXPANSION INPUT5 ACTIVE28 EXPANSION INPUT6 ACTIVE29 EXPANSION INPUT7 ACTIVE30 EXPANSION INPUT8 ACTIVE31 RESERVED32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER START33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STOP34 EMERGENCY STOP35 FAIL TO START ALARM36 FAIL TO STOP ALARM37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISED38 RESERVED39 GENERATOR AT REST40 GENERATOR AVAILABLE41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSE43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPEN44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN53 RESERVED54 GENERATOR STOPPING55 HORN OUTPUT56 LAMP TEST57 LEVEL PREALARM 58 RESERVED59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARM60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE62 MAINS FAILED TO OPEN63 MAINS FAILURE64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCY65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGE66 MAINS LOAD INHIBIT67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCY68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGE69 NO LOADING COMMAND70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARM71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWN72 OVER CURRENT73 RESERVED74 RESERVED75 PANEL LOCK76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)80 REMOTE START PRESENT81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESS82 SHORT CIRCUIT83 START RELAY ENERGISED84 STARTING ALARM85 STARTING ALARMS ARMED86 STOP BUTTON PRESSED87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODE88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODE89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODE90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODE91 RESERVED92 RESERVED93 WAITING FOR GENERATOR

POLARITY0 - NORMALLY OPEN1 - NORMALLY CLOSED

CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS SELECTIONS

0 NOT USEDOutput is not used

1 AUDIBLE ALARMThe output indicates that the internal sounder is operating. It may be use for external sounder.

2 ALARM RESETThe output indicates that an alarm reset being performed. Once the alarm reset has been completed, the output become inactive again. The output could be used to give an external reset signal to external systems.

3 AUTO START INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as 'auto start inhibit' is active.

4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILUREThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as 'auxiliary mains failure' is active.

5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGEThis output indicates that a battery high voltage alarm has occurred.

6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGEThis output indicates that a battery low voltage alarm has occurred.

7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUNThis output indicates that a scheduled run has been called for. If the module is in the 'auto' and mains okey, the module will change mode to 'test' and the generator will run if no shutdown alarms are present.

8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILUREThis output indicates that a charging alternator failure has occurred

9 COMMON ALARMThis output indicates that a warning, electrical trip or shutdown alarm has been activated.

10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMThis output indicates that an electrical trip alarm has been activated. This output can only be reset by removal of the fault and by then pressing the RESET button.

11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARMThis output indicates that a shutdown alarm has been activated. This output can only be reset by removal of the fault and by then pressing the RESET button or by using an external 'alarm reset' input.

12 COMMON WARNING ALARMThis output indicates that a warning alarm has been activated. This output is normally self-resetting on removal of the fault.

13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a high engine coolant temperature warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a high engine coolant temperature shutdown has occurred.

15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESSThis output source will be active when the cooling off-load timer is running.

16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVEThe output indicates that the delayed alarms now enabled. Can be used to control external logic circuitry.

17 DIGITAL INPUT1 ACTIVEThis output indicates that digital input 1 is active.

19






23 EXPNSION CONFIGURABLE INPUT1 ACTIVEThis output indicates that expansion configurable input 1 is active.








31 RESERVED

32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STARTThis output should energise as soon as engine has started so the fan should be running when the engine is running. This output should continue to operate for Cooling Fan Time parameter after engine has stopped.

33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STOPThis output indicates that can be made to energise for Cooling Fan Time parameter after the engine shuts down (to run an electric cooling fan on the radiator).

34 EMERGENCY STOPThis output indicates that an emergency stop alarm has occurred.

35 FAIL TO START ALARMThis output indicates that the engine has not started after the specified number of attempts.

36 FAIL TO STOP ALARMThis output indicates that the generator has failed to stop within the selected time

37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISEDThe output mimics the operation of the fuel relay. It can be used to control external logic circuitry.

38 RESERVED

20

39 GENERATOR AT RESTThe output indicates that the generator is not running.

40 GENERATOR AVAILABLEThis output indicates when the generator is ready to accept load, i.e. after safety on and warm up timers have timed out.

41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARYThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as 'generator closed auxiliary' is active.

42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSEThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the generator contactor or breaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use 'generator closed auxiliary' feedback.

43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPENThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the generator contactor or breaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use 'generator closed auxiliary' feedback.

44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator high frequency warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator high frequency shutdown has occurred.

46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator high voltage warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator high voltage shutdown has occurred.

48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input has been configured as 'generator load inhibit' is active.

49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator low frequency warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator low frequency shutdown has occurred.

51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator low voltage warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator low voltage shutdown has occurred.

53 RESERVED

54 GENERATOR STOPPINGThis output source indicates that the engine has been instructed to stop but has not come to rest.

55 HORN OUTPUTThis output indicates that the horn alarm has occurred.

56 LAMP TESTThis output indicates that the module is performing a lamp test. Once the lamp test completed, the output will become inactive again. The output can be used to feed a lamp test on external modules or panel lamps.

57 LEVEL PREALARMThis output indicates that a level warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

58 RESERVED

21

59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARMThis output indicates that the generator is now due for maintenance either because it has used all the available running hours or the periodic maintenance time has expired. To clear the output a maintenance reset must be performed.

60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARYThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as 'mains closed auxiliary' is active.

61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSEThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the mains contactor or breaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use 'mains closed auxiliary' feedback.

62 MAINS FAILED TO OPENThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the mains contactor or breaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use 'mains closed auxiliary' feedback.

63 MAINS FAILUREThis output indicates that the module has sensed that a failure of the incoming AC mains supply. This output will become active whenever the mains voltage or frequency goes out of limits, or if the auxiliary mains failure input active (if used) and the mains transient timer has expired.

64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCYThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply frequency has exceeded the frequency limit setting.

65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGEThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply voltage has exceeded the voltage limit setting.

66 MAINS LOAD INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input has been configured as 'mains load inhibit' is active.

67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCYThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply frequency has fallen below the frequency setting.

68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGEThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply voltage has fallen below the voltage limit setting.

69 NO LOADING COMMANDThis output indicates that the module is not calling of the generator contactor or breaker to be closed. Should the module close the generator contactor this output will become inactive.

70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a low oil pressure warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a low oil pressure shutdown has occurred.

72 OVER CURRENT ALARMThis output indicates that the over current trip level has been reached.

73 RESERVED

74 RESERVED

75 PANEL LOCKThis output indicates that the module 'panel lock' is active. If the panel lock input is active, the modul will not respond to operation of the Mode select or start buttons. This allows the module to be placed into a spesific mode (such as auto) and then secured.

22

76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)The output controls the pre-heater. Pre-heat output is available for the duration of pre-heat timer, which terminates prior to cranking.

77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)The output controls the pre-heater. As ' Pre-heat (during pre-heat timer)' mode but pre-heat is also available during cranking.

78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)The output controls the pre-heater. As ' Pre-heat (until safety on)' but pre-heat continues to be available until the warm-up timer has elapsed.

79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)The output controls the pre-heater. As ' Pre-heat (until end of cranking)' but pre-heat is also available while waiting for the delayed alarms to become active.

80 REMOTE START PRESENTThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as 'remote start' is active. This output could be used to pass the remote start signal on to elsewhere in the control system.

81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESSThis output source will be active to indicate that the return timer is running.

82 SHORT CIRCUITThis output indicates that the module has detected a short circuit on the generator output.

83 START RELAY ENERGISEDThe output mimics the operation of the start relay. Can be used to control external logic circuitry.

84 STARTING ALARMThis output is used to supply an external sounder with a signal that the engine is about to start. The output will be active during the start delay and pre-heat timer (if used).

85 STARTING ALARMS ARMEDThe output indicates that the starting alarms are now enabled. It can be used to control external logic circuitry. Starting alarms are armed as soon as module commences starting of the engine and remain armed until the engine at rest.

86 STOP BUTTON PRESSEDThis output indicates that the stop pushbutton being operated. Once the button is released the output will become inactive.

87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Auto mode.

88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Manual mode.

89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Stop mode.

90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Test mode.

91 RESERVED

92 RESERVED

93 WAITING FOR GENERATORThis output indicates that the engine has been instructed to start but has not yet become available. Once the generator becomes available this output will be in-active. (Available = generator frequency and voltage levels are above the 'loading' levels set in the configuration.)

23

Min Default(START TIMERS PAGE) START TIMERS page Max

Mains Transient Delay

Remote Start Delay

Remote Stop Delay

Pre-Heat

3

Pre-Heat Bypass

0 999940 360040 25000 25000 250

Safety On Delay 80 99Horn Duration 600 (dis) 999Charge Excitation Time 150 99(cont)Cooling Fan Time 00 250

24

REMOTE START DELAY

REMOTE STOP DELAY

PRE-HEAT

PRE-HEAT BYPASS

SAFETY ON DELAY

HORN DURATION

CHRG.EXCITATION TIM

ELECTR.COOL.FAN TIM

MAINS TRANS.DELAY

Mains Fail Delay 0.00.0 20.0MAINS FAIL DELAY

MAINS TRANSIENT DELAYThis timer dictates how long a mains anomaly must be present before the module will respond to it. This can be used to prevent nuisance tripping when switching loads etc.

REMOTE START DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will wait after it has received a remote start signal before it will attempt to start. This prevent un-necessary starting on a fluctuating mains supply etc.

REMOTE STOP DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will wait after it has received a remote stop signal before it will attempt to stop. This prevent un-necessary stopping on a fluctuating mains supply etc.

PRE-HEAT This timer dictates the duration that the pre-heat output will be active before an attempt is made to start the engine. Once this timer is expired cranking will commence.

PRE-HEAT BYPASSThis feature allows the module to start a hot engine without performing an un-necessary pre-heat delay. The bypass timer is triggered by the generator starting and actually being loaded. If the generator started but does not achieve loading then the timer will not be triggered. The bypass timer is initiated once the engine has come to rest. If any attempts to start are requested within the duration of the bypass timer the start sequence will bypass the pre-heat timer.

SAFETY ON DELAY This timer dictates how long the module will ignore the Low Oil Pressure, High Engine Temperature, Underspeed, Undervolts and any other inputs configured as active from safety on. It allows the values such as oil pressure to rise to their operating values on starting without triggering an alarm. Once the timer has expired all alarm conditions are monitored again. If configured to use 'fast loading', should all the monitored conditions, such as oil pressure, come to expected state prior to the end of the safety on timer, the timer will be terminated prematurely ensuring maximum protection as soon as possible.

HORN DURATION This timer dictates how long the horn will work after the last error detected. Once after this timer ended module will do horn reset.

CHARGE EXCITATION TIME Charge excitation was selectable as momentary / continuous operation.This timer dictates how long the Charge excitation will active.

COOLING FAN TIME This timer dictates how long the Cooling Fan will continue to operate.

MAINS FAIL DELAY The unit uses this parameter to decide the mains fail.

Note-1 : dis = disable cont = continuous

UnitSec

Min

SecSecSec

Sec

SecSecSecSec

Min Default(LOAD/STP.TIMERS PAGE) LOAD/STOPPING TIMERS page Max

Warmup Timer

Return Delay

Cooling Timer

Generator Frequency Error Control Time

3

Generator Voltage Error Control Time

0 250600 3600

1200 99994.00.0 10.04.00.0 10.0

Fail To Stop Time 200 99

25

RETURN DELAY

COOLING TIME

GEN.FR.ERR.CNT.TIME

GEN.VL.ERR.CNT.TIME

FAIL TO STOP TIME

WARM UP TIME

WARMUP TIMER This timer is initiated once the engine is up and running. It delays loading the generator until it has stabilised. Once this timer is expired the 'Close generator' signal will be given and the generator is available to be loaded.

RETURN DELAY This timer dictates how long the module will wait before it will un-load the generator (back to the mains supply if AMF) and initialise it's run-on and shutdown cycle. This is ensure that the mains supply has stabilised before transferring the load back to mains.

COOLING TIMER This is the time the generator is to run off-load once the load transfer signal has ceased. This gives the engine time to cool down before shutdown.

GENERATOR FREQUENCY ERROR CONTROL TIME If firstly generator frequency is out of under and over set points this timer is initiated. If generator frequency is out of under and over set points when this timer expires a 'generator frequency error' alarm signal is generated.

GENERATOR VOLTAGE ERROR CONTROL TIMEIf firstly generator voltage is out of under and over set points this timer is initiated. If generator voltage is out of under and over set points when this timer expires a 'generator voltage error' alarm signal is generated.

FAIL TO STOP TIME Once the module has given a shutdown signal to the engine it expects the engine to come to rest. It monitors the Oil pressure and speed sensing sources and if they still indicate engine movement when this timer expires a 'Fail To Stop' alarm signal is generated.

UnitSecSecSecSecSecSec

26

Min Default(BREAKERS PAGE) BREAKERS page MaxGen Close Breaker Contact Type

Gen Close Timer

Gen Open Timer

Main Close Breaker Contact Type

NO / NC 051 25051 250051 25051 250

0 250 2

Mains Close Timer

Mains Open Timer

Transfer Time

NO / NC

GEN.CLOS.BREK.C.TYP

GEN.CLOSE TIMER

MAIN CLS.BREK.C.TYP

MAINS CLOSE TIMER

GEN.OPEN TIMER

TRANSFER TIME

MAINS OPEN TIMER

Mains and Gen schalters have only close drives and if close drive off schalter will open.Parameters; GEN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, GEN CLOSE TIMER(if gen closed input selected), GEN OPEN TIMER(if gen closed input selected), MAIN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, MAINS CLOSE TIMER(if mains closed input selected), MAINS OPEN TIMER(if mains closed input selected), TRANSFER TIME.

Example:

Note-1 : NO / NC : Normally Open / Normally Close

For closingGen. Shalter

Gen. Closed Out.(NO)

Gen. Closed Out.(NC)

For openingGen. Shalter

ClosedGen. Shalter Opened

t[s]

t[s]

Unit

SecSec

SecSec

Sec

27

GEN. CLOSE TIMER This is used to monitor the closure of the generator contactor or breaker. It will only operate if an auxiliary input is configured as 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' and connected to the auxiliary on the generator contactor or breaker. Once a generator closed signal is issued the 'gen close timer' is initiated. Should the 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' input become active the timer the 'gen close timer' is cancelled. If the timer expires and the 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' has not become active the module will issue a 'generator failed to close' alarm.

GEN. OPEN TIMER This is used to monitor the opening of the generator contactor or breaker. It will only operate if an auxiliary input is configured as 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' and connected to the auxiliary on the generator contactor or breaker. Once a generator open signal is issued the 'gen open timer' is initiated. Should the 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' input become in-active the timer 'gen open timer' is cancelled. If the timer expires and the 'Generator Closed Auxiliary' has not become in-active the module will issue a 'generator failed to open' alarm.

MAINS CLOSE TIMER This is used to monitor the closure of the mains contactor or breaker. It will only operate if an auxiliary input is configured as 'Mains Closed Auxiliary' and connected to the auxiliary on the mains contactor or breaker. Once a mains closed signal is issued the 'mains close timer' is initiated. Should the 'Mains Closed Auxiliary' input become active the timer the 'mains close timer' is cancelled. If the timer expires and the 'Mains Closed Auxiliary' has not become active the module will issue a 'mains failed to close' alarm.

MAINS OPEN TIMER This is used to monitor the opening of the mains contactor or breaker. It will only operate if an auxiliary input is configured as 'Mains Closed Auxiliary' and connected to the auxiliary on the mains contactor or breaker. Once a mains open signal is issued the 'mains open timer' is initiated. Should the 'Mains Closed Auxiliary' input become in-active the timer the 'mains open timer' is cancelled. If the timer expires and the 'Mains closed auxiliary' has not become in-active the module will issue a 'mains failed to open' alarm.

TRANSFER TIME This is used to allow for fixed duration transfer breaks when switching from mains to generator and back. It can be used to ensure that the supply is removed from the load for fixed period of time to allow pumps/motors to come to rest etc.

Min Default(ENG.MAINT.ALARM PAGE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE ALARM page Max

Running Hours Interval

Maintenance Date Interval

Force Engine Shutdown When Maintenance Is Due En/Dis

Engine Running Hour (Lsb)

50

Engine Running Hour

0(dis) 9999

Engine Running Hour(Msb)

ENAB/ DIS00 255

DIS

00

0(dis) 12 6

0 2550 14

28

Min Default Unit(COMMUNICATION PAGE) COMMUNICATION page MaxSlave Address 11 247

0 4 3Baud Rate0 - 1200 baud1 - 2400 baud2 - 4800 baud3 - 9600 baud4 - 19200 baud

Stop Bit (1 stop bit, 2 stop bit)

0 2 0

0 1 0

MAINT.DATE INTERVAL

ENG.STP.WH.MANT.E/D

ENGIN.RUN.HOUR(LSB)

ENGINE RUNNING HOUR

ENGIN.RUN.HOUR(MSB)

RUNN.HOURS INTERVAL

SLAVE ADDRESS

BAUD RATE

PARITY

STOP BIT

Min Default Unit(LCD CONFIG.PAGE) LCD CONFIGURATION page Max

Scroll Time For Error Messages

Digital Contrast

Backlight On/Off

40 99 sec80 1500 1

DIGITAL CONTRAST

BACKLIGHT ON/OFF

ERR.MESS SCROLL TIM

ERR.MESS SCROLL TIMError messages are displayed eighth line of LCD Display. If more than one error condition is present, each of them is displayed during time defined by Auto Scroll Timer parameter.

DIGITAL CONTRASTIt is used to change contrast of LCD Display.

BACKLIGHT ON/OFF0- Backlight on. 1- Backlight off.

UnitHour

Month

Parity0 - NONE1 - ODD2 - EVEN

29

Min Default(WR.CALENDR&EXER.PAGE) WORKING CALENDAR & EXERCISE page Max

14400(dis) 14400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

144014400.0 23.59 0.0

0(dis)

0(dis)

0(dis)

0(dis)

0(dis)

0(dis)

WORK.PERIOD ON MON.

WORK.START TIME MON

WORK.PERIOD ON TUE.

WORK.START TIME TUE

WORK.PERIOD ON WED.

WORK.START TIME WED

WORK.PERIOD ON THU.

WORK.START TIME THU

WORK.PERIOD ON FRI.

WORK.START TIME FRI

WORK.PERIOD ON SAT.

WORK.START TIME SAT

WORK.PERIOD ON SUN.

WORK.START TIME SUN

0(dis) 99 017

0.0 23.59 0.01

EXER.WORKING PERIOD

EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK

EXER.WORK.START TIM

Working calendar working time on Monday

Working calendar work start time on Monday

Working calendar working time on Tuesday

Working calendar work start time on Tuesday

Working calendar working time on Wedn.

Working calendar work start time on Wedn.

Working calendar working time on Thurs.

Working calendar work start time on Thurs.

Working calendar working time on Friday

Working calendar work start time on Friday

Working calendar working time on Satur.

Working calendar work start time on Satur.

Working calendar working time on Sunday

Working calendar work start time on Sunday

Generator exercise working time on related day

Generator exercise working day of week

Generator exercise work start time on related day

Please enter the days of the weekly workdays for Working Function. Example:WORK.PERIOD ON MON. (dis)0 The working function is Mondays disabled.

(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Monday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME MON 12.20 The working function is every Monday started at 12.20 o'clock(if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON TUE. (dis)0 The working function is Tuesdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Tuesday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME TUE 12.20 The working function is every Tuesday started at 12.20 o'clock(if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON WED. (dis)0 The working function is Wednesdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Wednesday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME WED 12.20 The working function is every Wednesday started at 12.20 o'clock(if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON THU. (dis)0 The working function is Thursdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Thursday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME THU 12.20 The working function is every Thursday started at 12.20 o'clock(if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON FRI. (dis)0 The working function is Fridays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Friday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME FRI 12.20 The working function is every Friday started at 12.20 o'clock(if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON SAT. (dis)0 The working function is Saturdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Saturday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME SAT 12.20 The working function is every Saturday started at 12.20 o'clock(If it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON SUN. (dis)0 The working function is Sundays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Sunday enabled for 120 minutes.

WORK.START TIME SUN 12.20 The working function is every Sunday started at 12.20 o'clock(If it is enabled)

Please enter the day of the week for Exercise Function. Example:EXER.WORKING PERIOD (dis)0 The exercise function is disabled.

(10) The exercise function is enabled for 10 minutes. EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK 1=Monday,2=Tuesday,3=Wednesday,4=Thursday,5=Friday,6=Saturday,7=SundayEXER.WORK.START TIM 12.20 The exercise function is started at 12.20 o'clock

(If it is enabled)

UnitMinute

Hour-minuteMinute

Minute

Minute

Minute

Minute

Minute

Minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Hour-minute

Min Default(DATE SETUP PAGE) DATE SETUP page MaxYEARMONTH

0 991 12

DATE 1 31DAY 1 7HOUR 0 23MIN 0 59SEC 0 59

Min Default(PASSWORD PAGE) PASSWORD page MaxOPERATOR PASSWORDTECHNICIAN PASSWORD

00 99990 9999 0

OPERATOR PASSWORDUse this option to change the Operator password. This password allows access to operator parameters section.

TECHNICIAN PASSWORDUse this option to change the Technician password. It allows access to both operator and technician parameters section.

30

YEAR

MONTH

DATE

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

OPERATOR PASSWORD

TECHNICIAN PASSWORD

Error Messages And Explanations:

BATTERY HIGH ERROR! : Battery High ErrorBATTERY LOW ERROR! : Battery Low ErrorCAN BUS ERROR! : Can Bus ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-1 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 1 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-2 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 2 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-3 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 3 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-4 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 4 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-5 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 5 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-6 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 6 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-7 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 7 ErrorEXPAN.SPARE-8 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 8 ErrorGEN BR.NOT CLOS.ALR! : Generator Breaker Not Closed alarmGEN BR.NOT OPEN.ALR! : Generator Breaker Not Opened alarmGEN OVER FRQ.PREALR! : Generator Over Frequency PrealarmGEN OVER VOL.PREALR! : Generator Over Voltage PrealarmGEN UNDER FRQ.PREAL! : Generator Under Frequency PrealarmGEN UNDER VOL.PREAL! : Generator Under Voltage PrealarmGENERATOR STOP ERR! : Generator Stop ErrorLEVEL ERROR! : Fuel Level ErrorLEVEL PREALARM! : Fuel Level PrealarmMAINS BR.NOT CL.ALR! : Mains Breaker Not Closed alarmMAINS BR.NOT OP.ALR! : Mains Breaker Not Opened alarmMAINTENANCE ERROR! : Maintenance errorOVER CURRNT EL.TRIP! : Over Current Electrical TripPRESSURE PREALARM! : Oil Pressure PrealarmSHORT CIRCUIT ERROR! : Short Circuit ErrorSPARE-3 ERROR! : Spare 3 ErrorSPARE-4 ERROR! : Spare 4 ErrorSPARE-5 ERROR! : Spare 5 ErrorSPARE-6 ERROR! : Spare 6 ErrorTEMPERAT. PREALARM! : Generator Temperature Prealarm

Unit

Unit

Event Messages And Explanations:

BATTERY LOW ERROR: Battery high voltage alarmBATTERY HIGH ERROR: Battery low voltage alarmCAN BUS ERROR: Can Bus errorCHANGED MODE TO OFF: Changed mode to offCHANGED MODE TO MAN: Changed mode to manualCHANGED MODE TO TEST: Changed mode to testCHANGED MODE TO AUTO: Changed mode to autoCHARGE ALTERNTR FAIL: Charge alternator failEMERGENCY STOP ERROR: Emergency stop errorEXPAN.SPARE-1 ERROR: Expansion Spare-1 errorEXPAN.SPARE-2 ERROR: Expansion Spare-2 errorEXPAN.SPARE-3 ERROR: Expansion Spare-3 erroraEXPAN.SPARE-4 ERROR: Expansion Spare-4 errorEXPAN.SPARE-5 ERROR: Expansion Spare-5 errorEXPAN.SPARE-6 ERROR: Expansion Spare-6 errorEXPAN.SPARE-7 ERROR: Expansion Spare-7 errorEXPAN.SPARE-8 ERROR: Expansion Spare-8 errorFAIL TO START ALARM: Generator fail to startGEN BR.NOT CLOS.ALRM: Gen breaker close errorGEN BR.NOT OPEN.ALRM: Gen breaker open errorGENERATOR STOP ERROR: Generator fail to stopGEN OVER FRQ.PREALRM: Generator high frequency pre-alarmGEN OVER FRQ.SHUTDWN: Generator high frequency shutdownGEN OVER VOL.PREALRM: Generator high voltage pre-alarmGEN OVER VOL.SHUTDWN: Generator high voltage shutdownGEN UNDER FRQ.PREALR: Generator low frequency pre-alarmGEN UNDER FRQ.SHTDWN: Generator low frequency shutdownGEN UNDER VOL.PREALR: Generator low voltage pre-alarmGEN UNDER VOL.SHTDWN: Generator low voltage shutdownLEVEL ERROR: Fuel level alarmLEVEL PREALARM: Fuel level pre-alarmMAINS BR.NOT CLS.ALR: Mains breaker close errorMAINS BR.NOT OPN.ALR: Mains breaker open errorMAINTENANCE ERROR: Generator maintenance errorMAINTENANCE WARNING: Generator maintenance warningOIL PRESSURE PREALRM: Oil pressure pre-alarmOIL PRESSURE SHUTDWN: Oil pressure shutdownOVER CURRENT ALARM: Over current alarmSHORT CIRCUIT ALARM: Short circuit alarmSPARE-1 ERROR: Spare 1 errorSPARE-2 ERROR: Spare 2 errorSPARE-3 ERROR: Spare 3 errorSPARE-4 ERROR: Spare 4 errorSPARE-5 ERROR: Spare 5 errorSPARE-6 ERROR: Spare 6 errorTEMPER.HIGH PREALARM: High temperature pre-alarmTEMPER.HIGH SHUTDOWN: High temperature shutdown

31

EAOM-210 FL.eng / ver 0.7Pages 1 / 154

EAOM-210 FLAUTOMATIC TRANSFER & SWITCHING UNIT

FOR DIESEL/GAS GENERATORSUser Manual

EMKO ELEKTRONIK A.S.Demirtas Org. San. Bolg.Karanfil Sk. No: 6 TR16369 Bursa / TURKEY

Phone : +90 224 261 1900Fax : +90 224 261 1912Url : www.emkoelektronik.com.tre-mail : [email protected]

[email protected]


Section 1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4

Section 2 Installation................................................................................................ 6

2.1 Unit Configuration....................................................................................................... 6

2.2 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................................ 6Figure 2.1 Front view Figure 2.2 Panel cut-out ................................................................................. 6

Figure 2.3 Side view. ............................................................................................7

2.3 Electrical Connections.................................................................................................. 7Figure 2.4 Rear view.............................................................................................8Figure 2.5 EAOM-210 FL three phase connections schematic. ............................................................. 9

Table 2.1 Unit wiring ................................................................................................................................. 11

Table 2.2 Unit wiring description ............................................................................................................ 13

Section 3 Definition Of Front Panel And Programming ..................................................... 15

3.1 Front Panel Description...............................................................................................15

3.2 Programming Procedure ..............................................................................................17

3.3 Accessing to the Operator Parameters............................................................................173.3.1 Changing and Saving Operator Parameter Values .................................................................. 19

3.4 Accessing to the Technician Parameters .........................................................................213.4.1 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter Values .............................................................. 30

3.5 Programmable function definitions ................................................................................32

3.6 Pc Interface ..............................................................................................................863.6.1 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................... 86

3.6.2 9 pin D connector/FCC68(4 pin) connection lead................. Hata! Yer imi tanımlanmamış.

3.6.3 Installation Instruction ............................................................................... 863.6.3.1 Minimum system requirements.................................................................. 863.6.3.2 Installing EAOM-210 FL V00/SW ................................................................. 863.6.3.3 To Run EAOM-210 FL V00/SW communication software .................................... 87

3.6.4 Description ...................................................................................................................................... 89

3.6.4.1 Main Menu........................................................................................... 89File Menu.................................................................................................................................. 89

Window Menu .......................................................................................................................... 89

Program Menu ......................................................................................................................... 90

Observation Menu ................................................................................................................... 91

Operator Parameters Menu................................................................................................... 95

Technician Parameters Menu ............................................................................................... 96

Setting Menu............................................................................................................................ 98

Help Menu ................................................................................................................................ 99

Section 4 Commissioning ........................................................................................ 100

4.1 Manual operation..................................................................................................... 100

4.2 Auto Operation........................................................................................................ 101

4.3 Test Mode Operation ................................................................................................ 101


Section 5 Operation .............................................................................................. 102

5.1 Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................. 1025.1.1 LCD Display Description ............................................................................................................... 102

5.1.2 Failure Indicators Description...................................................................................................... 113

5.2 Mode transition ....................................................................................................... 114

5.3 Manual Start ........................................................................................................... 114

5.4 Manual Stop............................................................................................................ 114

5.5 Auto Operation........................................................................................................ 114

5.6 Test Operation ........................................................................................................ 1155.6.1 Exercise Function ........................................................................................................................ 115

Section 6 Fault Finding .......................................................................................... 116

6.1 General.................................................................................................................. 116

6.2 Error Messages ........................................................................................................ 116Table 6.1 Fault finding....................................................................................118

Section 7 Specifications & Ratings ............................................................................ 119

Section 8 Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 122

User Defined Parameter: ........................................................................................ 123

List-1:......................................................................................................................... 123


Section 1 Introduction

The EAOM-210 FL provides for automatic transfer of a load from mains to generator in theevent of a mains failure. Intended for unattended operation, it is able to detect failure ofany phase of the mains and to start and switch over to a generator if the mains voltagegoes outside pre-set limits. Both automatic and manual control is possible. A test mode isalso available which allows the generator to be run without taking the load.

The unit monitors generator operation and gives warning of any faults that are detected.The unit monitors:

• Engine speed

• Engine Oil pressure

• Coolant temperature

• Fuel Level

• Battery voltage

• Charge generator voltage

• Engine run time

• Number of starts

• Next maintenance

• Mains volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)

• Mains volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)

• Mains Hz

• Generator volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)

• Generator volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)

• Generator Hz

• Generator kVA

• Generator kW

• Generator kVAr

• Generator pf

• Generator kVAh

• Generator kWh

• Generator kVArh

• Load Amps

• Earth current (IEA)

It controls:

• Engine fuel supply or engine stopping

• Starter motor

• Alarm horn

• Automatic generator start and load transfer on mains failure

• Mains Open, Mains Close, Generator Open and Generator Close contactors

EAOM-210 FL features a 128x64 Dot-matrix LCD display, including:

• Mains volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)

• Mains volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)

• Mains Hz

• Generator volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)

• Generator volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)


• Generator Hz

• Generator kVA

• Generator kW

• Generator kVAr

• Generator kVAh

• Generator kWh

• Generator kVArh

• Generator pf

• Engine Rpm

• Load Amps (IL1, IL2, IL3, IT)

• Earth current (IEA)

• Engine Oil pressure

• Coolant temperature

• Fuel Level

• Battery voltage

• Charge generator voltage

• Real Time

• Engine run time

• Next maintenance hour

• Next maintenance month

• Error messages (if available)

• Event Logs

• Program parameters

The unit is extensively programmable through the front panel, with password protection ontwo levels. Operational parameters can also be monitored and controlled from a PC via abuilt-in RS232 port.

If the engine fails to start on the first attempt, further attempts are made up to aprogrammed number of times or until successful.

If a fault is detected, the unit shuts down the engine and indicates the failure by flashing arelevant fault LED.

Emergency stop input provide for remote control of the engine.

The user configurable inputs 4 and 5 can be programmed to perform 26 different functions.Other four user configurable inputs can be programmed to perform 25 different functions.

Four user configurable relay outputs can be programmed for 93 different functions.


Section 2 Installation

2.1 Unit Configuration

The unit can be programmed using the buttons and display on the front panel or EAOM-210FL software. Refer to Section 3 Definition Of Front Panel And Programming for details.

2.2 Mechanical Installation

The unit is designed for panel mounting. Fixing is by four screw fixings. ( See Figure 2.1)1. Insert the unit in the panel cut-out from the front.2. Insert the fixings in the slotted at the corners of the unit and tighten the fixing screwsto secure the unit against the panel.

144

mm

204mm

186mm

138

mm

V

HIGH TEMPERATURE

FAILED TO START

LOW OIL PRESSURE

SPEED FAILURE

VOLTAGE FAILURE

CHARGING FAIL

RPM

MAINS

MANUALTESTAUTOOFFRESETTEST

PROG

EAOM - 210 FL

STOP

START

GENGINERUNNING

LOAD

Figure 2.1 Front view. Figure 2.2 Panel cut-out

During the equipment is putted in hole on the metal panel while mechanicalinstallation some metal burrs can cause injury on hands, you should be careful.Installation parts of equipment should be tighten properly. The equipment can be

drop from mounting place reason of vibration if installation parts leave soft.

Please read the following information before installing.A visual inspection of this product for possible damage occurred during shipment isrecommended before installation. It is your responsibility to ensure that qualified

mechanical and electrical technicians install this product.

Before beginning installation of this product:- Disconnect all electrical power to the machine.- Make sure the machine cannot operate during installation.- Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.

- Read and follow all installation instructions.


7m

m16

.5m

m34.5

mm

89.5mm29mm

144mm

Figure 2.3 Side view.

2.3 Electrical Connections

1 52 63 74 8 9

3531 41

10

3632 42

11

3733 43 45

12

3834 44 46 RS-232

13

39 40

14

23

15

24

16

25

17

26

18

27

19

28

20

29 30

21 22

CH

AR

GE

GE

N.

D+

(W

.L.)

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 3

- BATTERY

E.

ST

OP

L1

MAINS

L2

L3

N L1

L2

L3

N

GENERATOR CO

MM

ON

LE

VE

LS

EN

DE

R

TE

MP.

SE

ND

ER

OIL

PR

ES

.S

EN

DE

R

MAGNETICPICKUP

(Max. 10kHz)

SGN

GND

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 4

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 5

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 6

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

MA

INS

OP

EN

CO

NTA

CT

OR

MA

INS

CL

OS

EC

ON

TA

CT

OR

GE

N. O

PE

NC

ON

TA

CT

OR

GE

N. C

LO

SE

CO

NTA

CT

OR

MAXIMUM300 V (Ph - N)


LO

W O

IL P

RE

S.

OR

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T 1

+ B

AT

TE

RY

- B

AT

TE

RY

CO

NF. O

UT-4

CO

NF. O

UT-3

CO

NF. O

UT-2

+ B

AT

TE

RY

16

A @

25

0 V

16

A @

25

0 V

16

A @

25

0 V

5A

@25

0 V

5A

@25

0 V

5A

@25

0 V

+ B

AT

TE

RY

SO

LE

NO

ID

STA

RT

BATTERYVOLTAGE

8-32 V

ICOMIL2IL3IEA

LOADRS 232

COMMUNICATON

• •••

IL1HO

RN

OU

T O

RC

ON

F. O

UT-1

HIG

H T

EM

P.

OR

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T 2

+BATTERY

** IT CAN BE USEDAS A DIGITAL INPUTBY SELECTING FROM THE PROGRAMPARAMETERS

*

CH

AR

GE

GE

N.

D+

(W

.L.)

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 3

- BATTERY

E. S

TO

P

L1

MAINS

L2

L3

N L1

L2

L3

N

GENERATOR LE

VE

LS

EN

DE

R

TE

MP

.S

EN

DE

R

OIL

PR

ES

.S

EN

DE

R

MAGNETICPICKUP

(Max. 10kHz)

SGN

GND

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 6

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

5A

@250 V

MA

INS

OP

EN

CO

NTA

CT

OR

MA

INS

CL

OS

EC

ON

TA

CT

OR

GE

N. O

PE

NC

ON

TA

CT

OR

GE

N. C

LO

SE

CO

NTA

CT

OR



LO

W O

IL P

RE

S.

OR

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T 4

+ B

AT

TE

RY

- B

AT

TE

RY

CO

NF. O

UT-4

CO

NF. O

UT-3

CO

NF. O

UT-2

+ B

AT

TE

RY

16A

@25

0 V

16A

@25

0 V

16A

@25

0 V

5A @

250 V

5A @

250 V

5A @

250 V

+ B

AT

TE

RY

SO

LE

NO

ID

STA

RT

BATTERYVOLTAGE

8-32 V

ICOMIL2IL3IEA

LOADRS 232

COMMUNICATON

• •••

IL1HO

RN

OU

T O

RC

ON

F. O

UT-1

HIG

H T

EM

P.

OR

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T 5

+BATTERY

** IT CAN BE USEDAS A DIGITAL INPUTBY SELECTING FROM THE PROGRAMPARAMETERS

*

- BATTERY

NC

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 2

CO

NF

. IN

PU

T 1


Figure 2.4 Rear view.

This equipment does not contain any parts and material related to users. Onlyqualified personnel and technician trained specially should work on this equipment. Thisequipment contains dangerous voltage inner circuits for human life . There is severe

dangerous for human life on the case of unauthorised intervene.


FUSE-1

FUSE-2

FUSE-3

FUSE-4

FUSE-5

FUSE-6

FUSE-10

FUSE-11

15

26

32

32

5

5A

5A

5A

5A

29

27

74

24

26

30

28

8

L1

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

Maxim

um

~30

0V

Max

imu

m ~

300V

Ma

ins

C

on

tac

tor

Op

en

R

ela

y O

ut.

L2

L3

N

M

Ma

ins

C

on

tacto

r

Clo

se

Rela

y O

ut.

LO

AD

G

Gen

. C

on

tac

tor

Op

en

R

ela

y O

ut.

Ge

n.

Co

nta

cto

r

Clo

se

Re

lay O

ut.

Ele

ctr

ical in

terl

ock

Me

ch

an

ica

l in

terl

oc

k

41

42

43

44

45

46

MA

INS

L1

L2

L3

N

22

12 Oil Pressure

Temperature

Level

Conf. Input-6

Mag

ne

tic

Pic

ku

p

21

11

20

10

19

18

17

16

14

13

E. Stop

Conf. Input-3

39

40

35

32

33

31

15

16A

16A

16A

5A

5A

5A

Conf. Output-2

Conf. Output-3

Conf. Output-4

34

36

37

38

1

2SGN

GND

4

+ BATTERY

STA

RT

ER

CH

AR

GE

GE

N.

STARTRELAY

SOLENOID

+B

AT

FUSE-7

FUSE-8

FUSE-9

D+

(W.L

)

CHARGE GENERATOR

3

High temp. or Conf. Input-5

Low oil pres. or Conf. Input-4

Horn or Conf. Output-1

**

It c

an

be u

sed

as

a d

igita

l in

put

by

sele

cting

fro

m

the

pro

gra

m

para

mete

rs.

*

Conf. Input-2

Conf. Input-1

Figure 2.5 EAOM-210 FL three phase connections schematic.FUSE-1, FUSE-2, FUSE-3, FUSE-4, FUSE-5, FUSE-6, FUSE-7 1 A. TFUSE-8 should meet the current required by configurable output-2, 3, 4 – 15 A.T maxFUSE-9 should meet the current required by solenoids (Max. 16 A. T)FUSE-10, FUSE-11 Max. 5A. T


2- Screened cable must be used for connecting the Magnetic Pickup, ensuring that the

screen is grounded at one end ONLY.

1- Connect the unit as shown in the appropriate diagram, Figure 2.5 . Be sure

to connect the battery supply the right way round and battery negative should begrounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit to facilitateconnection.


Table 2.1 shows the connections and recommended cable sizes. Table 2.2 describesthe functions of the connections.

Table 2.1 Unit wiring

Pin Description Cable Size(mm²)

Notes

1 Mains voltage input (L1) 2,5

2 Mains voltage input (L2) 2,5 3 phase applications only.

3 Mains voltage input (L3) 2,5 3 phase applications only.

4 Mains voltage neutral 2,5

5 Alternator voltage input (L1) 2,5

6 Alternator voltage input (L2) 2,5 3 phase applications only.

7 Alternator voltage input (L3) 2,5 3 phase applications only.

8 Alternator voltage neutral 2,5

9 Not connected

10 Fuel level sender 1Connect to fuel levelsender

11 Coolant temperature sender 1Connect to Coolanttemperature sender

12 Low oil pressure sender 1Connect to Low oil pressuresender

13

14Input from magnetic pick-up 1

Connect to magnetic pick-up device

15 Input from charge generator 1 NC to “0” volt.

16 Configurable input-6 1 Switch to “BATTERY +”.

17 High temperature or configurable input-5 1 Switch to “0” volt.

18 Low oil pressure or configurable input-4 1 Switch to “0” volt.

19 Configurable input-3 1 Switch to “0” volt.



22 Input from emergency stop 1 NC to “0” volt. When theswitch is opened, theengine is stopped.

23 Mains Contactor Open Relay Output 2,5

24 Mains Contactor Open Relay Output 2,5

25 Mains Contactor Close Relay Output 2,5

26 Mains Contactor Close Relay Output 2,5

27 Gen. Contactor Open Relay Output 2,5

28 Gen. Contactor Open Relay Output 2,5

29 Gen. Contactor Close Relay Output 2,5

30 Gen. Contactor Close Relay Output 2,5

31 Output to fuel / stop solenoid 2,5 16 A. Max.DC supply from Pin 32

32 +Battery supply input 2,5 Supplies to Pin 31,33,34

33 Output to start 2,5 16 A. Max.DC supply from Pin 32

34 Horn or configurable relay output-1 2,5 16 A. Max.DC supply from Pin 32

35 +Battery supply input 2,5 Supplies to Pin 36,37,38

36 Configurable relay output-2 2,5 5 A. Max.DC supply from Pin 35




39 - Battery supply to EAOM-210 FL 2,5 Supplies to unit

40 + Battery supply to EAOM-210 FL 2,5 Supplies to unit

41 CT Secondary for Earth current 2,5 Connect to secondary ofEarth current monitoringCT

42 CT Secondary for Earth current 2,5 Connect to secondary ofEarth current monitoringCT

43 CT Secondary for load L3 2,5 Connect to secondary ofload L3 monitoring CT



46 Common for load L1, L2, L3 2,5 Connect to secondary ofload common monitoringCT


Table 2.2 Unit wiring description

Pin Function1 L1

2 L2

3 L3

Mains voltage inputs. Used to detect failure for controlling automatic transfer of loadto alternator. Pins 2 and 3 not used on single phase applications.

4 Mains voltage neutral

5 L1

6 L2

7 L3

Alternator voltage inputs. Unit can be programmed to use frequency of alternatoroutput to detect when engine has started. Pins 6 and 7 not used on single phaseapplications.

8 Alternator voltage neutral

9 Not connected

10 Fuel level sender

11 Coolant temperature sender

12 Low oil pressure sender

13 Magnetic input +ve. An AC signal from the magnetic pick-up +ve for speed sensing.

14 Magnetic input –ve. An AC signal from the magnetic pick-up -ve for speed sensing.

15 Input from charge generator. Can be used to detect when engine has started.

16Configurable input-6. This is a negative switched configurable input, see DigitalConfigurable Input-6 Page Section for options available. It is possible to configure input tobe a normally closed signal or a normally open signal.

17

High Temperature or Configurable input-5. This is a negative switched. If Configurableinput-5 is not selected as High Temperature, It is possible to configure input to be anormally closed signal or a normally open signal. See Digital Configurable Input-5 PageSection for options available.

18

Low Oil Pressure or Configurable input-4. Normally closed contact. Switch to 0V. IfConfigurable input-4 is not selected as Low Oil Pressure, It is possible to configure input tobe a normally closed signal or a normally open signal. See Digital Configurable Input-4 PageSection for options available.




22Input from emergency stop switch. Normally closed contact. Switch to 0V. when the switchis opened, the engine is stopped.

23Mains Contactor Open Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 24.

24Mains Contactor Open Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 24.

25Mains Contactor Close Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 26.

26Mains Contactor Close Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 25.

27Gen. Contactor Open Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 28.

28Gen. Contactor Open Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 27.


29Gen. Contactor Close Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 30.

30Gen. Contactor Close Relay Output. See Breakers Page Section for options available. Voltsfree contacts to 29.

31Output to fuel / stop relay. DC supply from Pin 32. Controls fuel to engine or controlsengine stopping.

32 +Battery supply input. Supplies to Pin 31,33,34

33 Output to start relay. DC supply from Pin 32. Controls starter motor.

34Horn or configurable relay output-1. DC supply from Pin 32. See Configurable Output-1 PageSection for options available.

35 +Battery supply input. Supplies to Pin 36,37,38

36Configurable relay output-2. DC supply from Pin 35. See Configurable Output-2 Page Sectionfor options available.



39 - Battery input supplies EAOM-210 FL

40 + Battery input supplies EAOM-210 FL

41 CT Secondary for Earth current (IEA).

42 CT Secondary for Earth current (IEA).

43 CT Secondary for load L3.



46 CT Secondary for load common.


Section 3 Definition Of Front Panel And Programming

3.1 Front Panel Description

OFFTEST

AUTO TEST MANUALRESET

PROG

STARTMAINS

LOAD

STOP

N P 23 4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12

17

18 20

19 21

22

2928272624

13

3130

114 15 16

23 25

Number Comment:1 The red LED illuminates only when the EAOM-210 FL in the Programming Mode.

2The green LED indicates that Mains voltage and frequency is within limits and is readyto take over the load.

3 The LED shows that the load is connected to the mains. It’s colour is green.

4 The LED shows that the load is supplied from the generator. It’s colour is green.

5The green LED indicates that Generator Voltage is within limits and is ready to takeover the load.

6 The green LED indicates that the engine has started and is running.

7In the MAN, AUTO and TEST modes, the green LED indicates that the engine is startingup or is running.

8In the MAN, AUTO and TEST modes, the red LED indicates that the engine has stoppingor stopped.

9 This red LED shows that the unit is in the OFF mode.

10 This red LED shows that the unit is in the AUTO mode.

11 This red LED shows that the unit is in the TEST mode.

12 This red LED shows that the unit is in the MANUAL mode.

13When this button is pressed, the unit goes into its PROGRAMMING Mode and LED (1)illuminates.

14This button is used for showing next working screen in normal operation. InProgramming mode, it operates as an page changing function or increment function(increase value).


Number Comment:

15This button is used for showing previous working screen in normal operation. InProgramming mode, it operates as an page changing function or decrement function(decrease value).

16This button is used for rotating between Event Log screens in normal operation, andbetween programming parameters in programming mode.

17 This button closes the mains contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

18 This button opens the mains contactor, only operative when manual mode is selected.

19This button closes the alternator contactor, only operative when manual mode isselected.

20This button opens the alternator contactor, only operative when manual mode isselected.

21 The START button is used for starting the engine when the unit is in the Manual Mode.

22 The STOP button is used for stopping the engine when the unit is in the Manual Mode.

23 The LAMP TEST button illuminates all LED indicators.

24 This button will silence the alarm horn after a failure has been detected.

25 This button will reset the controller after a failure has been detected.

26 The OFF button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the OFF Mode.

27 The AUTO button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the AUTO Mode.

28 The TEST button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the TEST Mode.

29 The MAN button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the MANUAL Mode.

30128x64 Dot matrix LCD Display. This is used for displaying the electrical measurementsduring normal operation (features explained in section 5.1.1.), and editing/inspectingprogramming parameters in program mode.

31 Failure Indicators. Detailed information available in section 5.1.2.


3.2 Programming Procedure

Many of the unit functions can be set by programming. Programming can becarried out only while the unit is in OFF mode. Press the OFF (26) button. If the engineis running, it will stop and the LED (9) lights on.The parameters have been divided into groups according to their functions. Every grouphas a title and firstly user must determine the title (page) for accessing to the parameters.Refer to the parameters section for detailed information about parameters.

3.3 Accessing to the Operator Parameters

OPERATOR SECTION

PASSWORD

0

PROG

Operation Screen

Note1: If Enter button is pressed and the operator password is zero, Password screen is ignored.

OPERATOR PASSWORD

When the prog button is pressed, password is asked for accessing to parameters.

User can access to operator parameters by entering operator or technician password. This selection is done with increment and decrement buttons.

Enter password with increment and decrement buttons.

Press the Enter button to confirm password. If the password is incorrect, the unit will drop out of program mode.

Note2: When Password message is shown, parameters can be seen by pressing Enter button without entering operator password. But user can not change the parameters.

Operator and technician can access to this page.

MAINS LEVELS Page

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PASSWORD

161

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

GEN.VOLT.LEVELS PAGE

PROG

Operator or technician can access to the following page by pressing increment button



GENERATOR VOLTAGE LEVELS Page

MAINS & LOAD L12:380Vac IL1: 126A Fq:50.0Hz AUTO

L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A

CRANKNG ATTEMPOVER SPEED PREALARM!


Press pr og butto n to exit

from Pro gram M ode and turn to o peration screen.

Op erator a nd techn ician ca n access to this

pag e

Op erator o r technic ian can access to the foll owing p age by p ressing incremen t button

C ontinue t o press in cremen t and

d ecrement buttons to chan ge the p age.

GENERA TOR F EQUENC Y LEVELS Page

Op erator a nd techn ician ca n access to this pag e GENERA TOR C URRENT /POWE R LEVELS Page

By pr essing E NTER b utton,

user can acce ss to al l param eters in related page.

OPERAT OR SECTIO N

GEN.F REQ.LEVEL S PAGE

PROG Operator or tech nician ca n acces s to the

former p age by pressing decrem ent butto n

OPERAT OR SECTIO N GEN.C UR/POW.LV L PAGE

PROG Operator or tech nician ca n acces s to the former p age by pressing decrem ent butto n

If t he sens ing opti ons ge nerator fre quency parame ter(Gen 1) in

Mis cellan eous pag e(Gen) is disab le, thi s page is ignore d.

Press prog button to exit from Program Mode and turn to operation screen.

Operator and technician can access to this page


Continue to press increment and decrement buttons to change the page.

GENERATOR FEQUENCY LEVELS Page

Operator and technician can access to this page

GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER LEVELS Page

By pressing ENTER button, user can access to all parameters in related page.

OPERATOR SECTION

GEN.FREQ.LEVELS PAGE

PROG Operator or technician can access to the former page by pressing decrement button

OPERATOR SECTION

GEN.CUR/POW.LVL PAGE

PROG Operator or technician can access to the former page by pressing decrement button

If the sensing options generator frequency parameter(Gen1) in Miscellaneous page(Gen) is disable, this page is ignored.


3.3.1 Changing and Saving Operator Parameter ValuesExample-1 : To change Mains Under Voltage parameter in ”MAINS LEVELS PAGE”, user mustaccess to “MAINS LEVELS PAGE” page firstly.

OPERATOR SECTION

PASSWORD

0

PROG

Operation Screen

OPERATOR PASSWORD






MAINS LEVELS Page

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PASSWORD

161

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

MAINS UNDER VOLTAGE

Vac 320

PROG

Press Enter button to access to first parameter in Mains Levels page.

Mains Under Voltage parameter

Parameter can be changed with increment and decrement buttons

OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

MAINS UNDER VOLTAGE

Vac 322

PROG

Press Enter button to confirm the changed value and access to the following parameter.

Note1: If Enter button is pressed and the operator password is zero, Password screen is ignored.


L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

MAINS UNDER V.RET.

Vac 340

PROG

Mains Under Voltage Return parameter

MAINS LEVELS Page

When Prog button is pressed, related page can be accessed.

OPERATOR SECTION

MAINS LEVELS PAGE

PROG

If Prog button is pressed again, operation screen is shown.


Operation ScreenMAINS & LOAD L12:380Vac IL1: 126A Fq:50.0Hz AUTO

L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A


PROG


3.4 Accessing to the Technician Parameters

TECHNICIAN SECTION

PROG

Operation Screen


PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PROG

TECHNICIAN PASSWORD


TECHNICIAN SECTION

PASSWORD

162

PROG

User can access to technician parameters by entering technician password. This selection is done with increment and decrement buttons.

Press the Enter button.

TECHNICIAN SECTION

PASSWORD

0

PROG


Note1: If Enter button is pressed and the technician password is zero, Password screen is ignored.

TECHNICIAN SECTION

GEN.CUR/POW.ACT.PAGE

PROG

Note2: When Password message is shown, parameters can be seen by pressing Enter button without entering password. But user can not change the parameters.

technician

GENERATOR CURRENT/POWERACTIONS Page

TECHNICIAN SECTION

MISCELLANEOUS PAGE

PROG

Technician can access to the following page by pressing increment button

Technician can access to the following page by pressing increment button

MISCELLANEOUS Page

Operator can not access to this page.



L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



TECHNICIAN SECTION

ENGINE STAR.OPT PAGE

PROG Technician can access to the former page by pressing decrement button.


Technician can access to the following page by pressing increment button.

ENGINE STARTING OPTIONS Page

ENGINE CRANK DISCONNECT Page

GENERATOR SPEED SETTINGS Page

If the sensing options pick up parameter(Gen2) in Miscellaneous page(Gen) is disable, this page is ignored.

ENGINE PLANT BATTERY Page

ANALOGUE INPUTS Page

TECHNICIAN SECTION

ENG.CRANK DISCN.PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

GEN.SPED SETING PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

ENG.PLANT BATTR PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

ANALOGUE INPUTS PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

ANALG.SENDR LIN.PAGE




ANALOGUE SENDER LINEARISATIONS Page


TECHNICIAN SECTION

CAN BUS CONFIG. PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PAGEDIG.CNF.INPUT-1




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PAGEDIG.CNF.INPUT-2




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PAGEDIG.CNF.INPUT-3




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PAGEDIG.CNF.INPUT-4




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PAGEDIG.CNF.INPUT-5




DIGITAL CONFIGURABLE INPUT-1 Page





CANBUS CONFIGURATION Page


TECHNICIAN SECTION

DIG.CNF.INPUT-6 PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP PAGE.CNF.INPUT-1




TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





EXPANSION CONFIGURABLE INPUT-1 Page






If the Expansion Module Selection parameter in CanBus Configuration page is disable, this page is ignored.






TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP.CNF.INPUT-6 PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP.CNF.IN PAGEPUT-7




TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP.CNF.IN PAGEPUT-8




TECHNICIAN SECTION

CONFIG.OUTPUT-1 PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





EXPANSION CONFIGURABLEINPUT-6 Page

CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT-1 Page









TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP.CONFG.OUT PAGE-1




TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXP.CONFG.OUT-3 PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





EXPANSION CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT-1 Page












TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION





TECHNICIAN SECTION

START TIMERS PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

LOAD/STP.TIMERS PAGE




START TIMERS Page

LOAD/STOPPING TIMERS Page








TECHNICIAN SECTION

BREAKERS PAGE




BREAKERS Page

ENGINE MAIN TENANCE ALARM Page

EXERCISE Page

COMMUNICATION Page

TECHNICIAN SECTION

LCD CONFIG.PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

ENG.MAINT.ALARM PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

COMMUNICATION PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

EXERCISE PAGE




LCD CONFIGURATION Page

DATE SETUP Page

PASS WORD Page

TECHN ITION SE CTION DATE SETUP P AGE

PROG Tech nician ca n acces s to the f ormer page by press ing dec rement b utton.

Op erator c an not ac cess to this pa ge.

Tec hnician can acce ss to th e follow ing pag e by pr essing in cremen t button .

TECHN ITION SE CTION PASS WORD PAG E

PROG

Op erator c an not ac cess to this pa ge.

Press p rog butto n to ex it

from P rogram M ode an d turn to operation screen .

Co ntinue t o press in cremen t and

dec rement buttons to chan ge the pag e.

By pressin g ENTER button ,

use r can a ccess to all par ameter s in relate d page .


DATE SETUP Page

PASSWORD Page

TECHNICIAN SECTION

DATE SETUP PAGE




TECHNICIAN SECTION

PASSWORD PAGE

PROG


Press prog button to exit from Program Mode and turn to operation screen.


By pressing ENTER button, user can access to all parameters in related page.


3.4.1 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter ValuesExample-1 : To change CT Primary parameter in ”GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER ACTIONSPAGE”, user must access to “GEN.CUR/PW.ACT.PAGE” firstly.

TECHNICIAN SECTION

PROG


PROG

OPERATOR SECTION

PROG

TECHNICIAN PASSWORD


TECHNICIAN SECTION

PASSWORD

162

PROG



TECHNICIAN SECTION

PASSWORD

0

PROG


Note1: If Enter button is pressed and the technician password is zero, Password screen is ignored.

TECHNICIAN SECTION


PROG



TECHNICIAN SECTION


CT PRIMARY

Vac 100

PROG

Press Enter button to access to first parameter in Generator Current/Power Actions page.

Parameter can be changed with increment and decrement buttons

Press Enter button to confirm the changed value and access to the following parameter.

CT Primary parameter

TECHNICIAN SECTION


CT PRIMARY

Vac 500

PROG

Operation Screen


L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



When Prog button is pressed, related page can be accessed.

If Prog button is pressed again, operation screen is shown.


Operation Screen

CT Primary (Earth Fault) parameterTECHNICIAN SECTION


EARTH FAULT CT PRIM

Vac 100

PROG

TECHNICIAN SECTION


PROG



L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A


PROG


3.5 Programmable function definitions

Operator parameters

(MAINS LEVELS PAGE) MAINS LEVELS pageMAINS UNDER VOLTAGE Mains Under Voltage VAC 60 – 600 320MAINS UNDER V.RET. Mains Under Voltage Return VAC 60 – 600 340MAINS OVER VOLTAGE Mains Over Voltage VAC 60 – 600 440MAINS OVER V.RETURN Mains Over Voltage Return VAC 60 – 600 420MAINS UNDER FREQ. Mains Under Frequency Hz 20.0 – 75.0 45.0MAINS UNDER F.RET. Mains Under Frequency Return Hz 20.0 – 75.0 48.0MAINS OVER FREQ. Mains Over Frequency Hz 20.0 – 75.0 55.0MAINS OVER F.RETURN Mains Over Frequency Return Hz 20.0 – 75.0 52.0

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to lit the “Mains Okey LED”.In Automatic mode, the unit uses these parameters to switch the load between the mainssupply and the alternator.

(GEN.VOLT.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR VOLTAGE LEVELS pageGEN.UNDER VOLTAGE Generator Under Voltage VAC (dis)60 – 600 320GEN.UNDER V.PRE-ALR Generator Under Voltage Pre-Alarm VAC (dis)60 – 600 340GEN.LOADING VOLTAGE Generator Loading Voltage VAC 60 – 600 345GEN.OVER V.PRE-ALR Generator Over Voltage Pre-Alarm VAC (dis)60 – 600 420GEN.OVER V.PR-A.RET Generator Over Voltage Pre-Alarm Return VAC 60 – 600 400GEN.OVER VO.SHUTDWN Generator Over Voltage Shutdown VAC 60 – 600 440

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to display Voltage Failure and Voltage ErrorMessages. Also, the unit uses Generator Loading Voltage parameter to decide when to takethe load.

(GEN.FREQ.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR FREQUENCY LEVELS pageGEN.UNDER FREQUENCY Generator Under Frequency Hz (dis)30.0 – 75.0 43.0GEN.UNDER F.PRE-ALR Generator Under Frequency Pre-Alarm Hz (dis)30.0 – 75.0 45.0GEN.LOADING FREQ. Generator Loading Frequency Hz 30.0 – 75.0 46.0GEN.OVER F.PRE-ALR Generator Over Frequency Pre-Alarm Hz (dis)30.0 – 75.0 55.0GEN.OVER F.PR-A.RET Generator Over Frq Pre-Alarm Return Hz 30.0 – 75.0 54.0GEN.OVER FR.SHUTDWN Generator Over Frequency Shutdown Hz (dis)30.0 – 75.0 58.0

The unit uses these parameters to decide when to display Speed Failure and FrequencyError Messages. Also, the unit uses Generator Loading Frequency parameter to decidewhen to take the load.

(GEN.CUR/POW.LVL.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER LEVELS pageGEN.OVER CURRENT Generator Over Current A AC 0 – 9999 9999GEN.SHORT CIRCUIT Generator Short Circuit A AC 0 – 9999 9999GEN.EARTH FAULT Generator Earth Fault A AC 0 – 9999 100


Technician parameters

(GEN.CUR/POW.ACT.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER ACTIONS pageCT PRIMARY CT Primary A AC 0 – 9999 500EARTH FAULT CT PRIM CT Primary (Earth Fault) A AC 0 – 9999 500

OVER CUR.ACTIONS

Over Current Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

- 0-3 dis

OVER CUR.ALARM TIME Over Current Alarm Time Sec 0 - 99 0

SHORT CIR.ACTIONS

Short Circuit Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

- 0-3 dis

SHORT CIR.ALRM TIME Short Circuit Alarm Time Sec 0 - 99 0

EARTH FAULT ACTIONS

Earth Fault Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

- 0-3 dis

EARTH FAU.ALRM TIME Earth Fault Alarm Time Sec 0 - 99 0TOTAL ENERGY CLEAR Total Energy Clear - No-YES noACTIVE ENERGY CLEAR Active Energy Clear - No-YES noREACTIVE ENERGY CLR Reactive Energy Clear - No-YES no

(MISCELLANEOUS PAGE) MISCELLANEOUS pageSENS.OPT.GEN.F.ENAB Sensing Options Generator Frq En/Dis - ENAB DIS ENABSNS.OP.PICKP ENA&FW Sensing Opt Pickup En/Dis & Flywheel - (dis)0-1000 DIS

AC SYSTEMAc System 0 =1phase 2wire, 1= 3phase4wire 2= 3phase 4wire Series Delta

- 0-2 1

FAST LOAD.FEAT.ENAB Fast Loading Feature En/Dis - ENAB DIS DISALL WRN.ARE LTCH.EN All Warnings Are Latched En/Dis - ENAB DIS DISMAINS FAIL.DETEC.EN Mains Failure Detection En/Dis - ENAB DIS ENAB

LK.MA.FA.FO.MA.CN.ELook Mains Failure For Mains Cont.En/Dis

- ENAB DIS DIS

GAS/DIESEL SELECT Engine Fuel (Gas/ Diesel) Selection - GAS/ DIESEL DIESELSTOP/FUEL SELECTION Stop / Fuel Selection - STOP/FUEL FUELSTOP SOLENOID TIME Stop Solenoid Time Sec 5 - 99 20IGNITION DELAY Ignition Delay Sec 1 - 99 5GAS VALVE DELAY Gas Valve Delay Sec 1 - 99 5MIN.IGNITION SPEED Min Ignition Speed RPM 10 - 1500 200NOMINAL FREQUENCY Nominal Alternator Frequency Hz 30.0 – 75.0 50.0NOMINAL SPEED Nominal Speed RPM 500 - 5000 3000

SENSING OPTIONS GENERATOR FRQ EN/DIS:ENABLE: Speed sensing will be derived from the generator output frequency.DISABLE: Speed sensing not will be derived from the generator output frequency.

SENSING OPT. PICKUP EN/DIS & FLYWHEELDISABLE: Speed sensing will not be derived from the magnetic pickup.1-1000: Speed sensing will be derived from the magnetic pickup and the number is flywheelteeth on the engine.


AC SYSTEM 3 PHASE 4 WIRE OR 1 PHASE 2 WIRE0: AC system is 1 phase 2 wire.1: AC system is 3 phase 4 wire.2: AC system is 3 phase 4 wire series delta.

FAST LOADING FEATURE EN/DISENABLE: The module will terminate the safety on timer once all monitored parameters havereached their normal settings. This feature is useful if the module is to be used as a standbycontroller as it allows the generator to start and go on load in the shortest possible time.DISABLE: Normal operation, the safety on timer will be observed in full. This feature is usefulif the module is to be used with some small engines where pre-mature termination of thedelay timer can lead to overspeed alarms on start up.

ALL WARNINGS ARE LATCHED EN/DISDisable: Normal operation, the warnings and pre-alarms (except spare inputs, because theyhave their latching or non-latching selections) will automatically reset once the triggeringcondition has cleared.Enable: Warnings and pre-alarms will latched when triggered. To reset the alarm either anexternal reset must be applied to one of the inputs or the ‘Reset’ pushbutton operated, oncethe triggering condition has cleared.

MAINS FAILURE DETECTION EN/DISDisable: The module will not monitor the AC mains supply for failure. The AC mainsinstrumentation will still be active however.Enable: The module will monitor the incoming AC mains supply. Should the supply go outside of limits the module will initiate its automatic mains failure sequence.

LOOK MAINS FAILURE FOR MAINS CONTACTOR EN/DISDisable: In the event of a mains failure the EAOM-210 FL will attempt to maintain the supplyto the load for the incoming AC mains supply until the generator is available to go on load. Inthe event of a generator failure the module will default back to the incoming AC mainssupply. This provides a ‘fail-safe system’, ensuring that in the event of a system failure theload will still be fed from the AC mains supply.Enable: As soon as the module detects a mains failure the mains contactor or breaker relaywill be opened to remove the supply from the load. This is to prevent damage to the load incase of single-phase failure, especially useful if the load is a 3-phase motor or pump. Thesupply to the load will then be fed from the gen-set once it is available. In the event ofgenerator failure the module will open the generator relay and remove the supply to the loaduntil either the mains supply is restored or the generator is restarted.

ENGINE FUEL (DIESEL /GAS) SELECTIONDiesel or Gas engine can be selected.

If diesel engine selected:

STOP/FUEL SELECTIONSelection for the engine has Fuel or Stop selenoid.

STOP SOLEONID TIMEThis timer is used if the unit is configured to operate an Energise to stop engine. It dictatesthe duration that the Stop Solenoid output will remain active after the module has detectedthe engine has come to rest. If the Stop Solenoid output is not configured, this timer will stilloperate, preventing an immediate restart.


Example: Start/stop diagram for Diesel Engine.

The formula signs and indices mean:TPT Preheating time [s]TCT Engagement time [s]TRT Interval between 2 start attempts [s]TDT Engine delayed monitoring [s]


Sta

rt r

eques

t

Pre

-hea

t

Sta

rter

Fuel

rela

y

En

gin

e m

on

ito

rin

g O

N

Rat

ed s

peed

[RP

M]

t[s]

Sta

rtin

gU

nsu

ccess

ful

Succe

ssfu

lS

top

pin

g

tPT

2s

[1/m

in]

;RP

M

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

tRT

tCT

tCT

tDT

Cra

nk

dis

conn

ect

m

agnet

ic p

ick-u

p s

pee

d


If gas engine selected:

IGNITION DELAYWith gas engines often a purging operation is desired before starting. With the engaging ofthe starter the ignition delay is started. If the ‘min ignition speed’ is reached after expiry ofthis time, the configurable relay output ‘ignition’ is set.

GAS VALVE DELAYBy setting the ignition relay the gas valve delay is started. After the expiry of the set time aslong as the number of revolutions is higher than the minimum ignition speed, the gas valve isset. When the necessary engine shutdown process, gas valve is de-energised.

MIN IGNITION SPEEDAfter expiry of the ignition delay the number of revolutions set must be reached, so that theconfigurable relay output ‘ignition’ will be set.

Example: Start/stop diagram for Gas Engine.

The formula signs and indices mean:TRT Interval between 2 start attempts [s]TIT Ignition delay [s]TGT Gas valve delay [s]TDT Engine delayed monitoring [s]


Sta

rt r

equest

Ign

itio

n

Sta

rter

Gas

val

ve

Eng

ine

mon

itori

ng O

N

Min

imum

ign

itio

n s

pee

d

Rat

ed s

pee

d

[RP

M]

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

Sta

rtin

gS

top

pin

g

Min

imum

ig

nit

ion

speed

wil

l n

ot

be

reac

hed

[1/m

in]

;RP

M

5 s

Un

succ

ess

ful

Succ

essf

ul

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

tIT

tIT

tRT

tGT

tDT

Cra

nk d

isco

nn

ect

m

agn

etic

pic

k-u

p s

pee

d


(ENGINE STAR.OPT PAGE) ENGINE STARTING OPTIONS pageAU.ALR.PRIOR STRT.E Audible Alarm Prior To Starting En/Dis - ENAB DIS DISNUMBR OF STR.ATTEMP Number Of Start Attempts - 1 – 10 3CRANKING TIME Cranking Time SEC 5 – 99 5CRANK REST TIME Crank Rest Time SEC 5 – 99 10MUL.STR.ENG.ATEMP.E Multiple Start Engage Attempts E/D (Pick) - ENAB DIS DISENGAGE ATTEMPT TIME Engage Attempt Time (Pickup) SEC 0.1 – 10.0 1.0ENG.ATEMP.REST TIME Engage Attempt Rest Time (Pickup) SEC 0.1 – 10.0 1.0PICK.SNSR FAIL DELY Pickup Sensor Fail Delay(Pickup) SEC 0.1 – 10.0 1.0

AUDIBLE ALARM PRIOR TO STARTING EN/DISENABLE: The audible alarm will sound before the engine starts. The sounder will becomeactive once the start delay is initialised, it will remain active until either the engine reachescrank disconnect speed or pre-heat timers are cancelled.

NUMBER OF START ATTEMPTSThis value is the number of times the module will attempt to start the generator. Should thegenerator start the module will not attempt further starts. If the generator does not start afterthe final attempt, the module will give a ‘Fail to start’ alarm.

CRANKING TIMEThis is the maximum amount of time that the module will energise the starter motor for duringstarting attempts once the starter has engaged.

CRANK REST TIMEThis is the amount of time the module will wait for between start attempts. This is to allow thestarter motor to cool and the starter batteries to recover.

MULTIPLE START ENGAGE ATTEMPTS E/D(Only available if using Magnetic pickup)ENABLE: The module will monitor the flywheel to ensure that the starter motor has engaged.If it detects the starter has not meshed, it will de-energise the start relay and after a shortdelay it will attempt to re-engage the starter. This will be repeated until either the startermotor engages correctly or the number of engage attempts expires. Each start attempt canhave a maximum number of attempts to engage the starter, this value is entered the box.DISABLE: Normal operation, starter engagement with flywheel will not monitored.

ENGAGE ATTEMPT TIME(Only available if using Magnetic pickup and multiple engage attempts)This timer dictates the duration that the module will attempt to engage the starter motorduring each engage attempt. If the magnetic pickup is not detecting movement of theflywheel when this timer expires the engage attempt will terminate. Once all engage attemptshave been made the module will generate ‘Fail to engage’ alarm.

ENGAGE ATTEMPT REST TIME(Only available if using Magnetic pickup and multiple engage attempts)This timer dictates the duration that the module will wait between attempts to engage thestarter.

PICKUP SENSOR FAIL DELAY(Only available if using Magnetic pickup without multiple engage attempts)This is only used if magnetic pickup speed sensing is selected. When cranking, the modulemust receive a speed signal within this time. If no signal is present the generator will beshutdown and Loss of Speed Sensing alarm given.


(ENG.CRANK DISCN.PAGE) ENGINE CRANK DISCONNECT pageCRNK DISCN.ON GEN.F Crank Disconnect On Gen. Frequency Hz 25.0 – 75.0 30.0CRNK DISCN.ON MAG.P Crank Disconnect On Magnetic Pickup RPM 500-6000 500CRNK DISCN.ON GEN.V Crank Disconnect On Gen. Voltage VAC (dis)60 – 600 300CRNK DISC.ON CH.G.V Crank Disconnect On Charge Alt. Voltage VDC (dis)6.0 – 30.0 6.1CRNK DISCN.ON OIL P Crank Disconnect On Oil Pressure BAR (dis)1.0-90.0 dis

(GEN.SPED SETING PAGE) GENERATOR SPEED SETTINGS pageGEN.UNDER SPEED Generator Under Speed RPM (dis)500 – 5000 500GEN.UNDR SPED PRE-A Generator Under Speed Prealarm RPM (dis) 500 – 5000 500GEN.UNDR SP.PR-A.RT Generator Under Speed Prealarm Return RPM 500 – 5000 500GEN.OVER SPED PRE-A Generator Over Speed Prealarm RPM (dis) 500 – 5000 500GEN.OVER SP.PR-A.RT Generator Over Speed Prealarm Return RPM 500 – 5000 500GEN.OVER SP.SHUTDWN Generator Over Speed Shutdown RPM (dis) 500 – 5000 500

(ENG.PLANT BATTR PAGE) ENGINE PLANT BATTERY pageBAT.UNDER V.WARNING Battery Undervolts Warning VDC (dis)6.0 – 30.0 10.0BAT.UNDR V.WARN.RET Battery Undervolts Warning Return VDC 6.0 – 30.0 10.5BAT.UNDER VOL.DELAY Batt Undervolts Volts Delay Sec 0 – 9.9 1.0BAT.OVER V.WARNING Battery Overvolts Warning VDC (dis)6.0 – 30.0 30.0BAT.OVER V.WARN.RET Battery Overvolts Warning Return VDC 6.0 – 30.0 29.5BAT.OVER VOL.DELAY Batt Overvolts Delay sec 0 – 9.9 1.0CHARGE ALT.WARNING Charge Alternator Warning VDC (dis)6.0 – 30.0 6.1

(ANALOGUE INPUTS PAGE) ANALOGUE INPUTS pageOIL PRES.INPUT TYPE Oil Pressure Input Type Dis,nc,no,anlg ANLGOIL PRES.PRE-ALARM Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm BAR (dis)0.0 – 99.9 1.2OIL PRES.PRE-AL.RET Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm Return BAR 0.0 – 99.9 1.4OIL PRES.SHUTDOWN Oil Pressure Shutdown BAR 0.0 – 99.9 1.0TEMP.INPUT TYPE Temperature Input Type Dis,nc,no,anlg ANLGTEMP.PRE-ALARM Temperature Pre-Alarm C (dis)0 - 300 90TEMP.PRE-ALARM RET Temperature Pre-Alarm Return C 0 - 300 88TEMP.SHUTDDOWN Temperature Shutdown C 0 - 300 95LEVEL PRE-ALARM Level Pre-Alarm % (dis)0 - 300 80LEVEL PRE-ALARM RET Level Pre-Alarm Return % 0 - 300 90LEVEL SHUTDOWN Level Shutdown % (dis)0 - 300 70

OIL PRESSURE INPUT TYPEThis section is used to configure the Oil Pressure sender input.dıS: The Oil Pressure input will not be monitored.1: digital & closed for low oil pressure : The Oil pressure input is fed from an enginemounted digital pressure switch. This switch returns a closed signal during low oil pressureconditions (and engine at rest), once oil pressure is established the switch will open.2: digital & open for low oil pressure : The Oil pressure input is fed from an enginemounted digital pressure switch. This switch returns an open signal during low oil pressureconditions (and engine at rest), once oil pressure is established the switch will close.3: analog : The Oil pressure input is connected to a resistive type engine mounted oilpressure transducer.

TEMPERATURE INPUT TYPEThis section is used to configure the Coolant Temperature sender input.dıS: The Coolant Temperature input will not be monitored.1: digital & normally closed : The Coolant Temperature input is fed from an enginemounted digital temperature switch. This switch returns a closed signal during lowtemperature, should the temperature rise above the switch manifacturers trip point the switchcontact will open.2: digital & normally open : The Coolant Temperature input is fed from an engine mounteddigital temperature switch. This switch returns an open signal during low temperature, shouldthe temperature rise above the switch manifacturers trip point the switch contact will close.


3: analog : The Oil pressure input is connected to a resistive type engine mountedtemperature transducer.

Note: If the Level Pre-alarm and Level Shutdown parameters are selected as disable, theLevel showing is ignored.

(ANALG.SENDR LIN.PAGE) ANALOGUE SENDER LINEARISATIONS pageOIL PRESS.SENDER 0 Oil Pressure Sender 0 R 0 -650 10OIL PRESSURE 0 Oil Pressure 0 BAR 0 – 99.9 0.0OIL PRESS.SENDER 1 Oil Pressure Sender 1 R 0 -650 62OIL PRESSURE 1 Oil Pressure 1 BAR 0 –99.9 2.0OIL PRESS.SENDER 2 Oil Pressure Sender 2 R 0 -650 111OIL PRESSURE 2 Oil Pressure 2 BAR 0 –99.9 4.0OIL PRESS.SENDER 3 Oil Pressure Sender 3 R 0 -650 156OIL PRESSURE 3 Oil Pressure 3 BAR 0 –99.9 6.0OIL PRESS.SENDER 4 Oil Pressure Sender 4 R 0 -650 205OIL PRESSURE 4 Oil Pressure 4 BAR 0 –99.9 10.0TEMP.SENDER 0 Temperature Sender 0 R 0 -650 360TEMPERATURE 0 Temperature 0 C 0 -300 34TEMP.SENDER 1 Temperature Sender 1 R 0 -650 145TEMPERATURE 1 Temperature 1 C 0 -300 54TEMP.SENDER 2 Temperature Sender 2 R 0 -650 50TEMPERATURE 2 Temperature 2 C 0 -300 84TEMP.SENDER 3 Temperature Sender 3 R 0 -650 43TEMPERATURE 3 Temperature 3 C 0 -300 100TEMP.SENDER 4 Temperature Sender 4 R 0 -650 10TEMPERATURE 4 Temperature 4 C 0 -300 150LEVEL SENDER 0 Level Sender 0 R 0 -650 10LEVEL 0 Level 0 - 0 -300 0LEVEL SENDER 1 Level Sender 1 R 0 -650 40LEVEL 1 Level 1 - 0 -300 25LEVEL SENDER 2 Level Sender 2 R 0 -650 80LEVEL 2 Level 2 - 0 -300 50LEVEL SENDER 3 Level Sender 3 R 0 -650 140LEVEL 3 Level 3 - 0 -300 75LEVEL SENDER 4 Level Sender 4 R 0 -650 185LEVEL 4 Level 4 - 0 -300 100

(CANBUS CONFIG. PAGE) CANBUS CONFIGURATION pageEXPANS. MODUL SELECT Expansion Module Selection Disable,Enable Disable


(DIG.CNF.INPUT-1 PAGE) DIGITAL CONFIGURABLE INPUT (1) page

DIS,USERCNF.OR LISTDisable, User Configured Or Select FromList

(dis)0 - 2 1

POLARITYIf User Configured-Polarity (Close To Activate, Open ToActivate)

0 - 1 0

INDICATION

If User Configured-Indication(Status, Warning Non-Latching,Warning Latching, Electrical Trip,Shutdown)

0 – 4 0

ACTIVATIONIf User Configured-Activation (Active From Starting, ActiveFrom Safety On, Always Active)

0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

0 Remote Start1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator22 Remote Inhibit23 Test on Load24 Generator is supplying the load in OFFmode

0 – 24 2

INPUT TIME DELAY Input time delay SEC 0 - 250 5




(dis)0 - 2 1


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


0 – 4 0


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


0 – 24 3





(dis)0 - 2 1


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


0 – 4 0


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


0 – 24 4





(dis)0 - 2 2


0 - 1 0

INDICATION

If User Configured-Indication(Warning Non-Latching,Warning Latching, Electrical Trip,Shutdown)

1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

0 Remote Start1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator22 Remote Inhibit23 Test on Load24 Generator is supplying the load in OFFmode25 Low Oil Pressure

0 – 25 25





(dis)0 - 2 2


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

0 Remote Start1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator22 Remote Inhibit23 Test on Load24 Generator is supplying the load in OFFmode25 High Temperature

0 – 25 25





(dis)0 - 2 1


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


0 – 24 7



(EXP.CNF.INPUT-1 PAGE) EXPANSION CONFIGURABLE INPUT (1) page


(dis)0 - 2 1

HARDWARE TYPE-Hardware type(0 = -Ve, 1 = +Ve)

0 - 1 0


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator

1 – 21 2





(dis)0 - 2 1


0 - 1 0


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


1 – 21 2





(dis)0 - 2 1


0 - 1 0


0 - 1 0

INDICATION


1 – 4 1


0 – 2 2

SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


1 – 21 2


CONFIGURABLE INPUTS SELECTIONS

0 REMOTE START/STOPIn AUTO mode, if one of the configurable inputs are selected as 0 (Remote Start), themodule doesn’t perform the mains failure control in order to start the generator. In AUTOmode, if one of the configurable inputs are selected as 0 (Remote Start) and this input isactive, then the module will perform the start sequence. If the input is passive module willperform the stop sequence.

1 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILThe Eaom-210 Fl module will monitor the incoming single or three phase supply for OverVoltage, Under Voltage, Over Frequency or Under Frequency. It may be required to monitora different mains supply or some aspect of the incoming mains not monitored by the Eaom-210 Fl. If the devices providing this additional monitoring are connected to operate this input,the Eaom-210 Fl will operate as if the incoming mains supply has fallen outside of limits, thegenerator will be instructed to start and take load. Removal of the input signal will cause themodule to act if the mains has returned to within limits.


2 SIMULATE LAMP TEST BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Lamp Test’ button and is used to provide a remotelylocated Lamp Test push button.

3 SIMULATE HORN RESET BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Horn Reset’ button and is used to provide a remotelylocated Horn Reset push button.4 SIMULATE ALARM RESET BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Alarm Reset’ button and is used to provide a remotelylocated Alarm Reset push button.

5 SIMULATE OFF BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Off’ button and is used to provide a remotely locatedOff mode push button.

6 SIMULATE AUTO BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Auto’ button and is used to provide a remotely locatedAuto mode push button.

7 SIMULATE TEST BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Test’ button and is used to provide a remotely locatedTest mode push button.

8 SIMULATE MANUAL BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Manual’ button and is used to provide a remotelylocated Manual mode push button.

9 SIMULATE START BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Start’ button and is used to provide a remotelylocated start push button.

10 SIMULATE STOP BUTTONThis input mimic’s the operation of the ‘Stop’ button and is used to provide a remotely locatedStop push button.

11 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARYThis input is used to provide feedback to allow the Eaom-210 Fl to give true indication of thecontactor or circuit breaker switching status. It should be connected to the generator loadswitching device auxiliary contact.

12 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBITThis input is used to prevent the Eaom-210 Fl from loading the generator. If the generator isalready on load, activating this input will cause the Eaom-210 Fl to unload the generator.Removing the input will allow the generator to be loaded again.NOTE: This input only operates to control the generator-switching device if the Eaom-210 Flload switching logic is attempting load the generator. It will not control the generator-switching device when the mains is on load.

13 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARYThis input is used to provide feedback to allow the Eaom-210 Fl to give true indication of thecontactor or circuit breaker switching status. It should be connected to the generator loadswitching device auxiliary contact.


14 MAINS LOAD INHIBITThis input is used to prevent the Eaom-210 Fl from loading the mains supply. If the manissupply is already on load, activating this input will cause the Eaom-210 Fl to unload themains supply. Removing the input will allow the mains to be loaded again.NOTE: This input only operates to control the mains-switching device if the Eaom-210 Fl loadswitching logic is attempting to load the mains. It will not control the mains-switching devicewhen the generator is on load.

15 AUTO RESTORE INHIBITWhen module in the AUTO mode. In the event of a remote start / mains failure the generatorwill be instructed to start and take load. On removal of the remote start signal / mains returnthe module will continue to run the generator on load until this AUTO RESTORE INHIBITinput is removed. Once the input is removed the module will transfer the load back to themains supply and follow a normal generator stop sequence. This input allows the module tobe fitted as part of a system where the manual restoration to mains is controlled remotely orby an automated system.

16 AUTO START INHIBITThis input is used to provide an over-ride function to prevent the Eaom-210 Fl from startingthe generator in the event of a remote start / mains out of limits condition occurring. If thisinput is active and a remote start signal / mains failure occurs the Eaom-210 Fl will not give astart command to the generator. If this input signal is then removed, the Eaom-210 Fl willoperate as if a remote start / mains failure has occurred, starting and loading the generator.This function can be used to give an ‘AND’ function so that a generator will only be called tostart if the mains fails and another condition exists whish requires the generator to run. If the‘Auto Start Inhibit’ signal become active once more it will be ignored until the module hasreturned the mains supply on load and shutdown.

17 PANEL LOCKThis input is used to provide security to the installation. If the panel lock input is active, themodule will not respond to operation of the mode select or start buttons. This allows themodule to be placed into a spesific mode (such as Auto) and than secured. The operation ofthe module is not affected and the operator will still be able to view the variousinstrumentation pages etc.NOTE: External control sources (i.e. Simulate Start Button) are not affected by the panel lockinput and will continue to operate normally.

18 SCHEDULED RUNS INHIBITEDThis input is used to prevent the generator for starting in the event of a programmedscheduled run occurring. While the input is active no scheduled runs will occur. If the input isactive when a schedule run is called for, and is removed during the running period the gen-set will start and complete any remaining scheduled running time.

19 RESET MAINTENANCE ALARMThis input used to reset the maintenance alarm. When activated it will reset the maintenancecounter to the pre-configured value (i.e. 250 hours). If the maintenance alarm is configured tomonitor the monthly service interval this will also be reset to the pre-configured period. (i.e. 6months).

20 TRANSFER TO GENERATOR/OPEN MAINSThis input is used to transfer the load to the generator when running in Manual mode.

21 TRANSFER TO MAINS/OPEN GENERATORThis input is used to transfer the load to the mains supply when running in Manual mode.


22 REMOTE INHIBITIn automatic mode, if any of the configurable inputs is congigured as ’16 Auto Start Inhibit’and this input is active, unit inhibits to work of the generator. In addition to this, if this input isactive while the generator is working, unit stops the generator.

23 TEST ON LOADIf this input is active when the unit is in test mode, load is transferred to the generator to dothe test on load. If the input is not active, test is done without load.

24 GENERATOR IS SUPPLYING THE LOAD IN OFF MODEIf this input is active when the unit is in OFF mode, the power is calculated. If the input is notactive, the power is not calculated.

25 LOW OIL PRESSURE (FOR CONFIGURABLE INPUT-4)This input is used as the oil pressure failure input.

25 HIGH TEMPERATURE (FOR CONFIGURABLE INPUT-5)This input is used as the temperature failure input.


(CONFIG.OUTPUT-1 PAGE) CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (1) pagePOLARITY Polarity (Normally Open, Normally Closed) 0 - 1 0

FUNCTION

0 NOT USED1 AUDIBLE ALARM2 ALARM RESET3 AUTO START INHIBIT4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILURE5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGE6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUN8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILURE9 COMMON ALARM10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARM12 COMMON WARNING ALARM13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARM14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWN15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESS16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVE17 DIGITAL INPUT1 ACTIVE18 DIGITAL INPUT2 ACTIVE19 DIGITAL INPUT3 ACTIVE20 DIGITAL INPUT4 ACTIVE21 DIGITAL INPUT5 ACTIVE22 DIGITAL INPUT6 ACTIVE23 EXPANSION INPUT1 ACTIVE24 EXPANSION INPUT2 ACTIVE25 EXPANSION INPUT3 ACTIVE26 EXPANSION INPUT4 ACTIVE27 EXPANSION INPUT5 ACTIVE28 EXPANSION INPUT6 ACTIVE29 EXPANSION INPUT7 ACTIVE30 EXPANSION INPUT8 ACTIVE31 EARTH FAULT32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER START33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STOP34 EMERGENCY STOP35 FAIL TO START ALARM36 FAIL TO STOP ALARM37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISED38 GAS ENGINE IGNITION OUTPUT39 GENERATOR AT REST40 GENERATOR AVAILABLE41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSE43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPEN44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN53 RESERVED54 GENERATOR STOPPING55 HORN OUTPUT56 LAMP TEST57 LEVEL PREALARM58 LOSS OF MAGNETIC PICK-UP SPEED SIGNAL59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARM60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE62 MAINS FAILED TO OPEN63 MAINS FAILURE64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCY65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGE66 MAINS LOAD INHIBIT67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCY68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGE69 NO LOADING COMMAND70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARM71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWN72 OVER CURRENT73 OVERSPEED PRE-ALARM74 OVERSPEED SHUTDOWN75 PANEL LOCK76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)80 REMOTE START PRESENT81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESS82 SHORT CIRCUIT83 START RELAY ENERGISED84 STARTING ALARM85 STARTING ALARMS ARMED86 STOP BUTTON PRESSED87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODE88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODE89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODE90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODE91 UNDERSPEED SHUTDOWN92 UNDERSPEED PRE-ALARM93 WAITING FOR GENERATOR

0 - 93 55



FUNCTION


0 - 93 9



FUNCTION


0 - 93 32


(EXP.CONFG.OUT-1 PAGE) EXPANSION CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (1) pagePOLARITY Polarity (Normally Open, Normally Closed) 0 - 1 0

FUNCTION


0 - 93 9



FUNCTION


0 - 93 9


CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS SELECTIONS

0 NOT USEDOutput is not used

1 AUDIBLE ALARMThe output indicates that the internal sounder is operating. It may be use for externalsounder.

2 ALARM RESETThe output indicates that an alarm reset being performed. Once the alarm reset has beencompleted, the output become inactive again. The output could be used to give an externalreset signal to external systems.

3 AUTO START INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as ‘auto start inhibit’ isactive.

4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILUREThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as ‘auxiliary mains failure’is active.

5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGEThis output indicates that a battery high voltage alarm has occurred.

6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGEThis output indicates that a battery low voltage alarm has occurred.

7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUNThis output indicates that a scheduled run has been called for. If the module is in the ‘auto’and mains okey, the module will change mode to ‘test’ and the generator will run if noshutdown alarms are present.

8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILUREThis output indicates that a charging alternator failure has occurred

9 COMMON ALARMThis output indicates that a warning, electrical trip or shutdown alarm has been activated.

10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARMThis output indicates that an electrical trip alarm has been activated. This output can only bereset by removal of the fault and by then pressing the RESET button.

11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARMThis output indicates that a shutdown alarm has been activated. This output can only bereset by removal of the fault and by then pressing the RESET button or by using an external‘alarm reset’ input.

12 COMMON WARNING ALARMThis output indicates that a warning alarm has been activated. This output is normally self-resetting on removal of the fault.

13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a high engine coolant temperature warning (pre-alarm) hasoccurred.


14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a high engine coolant temperature shutdown has occurred.

15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESSThis output source will be active when the cooling off-load timer is running.

16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVEThe output indicates that the delayed alarms now enabled. Can be used to control externallogic circuitry.















31 EARTH FAULTThis output indicates that the module has detected that an earth fault exists on the generatoroutput.


32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STARTThis output should energise as soon as engine has started so the fan should be runningwhen the engine is running. This output should continue to operate for Cooling Fan Timeparameter after engine has stopped.

33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTER STOPThis output indicates that can be made to energise for Cooling Fan Time parameter after theengine shuts down (to run an electric cooling fan on the radiator).

34 EMERGENCY STOPThis output indicates that an emergency stop alarm has occurred.

35 FAIL TO START ALARMThis output indicates that the engine has not started after the specified number of attempts.

36 FAIL TO STOP ALARMThis output indicates that the generator has failed to stop within the selected time

37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISEDThe output mimics the operation of the fuel relay. It can be used to control external logiccircuitry.

38 GAS ENGINE IGNITION OUTPUTWith the engaging of the starter the ignition delay is started. If the ‘minimum ignition speed’ isreached after expiry of this time, the configurable relay output ‘ignition’ is set. When thenecessary engine shutdown process, firstly gas valve is de-energised. Then ignition output isde-energised that after 5 seconds when the engine speed become lower than ‘minimumignition speed’.

39 GENERATOR AT RESTThe output indicates that the generator is not running.

40 GENERATOR AVAILABLEThis output indicates when the generator is ready to accept load, i.e. after safety on andwarm up timers have timed out.

41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARYThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as ‘generator closedauxiliary’ is active.

42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSEThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the generator contactor orbreaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use ‘generator closed auxiliary’feedback.

43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPENThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the generator contactor orbreaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use ‘generator closed auxiliary’feedback.

44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator high frequency warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.


45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator high frequency shutdown has occurred.

46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator high voltage warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator high voltage shutdown has occurred.

48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input has been configured as ‘generator load inhibit’ isactive.

49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator low frequency warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator low frequency shutdown has occurred.

51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a generator low voltage warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a generator low voltage shutdown has occurred.

53 RESERVED

54 GENERATOR STOPPINGThis output source indicates that the engine has been instructed to stop but has not come torest.

55 HORN OUTPUTThis output indicates that the horn alarm has occurred.

56 LAMP TESTThis output indicates that the module is performing a lamp test. Once the lamp testcompleted, the output will become inactive again. The output can be used to feed a lamp teston external modules or panel lamps.

57 LEVEL PREALARMThis output indicates that a level warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

58 LOSS OF MAGNETIC PICK-UP SPEED SIGNALThis output indicates that the magnetic pick up signal is not sufficient to be used by themodule for speed monitoring. The alarm can only operate if the speed signal fails to appearduring cranking. It is disabled if ‘multiple attempts to engage’ is selected. If the MPU failsduring engine running this would result in an underspeed alarm.

59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARMThis output indicates that the generator is now due for maintenance either because it hasused all the available running hours or the periodic maintenance time has expired. To clearthe output a maintenance reset must be performed.


60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARYThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as ‘mains closed auxiliary’is active.

61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSEThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the mains contactor orbreaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use ‘mains closed auxiliary’feedback.

62 MAINS FAILED TO OPENThis output source has intended to be used to indicate a failure of the mains contactor orbreaker. It can only be used if the module is configured to use ‘mains closed auxiliary’feedback.

63 MAINS FAILUREThis output indicates that the module has sensed that a failure of the incoming AC mainssupply. This output will become active whenever the mains voltage or frequency goes out oflimits, or if the auxiliary mains failure input active (if used) and the mains transient timer hasexpired.

64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCYThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supplyfrequency has exceeded the frequency limit setting.

65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGEThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply voltagehas exceeded the voltage limit setting.

66 MAINS LOAD INHIBITThis output indicates that a digital input has been configured as ‘mains load inhibit’ is active.

67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCYThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supplyfrequency has fallen below the frequency setting.

68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGEThis output indicates that the module has sensed that the incoming AC mains supply voltagehas fallen below the voltage limit setting.

69 NO LOADING COMMANDThis output indicates that the module is not calling of the generator contactor or breaker to beclosed. Should the module close the generator contactor this output will become inactive.

70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that a low oil pressure warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that a low oil pressure shutdown has occurred.

72 OVER CURRENT ALARMThis output indicates that the over current trip level has been reached.

73 OVERSPEED PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that the over speed warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.


74 OVERSPEED SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that the over speed shutdown has occurred.

75 PANEL LOCKThis output indicates that the module ‘panel lock’ is active. If the panel lock input is active,the modul will not respond to operation of the Mode select or start buttons. This allows themodule to be placed into a spesific mode (such as auto) and then secured.

76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)The output controls the pre-heater. Pre-heat output is available for the duration of pre-heattimer, which terminates prior to cranking.

77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)The output controls the pre-heater. As ‘ Pre-heat (during pre-heat timer)’ mode but pre-heatis also available during cranking.

78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)The output controls the pre-heater. As ‘ Pre-heat (until safety on)’ but pre-heat continues tobe available until the warm-up timer has elapsed.

79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)The output controls the pre-heater. As ‘ Pre-heat (until end of cranking)’ but pre-heat is alsoavailable while waiting for the delayed alarms to become active.

80 REMOTE START PRESENTThis output indicates that a digital input that has been configured as ‘remote start’ is active.This output could be used to pass the remote start signal on to elsewhere in the controlsystem.

81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESSThis output source will be active to indicate that the return timer is running.

82 SHORT CIRCUITThis output indicates that the module has detected a short circuit on the generator output.

83 START RELAY ENERGISEDThe output mimics the operation of the start relay. Can be used to control external logiccircuitry.

84 STARTING ALARMThis output is used to supply an external sounder with a signal that the engine is about tostart. The output will be active during the start delay and pre-heat timer (if used).

85 STARTING ALARMS ARMEDThe output indicates that the starting alarms are now enabled. It can be used to controlexternal logic circuitry. Starting alarms are armed as soon as module commences starting ofthe engine and remain armed until the engine at rest.

86 STOP BUTTON PRESSEDThis output indicates that the stop pushbutton being operated. Once the button is releasedthe output will become inactive.

87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Auto mode.


88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Manual mode.

89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Stop mode.

90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODEThe output indicates that the module is in the Test mode.

91 UNDERSPEED SHUTDOWNThis output indicates that an underspeed shutdown has occurred.

92 UNDERSPEED PRE-ALARMThis output indicates that an underspeed warning (pre-alarm) has occurred.

93 WAITING FOR GENERATORThis output indicates that the engine has been instructed to start but has not yet becomeavailable. Once the generator becomes available this output will be in-active. (Available =generator frequency and voltage levels are above the ‘loading’ levels set in theconfiguration.)

(START TIMERS PAGE) START TIMERS pageMAINS TRANS.DELAY Mains Transient Delay sec 0 - 9999 0REMOTE START DELAY Remote Start Delay sec 0 - 3600 4REMOTE STOP DELAY Remote Stop Delay sec 0 - 250 4PRE-HEAT Pre-Heat Sec 0 – 250 3PRE-HEAT BYPASS Pre-Heat Bypass Min 0 – 250 0SAFETY ON DELAY Safety On Delay sec 0 - 99 8HORN DURATION Horn Duration sec (dis)0 - 999 60CHRG.EXCITATION TIM Charge Excitation Time sec 0 – 99(cont.) 15ELECTR.COOL.FAN TIM Cooling Fan Time sec 0 - 250 180MAINS FAIL DELAY Mains Fail Delay sec 0.0 – 20.0 2.0

MAINS TRANSIENT DELAYThis timer dictates how long a mains anomaly must be present before the module willrespond to it. This can be used to prevent nuisance tripping when switching loads etc.

REMOTE START DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will wait after it has received a remote start signalbefore it will attempt to start. This prevent un-necessary starting on a fluctuating mainssupply etc.

REMOTE STOP DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will wait after it has received a remote stop signalbefore it will attempt to stop. This prevent un-necessary stopping on a fluctuating mainssupply etc.

PRE-HEATThis timer dictates the duration that the pre-heat output will be active before an attempt ismade to start the engine. Once this timer is expired cranking will commence.

PRE-HEAT BYPASSThis feature allows the module to start a hot engine without performing an un-necessary pre-heat delay. The bypass timer is triggered by the generator starting and actually being loaded.If the generator started but does not achieve loading then the timer will not be triggered. The


bypass timer is initiated once the engine has come to rest. If any attempts to start arerequested within the duration of the bypass timer the start sequence will bypass the pre-heattimer.

SAFETY ON DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will ignore the Low Oil Pressure, High EngineTemperature, Underspeed, Undervolts and any other inputs configured as active from safetyon. It allows the values such as oil pressure to rise to their operating values on startingwithout triggering an alarm. Once the timer has expired all alarm conditions are monitoredagain. If configured to use ‘fast loading’, should all the monitored conditions, such as oilpressure, come to expected state prior to the end of the safety on timer, the timer will beterminated prematurely ensuring maximum protection as soon as possible.

HORN DURATIONThis timer dictates how long the horn will work after the last error detected. Once after thistimer ended module will do horn reset.

CHARGE EXCITATION TIMECharge excitation was selectable as momentary / continuous operation.This timer dictateshow long the Charge excitation will active.

COOLING FAN TIMEThis timer dictates how long the Cooling Fan will continue to operate.

MAINS FAIL DELAYThe unit uses this parameter to decide the mains fail.

(LOAD/STP.TIMERS PAGE) LOAD/STOPPING TIMERS pageWARM UP TIME Warmup Timer Sec 0 - 250 3RETURN DELAY Return Delay Sec 0 – 3600 5COOLING TIME Cooling Timer Sec 0 – 9999 60GEN.FR.ERR.CNT.TIME Generator Frequency Error Control Time Sec 0.0 – 10.0 1.0GEN.VL.ERR.CNT.TIME Generator Voltage Error Control Time Sec 0.0 – 10.0 1.0FAIL TO STOP TIME Fail To Stop Time Sec 15 – 99 30

WARMUP TIMERThis timer is initiated once the engine is up and running. It delays loading the generator untilit has stabilised. Once this timer is expired the ‘Close generator’ signal will be given and thegenerator is available to be loaded.

RETURN DELAYThis timer dictates how long the module will wait before it will un-load the generator (back tothe mains supply if AMF) and initialise it’s run-on and shutdown cycle. This is ensure that themains supply has stabilised before transferring the load back to mains.

COOLING TIMERThis is the time the generator is to run off-load once the load transfer signal has ceased. Thisgives the engine time to cool down before shutdown.

GENERATOR FREQUENCY ERROR CONTROL TIMEIf firstly generator frequency is out of under and over set points this timer is initiated. Ifgenerator frequency is out of under and over set points when this timer expires a ‘generatorfrequency error’ alarm signal is generated.


GENERATOR VOLTAGE ERROR CONTROL TIMEIf firstly generator voltage is out of under and over set points this timer is initiated. Ifgenerator voltage is out of under and over set points when this timer expires a ‘generatorvoltage error’ alarm signal is generated.

FAIL TO STOP TIMEOnce the module has given a shutdown signal to the engine it expects the engine to come torest. It monitors the Oil pressure and speed sensing sources and if they still indicate enginemovement when this timer expires a ‘Fail To Stop’ alarm signal is generated.

(BREAKERS PAGE) BREAKERS pageHARDW.BREAKER SELCT Hardware Breaker Selection 0 – 2 0GEN.CLOS.BREK.C.TYP Gen Close Breaker Contact Type NO/NC 0 – 1 0GEN.CLOS.BREK.R.TYP Gen Close Breaker Relay Type NOR/PULS 0 – 1 0GEN.CLOSE TIMER Gen Close Timer Sec 1 – 250 5GEN.OPEN.BREK.C.TYP Gen Open Breaker Contact Type NO/NC 0 – 1 0GEN.OPEN.BREK.R.TYP Gen Open Breaker Relay Type NOR/PULS 0 – 1 0GEN.OPEN TIMER Gen Open Timer Sec 1 – 250 5MAIN CLS.BREK.C.TYP Main Close Breaker Contact Type NO/NC 0 – 1 0MAIN CLS.BREK.R.TYP Main Close Breaker Relay Type NOR/PULS 0 – 1 0MAINS CLOSE TIMER Mains Close Timer Sec 1 – 250 5MAIN OPN.BREK.C.TYP Main Open Breaker Contact Type NO/NC 0 – 1 0MAIN OPN.BREK.R.TYP Main Open Breaker Relay Type NOR/PULS 0 – 1 0MAINS OPEN TIMER Mains Open Timer Sec 1 – 250 5BREKR.CLOS.PULS.TIM Breaker Close Pulse Time Sec 0.0 – 10.0 0.5BREKR.OPEN.PULS.TIM Breaker Open Pulse Time Sec 0.0 – 10.0 0.5TRANSFER TIME Transfer Time Sec 0 - 250 2

HARDWARE BREAKER SELECTION0- Mains and Gen schalters have only close drives and if close drive off schalter will open.Parameters; GEN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, GEN CLOSE TIMER(if gen closedinput selected), GEN OPEN TIMER(if gen closed input selected), MAIN CLOSE BREAKERCONTACT TYPE, MAINS CLOSE TIMER(if mains closed input selected), MAINS OPENTIMER(if mains closed input selected), TRANSFER TIME.

Example: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 0;






t[s]

t[s]

1- Mains and Gen schalters have only close drives, when want to schalter close, closebreaker output on and after 1 sec. open breaker output on and after breaker close pulse timeopen breaker output will off. When want to schalter open close breaker output and openbreaker output will off.Parameters; GEN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, GEN CLOSE TIMER(if gen closedinput selected), GEN OPEN BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, GEN OPEN TIMER(if gen closedinput selected), MAIN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, MAINS CLOSE TIMER(if mainsclosed input selected), MAIN OPEN BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, MAINS OPEN TIMER(ifmains closed input selected),BREAKER CLOSE PULSE TIME, TRANSFER TIME.


Example: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 1;






t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

t[s]

Gen. Open Out.(NO)

Gen. Open Out.(NC)

1 s

Breaker closepulse time

2- USER CONFIGURED: User can select all the schalter types.Parameters; GEN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, GEN CLOSE BREAKER RELAYTYPE, GEN CLOSE TIMER(if gen closed input selected), GEN OPEN BREAKER CONTACTTYPE, GEN OPEN BREAKER RELAY TYPE, GEN OPEN TIMER(if gen closed inputselected), MAIN CLOSE BREAKER CONTACT TYPE, MAIN CLOSE BREAKER RELAYTYPE, MAINS CLOSE TIMER(if mains closed input selected), MAIN OPEN BREAKERCONTACT TYPE, MAIN OPEN BREAKER RELAY TYPE, MAINS OPEN TIMER(if mainsclosed input selected), BREAKER CLOSE PULSE TIME(if Gen Close Breaker Relay Type orMain Close Breaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 1), BREAKER OPEN PULSETIME(if Gen Open Breaker Relay Type or Main Open Breaker Relay Type parameter isselected as 1), TRANSFER TIME.

Example-1: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 2 (user configured),Gen. Close Breaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 0 (NOR) and Gen. Open BreakerRelay Type parameter is selected as 0 (NOR);





t[s]

t[s]



Gen. Open Out.(NO)

Gen. Open Out.(NC)

t[s]

t[s]


Closed Opened


Example-2: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 2 (user configured),Gen. Close Breaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 1 (PULSE) and Gen. OpenBreaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 0 (NOR);





t[s]

t[s]



Gen. Open Out.(NO)

Gen. Open Out.(NC)

t[s]

t[s]


Closed Opened



Example-3: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 2 (user configured),Gen. Close Breaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 0 (NOR) and Gen. Open BreakerRelay Type parameter is selected as 1 (PULSE);





t[s]

t[s]



Gen. Open Out.(NO)

Gen. Open Out.(NC)

t[s]

t[s]


Closed Opened

Breaker openpulse time



Example-4: If Hardware Breaker Selection parameter is selected as 2 (user configured),Gen. Close Breaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 1 (PULSE) and Gen. OpenBreaker Relay Type parameter is selected as 1 (PULSE);





t[s]

t[s]



Gen. Open Out.(NO)

Gen. Open Out.(NC)

t[s]

t[s]


Closed Opened





GEN. CLOSE TIMERThis is used to monitor the closure of the generator contactor or breaker. It will only operate ifan auxiliary input is configured as ‘Generator Closed Auxiliary’ and connected to the auxiliaryon the generator contactor or breaker. Once a generator closed signal is issued the ‘genclose timer’ is initiated. Should the ‘Generator Closed Auxiliary’ input become active the timerthe ‘gen close timer’ is cancelled. If the timer expires and the ‘Generator Closed Auxiliary’has not become active the module will issue a ‘generator failed to close’ alarm.

GEN. OPEN TIMERThis is used to monitor the opening of the generator contactor or breaker. It will only operateif an auxiliary input is configured as ‘Generator Closed Auxiliary’ and connected to theauxiliary on the generator contactor or breaker. Once a generator open signal is issued the‘gen open timer’ is initiated. Should the ‘Generator Closed Auxiliary’ input become in-activethe timer ‘gen open timer’ is cancelled. If the timer expires and the ‘Generator ClosedAuxiliary’ has not become in-active the module will issue a ‘generator failed to open’ alarm.

MAINS CLOSE TIMERThis is used to monitor the closure of the mains contactor or breaker. It will only operate if anauxiliary input is configured as ‘Mains Closed Auxiliary’ and connected to the auxiliary on themains contactor or breaker. Once a mains closed signal is issued the ‘mains close timer’ isinitiated. Should the ‘Mains Closed Auxiliary’ input become active the timer the ‘mains closetimer’ is cancelled. If the timer expires and the ‘Mains Closed Auxiliary’ has not becomeactive the module will issue a ‘mains failed to close’ alarm.

MAINS OPEN TIMERThis is used to monitor the opening of the mains contactor or breaker. It will only operate ifan auxiliary input is configured as ‘Mains Closed Auxiliary’ and connected to the auxiliary onthe mains contactor or breaker. Once a mains open signal is issued the ‘mains open timer’ isinitiated. Should the ‘Mains Closed Auxiliary’ input become in-active the timer the ‘mainsopen timer’ is cancelled. If the timer expires and the ‘Mains closed auxiliary’ has not becomein-active the module will issue a ‘mains failed to open’ alarm.


BREAKER CLOSE PULSE TIMEThis is used to determine the duration of the Mains and Generator close signals. This timer isonly used if Pulsed outputs are configured to be used.

BREAKER OPEN PULSE TIMEThis is used to determine the duration of the Mains and Generator close signals. This timer isonly used if Pulsed outputs are configured to be used.

TRANSFER TIMEThis is used to allow for fixed duration transfer breaks when switching from mains togenerator and back. It can be used to ensure that the supply is removed from the load forfixed period of time to allow pumps/motors to come to rest etc.

(LCD CONFIG.PAGE) LCD CONFIGURATION pageERR.MESS SCROLL TIM Scroll Time For Error Messages Sec 0 - 99 4DIGITAL CONTRAST Digital Contrast 0 – 15 8BACKLIGHT ON/OFF Backlight On/Off 0 - 1 0

AUTO SCROLL TIMERError messages are displayed eighth line of LCD Display. If more than one error condition ispresent, each of them is displayed during time defined by Auto Scroll Timer parameter.

DIGITAL CONTRASTIt is used to change contrast of LCD Display.

BACKLIGHT ON/OFF0- Backlight on. 1- Backlight off.

(ENG.MAINT.ALARM PAGE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE ALARM pageRUNN.HOURS INTERVAL Running Hours Interval HOUR (dis)0 - 9999 5000MAINT.DATE INTERVAL Maintenance Date Interval MONTH (dis)0 - 12 6

ENG.STP.WH.MANT.E/DForce Engine Shutdown WhenMaintenance Is Due En/Dis

- ENAB DIS DIS

ENGIN.RUN.HOUR(LSB) Engine Running Hour (Lsb) - 0 - 255 0ENGINE RUNNING HOUR Engine Running Hour - 0 – 255 0ENGIN.RUN.HOUR(MSB) Engine Running Hour(Msb) - 0 - 14 0

(COMMUNICATION PAGE) COMMUNICATION pageSLAVE ADDRESS Slave Address 1 - 247 1

BAUD RATE

Baud Rate0=12001=24002=48003=96004=19200

0 - 4 3

PARITY Parity; 0= NONE, 1= ODD, 2= EVEN 0 - 2 0STOP BIT Stop Bit 0 – 1 0


(WR.CALENDR&EXER.PAGE) WORKING CALENDAR & EXERCISE page

WORK.PERIOD ON MON.Working calendar working time onMonday

min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME MONWorking calendar work start time onMonday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON TUE.Working calendar working time onTuesday

min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME TUEWorking calendar work start time onTuesday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON WED.Working calendar working time onWednesday

min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME WEDWorking calendar work start time onWednesday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON THU.Working calendar working time onThursday

min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME THUWorking calendar work start time onThursday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON FRI. Working calendar working time on Friday min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME FRIWorking calendar work start time onFriday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON SAT.Working calendar working time onSaturday

min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME SATWorking calendar work start time onSaturday

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

WORK.PERIOD ON SUN. Working calendar working time on Sunday min (dis)0 - 1440 1440

WORK.START TIME SUNWorking calendar work start time onSunday

Hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

EXER.WORKING PERIODGenerator exercise working time onrelated day

min (dis)0 - 99 DIS

EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK Generator exercise working day of week 1 – 7 1

EXER.WORK.START TIMGenerator exercise work start time onrelated day

hour-min 0.0 – 23.59 0.0

Please enter the days of the weekly workdays for Working Function. Example:WORK.PERIOD ON MON. (dis)0 The working function is Mondays disabled.

(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Monday enabled for 120

minutes.WORK.START TIME MON 12.20 The working function is every Monday started

at 12.20 o'clock (if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON TUE. (dis)0 The working function is Tuesdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Tuesday enabled for 120

minutes.WORK.START TIME TUE 12.20 The working function is every Tuesday started


WORK.PERIOD ON WED. (dis)0 The working function is Wednesdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Wednesday enabled for

120 minutes.WORK.START TIME WED 12.20 The working function is every Wednesday started


WORK.PERIOD ON THU. (dis)0 The working function is Thursdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Thursday enabled for 120

minutes.


WORK.START TIME THU 12.20 The working function is every Thursday started at 12.20 o'clock (if it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON FRI. (dis)0 The working function is Fridays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Friday enabled for 120

minutes.WORK.START TIME FRI 12.20 The working function is every Friday started


WORK.PERIOD ON SAT. (dis)0 The working function is Saturdays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Saturday enabled for 120

minutes.WORK.START TIME SAT 12.20 The working function is every Saturday started

at 12.20 o'clock (If it is enabled)

WORK.PERIOD ON SUN. (dis)0 The working function is Sundays disabled.(1440) The working function is enabled whole day.(120) The working function is every Sunday enabled for 120

minutes.WORK.START TIME SUN 12.20 The working function is every Sunday started

at 12.20 o'clock (If it is enabled)


(10) The exercise function is enabled for 10 minutes.EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday,

5=Friday, 6=Saturday, 7=Sunday.EXER.WORK.START TIM 12.20 The exercise function is started at 12.20 o'clock

(If it is enabled)

(DATE SETUP PAGE) DATE SETUP pageYEAR YEAR 0 - 99MONTH MONTH 1 - 12DATE DATE 1 - 31DAY DAY 1 - 7HOUR HOUR 0 - 23MINUTE MIN 0 - 59SECOND SEC 0 - 59

(PASSWORD PAGE) PASSWORD pageOPERATOR PASSWORD OPERATOR PASSWORD 0 - 9999 0TECHNICIAN PASSWORD TECHNICIAN PASSWORD 0 - 9999 0

OPERATOR PASSWORDUse this option to change the Operator password. This password allows access to operatorparameters section.

TECHNICIAN PASSWORDUse this option to change the Technician password. It allows access to both operator andtechnician parameters section.

To prevent to changing unit program parameters by unauthorised personnel don’tallow to the learning operator and technician passwords by the others. In case of this

situation, change passwords immediately.


3.6 Pc Interface

The PC interface kit ( EAOM-210 FL/PCIK ) comprises the following:9 pin D connector/FCC68(4 pin) connection lead with 2 meters cableEAOM-210 FL V00/SW Communication software (CD)

3.6.1 Technical SpecificationsRS-232 serial communication with Modbus RTU protocolBaud Rate from 1200 to 192008 data bits, Parity; None, Odd or Even, Stop Bit; 0 or 1Maximum allowable cable length is 10 meters

3.6.2 RS-232 Serial Interface, Programming The Device Over PC or Modem

3.6.2.1 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and PC

9 pin D connectorfemale

EAOM-210 FL

Brown

White

Green

PC9 pin D connectormale

3.6.2.2 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and Modem

9 pin D connectormale

EAOM-210 FL

Green

Yellow

White

Brown

MODEM9 pin D connectorfemale

3.6.3 Installation Instruction3.6.3.1 Minimum system requirementsProcessor :486 66MHzOperating Systems :Windows95/98, Windows NTRam :16 MbyteMonitor :14” SVGA (640x480 resolution)Fixed Disk Free Space :1 MbyteDisk Drive :CD-ROMCommunication :An RS232 communication port is needed to

communicate with the EAOM-210 FL Unit

3.6.3.2 Installing EAOM-210 FL V00/SWInsert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive on the PCDouble click on MyComputerThen double click on CD-ROM drive


There will be a short delay while the CD-ROM is accessed, then the disk contents will bedisplayed.Double click on “Install.exe”.EAOM-210 FL V00/SW will be installed automatically on to your PC in its ownfolder(directory). It will also create “START MENU” items.

3.6.3.3 To Run EAOM-210 FL V00/SW communication softwarePress the START iconThen select Programs � EAOM-210 FL V00 SW(Folder) � EAOM-210 FL V00Then click on EAOM-210 FL V00

When the program runs firstly, a window is shown to determine how the connection will beestablished: over modem or RS-232 communication port. This selection is made with the‘Connect with Modem’ check box. If the comport settings are correct, when ‘Connect’button is pressed, connection is established. With ‘Add New Phone Number’ button, usercan access to the window below and save the location name and phone number for using toconnect with modem.


Firstly, enter phone number and location name (It is used to remember where the phonenumber belongs) and press ‘Ok’ button for saving these values.

When the connection is established, main screen is shown;


3.6.4 DescriptionEAOM-210 FL unit communicates with PC by means of EAOM-210 FL/PCIK. With EAOM-210FL V00/SW ,the EAOM-210 FL unit’s parameters and status information can be reached overPC easily. Operator and Technician parameters can be viewed. Parameters are passwordprotected.

3.6.4.1 Main Menu

File MenuThis menu allows the user to save configuration files to the disc, read from disc and writeto disc.

Open :This menu allows the user to load the registered configuration files to PC.For example: Click 'Open' in File menu. Choose configuration file which includes operatoror technician parameters on Open Dialog Box. When user clickss 'Open' button on OpenDialog Box parameters will be transferred to PC window.Save :This menu allows the user to save the parameters with a name defined by user.For example: Click 'Save' in File menu. After choosing where to save the file, enter the filename. When user clicks 'Save' button on Save Dialog Box, all parameters will be saved tothe file that user determine.Preview : This menu allows the user to preview the operator parameters, when the user tocome into the Operator Parameters section. It allows the user to preview the technicianparameters, when the user to come into the Technician Parameters section. It allows theuser to preview the Event Logs, when the user to come into the Events section.Print :This menu allows the user to print the parameters.Exit :With this menu user can exit from the EAOM-210 FL V00/SW.

Window Menu

Explorer: This menu allows the user to reach quickly the Observation, OperatorParameters and Technician Parameters sections.Toolbar: Toolbar on/off


Program MenuThis menu is active during the Operator or Technician Parameters Section is open. Withthis menu user can load parameters from EAOM-210 FL unit to PC or from PC to EAOM-210FL unit.

Download :With this menu user can load parameters from PC to EAOM-210 FL.For loading parameters from PC to EAOM-210 FL follow the steps below.Download This Page to the Controller:While the operator parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Download This Page tothe Controller” in Program menu, only parameters in the related page is loaded from PC todevice. While the technician parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Download ThisPage to the Controller” in Program menu, only parameters in the related page is loadedfrom PC to device.Download All Parameters to the Controller:While the operator parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Download All Parametersto the Controller” in Program menu, all of the operator parameters is loaded from PC todevice. While the technician parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Download AllParameters to the Controller” in Program menu, all of the technician parameters is loadedfrom PC to device.

Upload :User can load the parameters that is stored on EAOM-210 FL unit to PC.For loading parameters from EAOM-210 FL unit to PC follow the steps below.Upload This Page from the Controller:While the operator parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Upload This Page fromthe Controller” in Program menu, only parameters in the related page is loaded fromdevice to PC. While the technician parameters window is showing, If user clicks “UploadThis Page from the Controller” in Program menu, only parameters in the related page isloaded from device to PC.Upload All Parameters from the Controller:While the operator parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Upload All Parametersfrom the Controller” in Program menu, all of the operator parameters is loaded fromdevice to PC. While the technician parameters window is showing, If user clicks “Upload AllParameters from the Controller” in Program menu, all of the technician parameters isloaded from device to PC.

Add New Phone Number:User can be saved the phone number which is used for connecting with the modem.


Observation MenuThere are four sub-menus in this menu: Measurement Values, Failures, Events and Output& Modes.

Measurement Values:

In this window the values listed below can be observed:Mains volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)Mains volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)Mains HzGenerator volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)Generator volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)Generator HzLoad amps (IL1, IL2, IL3)Earth current (IEA)Generator pfGenerator kVAGenerator kWGenerator kVArGenerator kVAhGenerator kWh


Generator kVArhNext maintenanceWorking timeReal timeCharge generator voltageBattery VoltageLevelPressureTemperatureEngine speed (Rpm)

Failures:

In this window the failures listed below can be observed:Failed to startLow oil pressureHigh temperatureVoltage failureSpeed failureCharging failSpare 1Spare 2Spare 3And the 39 different error messages (if Expansion Module is selected as disable) orthe 47 different error messages (if Expansion Module is selected as enable).


Events:

In this window the last 32 Event logs can be observed:


Outputs & Modes:

In this window the parameters listed below can be observed:

Outputs:Configurable Output1Configurable Output2Configurable Output3Configurable Output4Configurable Exp Output1(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output2(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output3(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output4(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output5(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output6(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output7(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).Configurable Exp Output8(if Expansion Module is selected as enable).StartMains open and button for remote controlMains close and button for remote controlGenerator open and button for remote controlGenerator close and button for remote controlSolenoid


Modes:Manual mode and button for remote controlNo Load Test mode and button for remote controlAuto mode and button for remote controlProgramOff mode and button for remote control

Engine status:Start position and button for remote controlStop position and button for remote control

Failure Reset:Reset button for remote control

Operator Parameters MenuOperator can reach the parameters in this menu. Parameters are password protected.When the operator password is entered, it is compared with operator password that isregistered on EAOM-210 FL unit.

Entering To Operator Parameters SectionClick “Mains Level” in Operator Parameter menu. Then Operator Password is monitored.Enter the Operator Password and click OK button. If the password is correct, first page ofthe operator parameters (Mains Levels page) will be viewed.


Technician Parameters MenuAll parameters can be viewed in this menu. Parameters are password protected. When thetechnician password is entered, it is compared with technician password that is registeredon EAOM-210 FL unit.

Entering To Technician Parameters SectionClick “Mains Level” in Technician Parameter menu. Then Technician Password ismonitored. Enter the Technician Password and click OK button. If the password is correct,first page of the technician parameters (Mains Levels page) will be viewed.


Adjusment Page (Calibration) MenuThere is one sub-menu in this menu: Adjusment.

Adjusment (Calibration):Click “Adjusment” in Adjasment Page menu. Then Technician Password is monitored. Enterthe Technician Password and click OK button. If the password is correct, the ADJUSMENTsection will be viewed.


Setting Menu

Click “Comport Setting” in Setting menu. Then Comport Settings window is monitored.Andthen change Comport Settings, Slave ID parameters and click OK button.


Connect: With this menu, the window below is observed. According to the ‘Connect withModem’ check status, connection can be establish over RS-232 port or modem. If thecomport settings are done correctly, when the ‘Connect’ button is pressed, connection isestablished.

Disconnect: If the connection is established over modem or RS-232 port, connection canbe cut off with this selection.

Help Menu

Help: This menu allows the user to get information about mention to used the program andthe menus in the program.About: Click “About” in Help menu. It gives information about the PC software version andMCU software version to the user.


Section 4 Commissioning

These commissioning checks may interfere with the power supply to the load. Thereforethey should not be carried out with a mission-critical load connected to the system.

4.1 Manual operation1. Check that the unit is correctly wired and that the wiring is of a standard and ratingcompatible with the system.

2. Check that the correct fuses are fitted.

3. Program the unit as detailed in Section 3 Definition Of Front Panel And Programming.

4. Take temporary steps to prevent the engine from starting . (for example, disable thefuel solenoid.)

5. After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, connect the battery supply.

6. On the EAOM-210 FL, press the Man (29) button. The associated LED (12) should light.

7. Press the Engine Start (21) button. At this moment the LED (7) lights on.

8. Check that the engine start sequence commences. The starter motor should run for theprogrammed time period (cranking time) for the pre-set number of times (number of startattempts).

9. Check that the Failed to Start LED flashes and the LED (7) lights off.

10. Check the unit will change to the OFF mode and the LED (9) lights on.

11. Restore the engine to operational state (reconnect the fuel solenoid).

12. Press the Man (29) button. The LED (12) will light on.

13. Press the Engine Start (21) button. The LED (7) will light on.

14. Check the start sequence, as follows:the starter motor runsthe engine startsthe starter motor disengages once the engine is running.

If not, check that the engine is fully operational (fuel available etc.) and check the wiringand programming of the EAOM-210 FL.

15. Check that the engine runs up to its operating speed. If not and an alarm is present,check that the alarm is valid and then check the input wiring.

16. Press the Engine Stop (22) button. At this moment the LED (8) will light on. The engineshould stop. Allow time for the engine to come to rest.


4.2 Auto Operation

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit and is present.

2. Check the mains voltage readings on the display.

3. At the EAOM-210 FL, press the Auto (27) button. The LED (10) on the button shouldlight.

4. Switch off the mains supply to the unit. Check that the generator starts and, after adelay, the load is transferred to the generator.

5. Restore the mains supply to the unit. Check that, after a delay, the load is transferredback to the mains and the generator, after a further delay, shuts down.

4.3 Test Mode Operation

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit.

2. Press the Test (28) button. At this moment the LED (11) will light on.

3. Check that the generator starts and that the load is still connected to the mains.

4. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the contactors change over to connect the loadto the generator. Check also that the Auto (10) LED is lit. The unit changes operating modeto AUTO Mode automatically.

5. Restore the mains supply. Check that the contactors reconnect the load to the mainssupply.

6. Check that the generator shuts down with cool-down period.


Section 5 Operation

5.1 Controls and Indicators5.1.1 LCD Display Description:

Mains & Load Page


L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A


PROG

Engine Status

Measurement values

Error Messages

Current page name

Working mode

128x64 Dot-matrix LCD display. It consist of 10 main working pages (screens). Every screen

has got 8 lines. Seventh and eighth lines are common in all pages. Use the and buttons to select which working page (screen) is to be displayed. For details see Example-1: Changing page with Next and Previous buttons.

There are 10 working pages in the LCD display, as follows;

1- Mains & Load Page:


L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A


• L12 - Mains voltage L1-L2



• Fq - Mains frequency

• IL1 - Load current



• IT - Total current

• IEA - Earth current

• AUTO - Working mode

• CRANKNG ATTEMP - Engine cranking process is executing. (Engine status)


• OVER SPEED PREALARM - This message indicates that the over speed warning(pre-alarm) has occured. (Error message). If more than one error condition ispresent, all of them is displayed sequencely in time defined by “Scroll Time ForError Messages” parameter. Possible error messages are:

BATTERY HIGH ERROR! : Battery High Error.BATTERY LOW ERROR! : Battery Low Error.CANBUS ERROR! : Can Bus Error.EARTH FAULT ERROR! : Earth Fault ErrorEARTH FAULT EL.TRIP! : Earth Fault Electrical TripEARTH FAULT WARNING! : Earth Fault WarningEMERGENCY STOP ERR! : Emergency Stop.EXPAN. SPARE-1 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 1 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-2 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 2 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-3 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 3 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-4 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 4 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-5 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 5 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-6 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 6 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-7 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 7 Error.EXPAN. SPARE-8 ERROR! : Expansion Spare 8 Error.GEN BR.NOT CLOS.ALR! : Generator Breaker Not Closed alarmGEN BR.NOT OPEN.ALR! : Generator Breaker Not Opened alarmGEN OVER FRQ.PREAL! : Generator Over Frequency PrealarmGEN OVER VOL.PREAL! : Generator Over Voltage PrealarmGEN UNDER FRQ.PREAL! : Generator Under Frequency PrealarmGEN UNDER VOL.PREAL! : Generator Under Voltage PrealarmGENERATOR STOP ERR! : Generator Stop Error.LEVEL ERROR! : Fuel Level Error.LEVEL PREALARM! : Fuel Level Prealarm.MULTPLE ENGAGE FAIL! : Multiple engage failMAINS BR.NOT CL.ALR! : Mains Breaker Not Closed alarmMAINS BR.NOT OP.ALR! : Mains Breaker Not Opened alarmMAINTENANCE ERROR! : Maintenance errorOVER CURRNT EL.TRIP! : Over Current Electrical TripOVER CURRENT ERROR! : Over Current ErrorOVER CURRENT WARNNG! : Over Current WarningOVER SPEED ERROR! : Over speed errorOVER SPEED PREALARM! : Over speed pre-alarmPRESSURE PREALARM! : Oil Pressure Prealarm.SHORT CIRCT EL.TRIP! : Short Circuit Electrical TripSHORT CIRCUIT ERROR! : Short Circuit ErrorSHORT CIRCUIT WARNN! : Short Circuit WarningSPARE-4 ERROR! : Spare 4 Error.SPARE-5 ERROR! : Spare 5 Error.SPARE-6 ERROR! : Spare 6 Error.SPEED LOSS ERROR! : Speed loss errorTEMPERAT. PREALARM! : Generator Temperature Prealarm.UNDER SPEED ERROR! : Under speed errorUNDER SPED PREALARM! : Under speed pre-alarm


2- Generator & Load Page:

GENERATOR & LOAD L12:380Vac IL1: 126A Fq:50.0Hz Sp:2000Rpm AUTO

L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A

CRANKNG ATTEMPPREALARM!OVER SPEED

• L12 - Generator voltage L1-L2



• Fq - Generator frequency (if enabled).

• Sp - Engine Rpm (if enabled).




• IT – Total current

• IEA - Earth current

3- Mains Page:

MAINS L1:220Vac L12:380Vac Fq:50.0Hz

L2:220Vac L23:380VacL3:220Vac L31:380Vac

AUTO CRANKNG ATTEMPPREALARM!OVER SPEED

• L1 - Mains voltage L1-N



• Fq - Mains frequency





4- Generator Page:

GENERATOR L1:220Vac L12:380Vac Fq:50.0Hz Sp:2000Rpm

OVER SPEED


AUTO CRANKNG ATTEMPPREALARM!

• L1 - Generator voltage L1-N



• Fq - Generator frequency (if enabled).




• Sp - Engine Rpm (if enabled).

5- Power Page:

POWER kVA kW kVAr

: 630: 510: 120

FACTOR:-0.84

AUTO CRANKNG ATTEMP OVER SPEED PREALARM!

• kVA - Generator power

• kW - Generator active power

• kVAr - Generator reactive power

• FACTOR - Generator power factor (pf)

6- Meter Page:

METER kVAh kWh kVArh

: 37800: 30600: 7200


• kVA - Generator energy

• kW - Generator active energy

• kVAr - Generator reactive energy


7- Load Page:

LOAD CURRENT L1 : 126A CURRENT L2 : CURRENT L3 : TOTAL CURRENT: 378A

126A126A

EARTH CURRENT: 63AAUTO CRANKNG ATTEMPOVER SPEED PREALARM!

• CURRENT L1 - Load Current



• TOTAL CURRENT - Total Current

• EARTH CURRENT - Earth Current

8- Anologue Page:

ANALOGUE

OIL PRESS. : 40.3Bar TEMPERATURE: 30ºC LEVEL : 16%

BATTERY VOL:18.0Vdc CHR.GEN.VOL:18.0Vdc

AUTO CRANKNG ATTEMPOVER SPEED PREALARM!

• BATTERY VOL - Battery voltage

• CHR.GEN.VOL - Charge generator voltage

• OIL PRESS. - Engine Oil pressure (if enabled).

• TEMPERATURE - Coolant temperature (if enabled).

• LEVEL - Fuel Level

9- Miscellaneous Page:

DATE: 30 2005 TIME: 14 WORKING HOUR : 1 NEXT MAINT.HOUR

/06/:20:58

:5000 NEXT MAINT.MONT: 6


• DATE - Real Date: Day, Month, Year.

• TIME - Real Time: Hour, minute, second.

• WORKING HOUR – Engine run time

• NEXT MAINT.HOUR - The remaining hour for maintenance

• NEXT MAINT.MONT - The remaining month for maintenance


10- Event Logs Page:

EVENT LOG 1 20/03/2005 15:21:38 EMERGENCY STOP ERROR


• EMERGENCY STOP ERROR - This message indicates that an emergency stopalarm has occured. (Event history: 20/03/2005 date, 15:21:38 time). Events

(from 1 to 32) can be displayed sequencely with the button. Possible Eventmessages are:

BATTERY HIGH ERROR: Battery high voltage alarmBATTERY LOW ERROR: Battery low voltage alarmCAN BUS ERROR: Can Bus errorCHANGED MODE TO AUTO: Changed mode to autoCHANGED MODE TO MAN: Changed mode to manualCHANGED MODE TO OFF: Changed mode to offCHANGED MODE TO TEST: Changed mode to testCHARGE ALTERNTR FAIL: Charge alternator failEARTH FAULT ALARM: Earth fault alarmEMERGENCY STOP ERROR: Emergency stop errorEXPAN.SPARE-1 ERROR: Expansion Spare-1 errorEXPAN.SPARE-2 ERROR: Expansion Spare-2 errorEXPAN.SPARE-3 ERROR: Expansion Spare-3 errorEXPAN.SPARE-4 ERROR: Expansion Spare-4 errorEXPAN.SPARE-5 ERROR: Expansion Spare-5 errorEXPAN.SPARE-6 ERROR: Expansion Spare-6 errorEXPAN.SPARE-7 ERROR: Expansion Spare-7 errorEXPAN.SPARE-8 ERROR: Expansion Spare-8 errorFAIL TO START ALARM: Generator fail to startGEN BR.NOT CLOS.ALRM: Gen breaker close errorGEN BR.NOT OPEN.ALRM: Gen breaker open errorGEN UNDER FRQ.PREALR: Generator low frequency pre-alarmGEN UNDER FRQ.SHTDWN: Generator low frequency shutdownGEN UNDER VOL.PREALR: Generator low voltage pre-alarmGEN UNDER VOL.SHTDWN: Generator low voltage shutdownGEN OVER FRQ.PREALRM: Generator high frequency pre-alarmGEN OVER FRQ.SHUTDWN: Generator high frequency shutdownGEN OVER VOL.PREALRM: Generator high voltage pre-alarmGEN OVER VOL.SHUTDWN: Generator high voltage shutdownGENERATOR STOP ERROR: Generator fail to stopLEVEL ERROR: Fuel level alarmLEVEL PREALARM: Fuel level pre-alarmMAINS BR.NOT CLS.ALR: Mains breaker close errorMAINS BR.NOT OPN.ALR: Mains breaker open errorMAINTENANCE ERROR: Generator maintenance error


MAINTENANCE WARNING: Generator maintenance warningOIL PRESSURE PREALRM: Oil pressure pre-alarmOIL PRESSURE SHUTDWN: Oil pressure shutdownOVER CURRENT ALARM: Over current alarmOVER SPEED PREALARM: Generator high speed pre-alarmOVER SPEED SHUTDOWN: Generator high speed shutdownSHORT CIRCUIT ALARM: Short circuit alarmSPARE-1 ERROR: Spare 1 errorSPARE-2 ERROR: Spare 2 errorSPARE-3 ERROR: Spare 3 errorSPARE-4 ERROR: Spare 4 errorSPARE-5 ERROR: Spare 5 errorSPARE-6 ERROR: Spare 6 errorSPEED LOSS ERROR: Magnetic pickup loss of speed errorTEMPER.HIGH PREALARM: High temperature pre-alarmTEMPER.HIGH SHUTDOWN: High temperature shutdownUNDER SPEED PREALARM: Generator low speed pre-alarmUNDER SPEED SHUTDOWN: Generator low speed shutdown


Example-1: Changing page with Next and Previous buttons.

Mains & Load Page

PROG

Generator & Load Page

PROG

Event Log Page

PROG

Press the next button to view the next page.

Press the previous button to view the previous page.

Mains Page

PROG

Mains & Load Page

PROG











L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



Generator Page

PROG

Generator & Load Page

PROG



Power Page

PROG

Mains Page

PROG



Meter Page

PROG

Generator Page

PROG




OVER SPEED



POWER kVA kW kVAr

: 630: 510: 120

FACTOR:-0.84



: 37800: 30600: 7200



OVER SPEED







L23:380Vac IL2: 126AL31:380Vac IL3: 126A

IT: 378AIEA: 63A



Load Page

PROG

Power Page

PROG



Analog Page

PROG

Meter Page

PROG



Miscellaneous Page

PROG

Load Page

PROG



ANALOGUE




DATE: 30 2005 TIME: 14 WORKING HOUR : 1 NEXT MAINT.HOUR

/06/:20:58

:5000 NEXT MAINT.MONT: 6


POWER kVA kW kVAr

: 630: 510: 120

FACTOR:-0.84



: 37800: 30600: 7200



126A126A



126A126A



Event Log 1 Page

PROG

Analogue Page

PROG

Press the page button to view the following Event Log page.

Event Log 2 Page

PROG

Press the page button to view the following Event Log page.

Press the next button to view the Mains & Load page.

Press the previous button to view the Miscellaneous page.



EVENT LOG 2 18/03/2005 17:42:53 SPARE-4 ERROR


ANALOGUE





5.1.2 Failure Indicators Description:

V

HIGH TEMPERATURE

FAILED TO START

LOW OIL PRESSURE

SPEED FAILURE

VOLTAGE FAILURE

CHARGING FAIL

RPM

SPARE-1

SPARE-2

SPARE-3

Explanations:

1- Failed to Start LED : This LED flashes if the engine has not started after theprogrammed number of attempts. The unit must be reset, by pressing the Resetbutton, before afresh attempt can be made.

2- Low Oil Pressure Failure LED : This LED flashes if the Oil Pressure Sender and the LowOil Pressure Input (if conf. input-4 is selected as Low Oil pressure) on the engineindicate low oil pressure while the engine is running. If this fault occurs, the unit willstop the engine without any cool-down period.

3- High Temperature Failure LED : This LED flashes if the Temperature Sender and theHigh Temperature Input (if conf. input-5 is selected as High Temperature) on theengine indicates high temperature while the engine is running. If this fault occurs, theunit will stop the engine without any cool-down period.

4- Over Speed Failure LED : This LED flashes if the Alternator Frequency goes below theGenerator Under Frequency parameter or above theGenerator Over Frequencyparameter. For a fault to be indicated, the speed must be outside these limits forlonger than the period defined by the Generator Frequency Error Control Timeparameter. This failure immediately stops the generating set, without any cool-downperiod.

5- Voltage Failure LED : This LED flashes if the Alternator output voltage is outside of thelimits programmed into Generator Under Voltage parameter, and Generator OverVoltage parameter, For a time period longer than the Generator Voltage Error ControlTime parameter. This failure immediately releases the generator contactor, and stopsthe generating set, without any cool-down period.

6- Charge Generator Failure LED : This LED flashes if the field current for the batterycharge generator fails to fall to zero after the engine has started. A fault will not beindicated if the current falls within the period defined by the Safety On Delayparameter after the engine has started. This failure will not stop the generating set.

7- Configurable Input-1 LED (SPARE 1): This LED indicate the status of the input Pin 21,and the controller can be programmed to perform 25 different functions when thisinput is asserted.




5.2 Mode transition

The mode can be changed at any time. A change in mode will not effect the current stateof the generator or load connection. For example; if the unit is in Auto mode with thegenerator running and the load running on the generator, changing the mode to Manualwill not effect the operating state. Any changes between Auto, Manual and Test modes willnot change the operating state.

5.3 Manual Start

1. Press the Man (29) button. The LED (12) will light on.2. Press the Engine Start (21) button on the panel the LED (7) will light on. The engineshould start. The sequence is as follows:

• The starter motor runs

• The engine starts

Once the engine is running,

• The LED (6) “Engine Running” is lit.

• The “Generator Ready” LED (5) is lit after “safety on delay” time period like asAUTO mode.

• It is not possible supply to load on the generator unless “Generator Ready” LED(5) is lit. (The contactor open / close button does not work)

3. Once LEDs have lit, press the Mains contactor open button (18) to disconnect the loadfrom the mains supply. LED (3) should go off.4. Press the Generator contactor close button (19) to connect the load to the generatorsupply. LED (4) should light.

5.4 Manual Stop

The LED (8) is lit and engine is stopped when the “Engine Stop” (22) button is pressed.When the “Engine Stop” button is pressed while the load connected to the alternatoroutput (generator output) first alternator contactor is released then engine is stopped.

5.5 Auto Operation

Press the Auto (27) button to select Auto mode. The LED (10) in the corner of the buttonwill light to indicate this mode has been selected.

In the event of a mains voltage failure, the unit will start up the generator and, once thegenerator is running and alternator voltage available, will transfer the load to thegenerator. When the mains is restored and stable, it will transfer the load back to themains and, after a cool-down period, shut down the generator.


5.6 Test Operation

Press the Test (28) button to select Test mode the LED (11) will light on. This mode allowsfor testing of the generator off load. All alarm circuits will operate so that any faults willbe reported. If a mains failure occurs while the unit is in Test mode, the unit will revert toAuto mode and will switch the load to the generator.

5.6.1 Exercise Function


(10) The exercise function is enabled for 10 minutes.EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK 1=Monday.EXER.WORK.START TIM 12.20 The exercise function is every Monday started at

12.20 o’clock. (if it is enabled)

When the Real-Time clock reached to the Generator Exercise Work Start Time (12.20o’clock) if the unit is in “AUTO MODE” and Mains is available the unit changes runningmode to the “TEST MODE” automatically and starts the engine. The time period of enginerunning is counted and compared with value of Generator Exercise Working Periodparameter (10 minutes). (If the engine does not run time is not counted). If the period iscompleted the unit changes run mode to “AUTO” automatically. When the unit is in the“TEST MODE” if the Mains is gone, the unit will change run mode to “AUTO MODE”automatically.


Section 6 Fault Finding

6.1 General

Indicators on the central section of the panel will flash if a fault is detected. For detailssee Section 5.1.2 Failure Indicators Description. Fault conditions latch so that furtheroperation is prevented. If a failure is indicated, proceed as follows:

1. Find and fix the fault.

2. Press the Failure Reset (25) button to enable a restart.

3. Select the required mode of operation – Manual, Auto or Test.

6.2 Error Messages

OVER SPEED PREALARM!

In addition to the indicators on the centre panel, when a fault is occured, it’s errormessage is displayed in the eighth lines of current page. Seventh and eighth lines arecommon in all pages. If more than one error condition is present, all of them is displayedsequencely in time defined by “Scroll Time For Error Messages” parameter. All Errormessages are:

BATTERY HIGH ERROR! : This message indicates that a battery high voltage alarmhas occured.

BATTERY LOW ERROR! : This message indicates that a battery low voltage alarmhas occured.

CAN BUS ERROR! : This message indicates that a Can Bus error has occured.EARTH FAULT EL.TRIP! : This message indicates that a earth fault electrical trip

has occured.EARTH FAULT ERROR! : This message indicates that a earth fault shutdown has

occured.EARTH FAULT WARNING! : This message indicates that a earth fault warning (pre-

alarm) has occured.EMERGENCY STOP ERR! : This message indicates that an emergency stop alarm has

occured.EXPAN. SPARE-1 ERROR! : This message indicates that an Expansion

spare 1 alarm has occured.EXPAN. SPARE-2 ERROR! : This message indicates that an Expansion



spare 4 alarm has occured.


EXPAN. SPARE-5 ERROR! : This message indicates that an Expansionspare 5 alarm has occured.




GEN BR.NOT CLOS.ALR! : This message indicates that a generator breaker notclosed alarm has occured.

GEN BR.NOT OPEN.ALR! : This message indicates that a generator breaker notopened alarm has occured.

GEN OVER FRQ.PREAL! : This message indicates that a generator over frequencywarning (pre-alarm) has occured.

GEN OVER VOL.PREAL! : This message indicates that a generator over voltagewarning (pre-alarm) has occured.

GEN UNDER FRQ.PREAL! : This message indicates that a generator under frequencywarning (pre-alarm) has occured.

GEN UNDER VOL.PREAL! : This message indicates that a generator under voltagewarning (pre-alarm) has occured.

GENERATOR STOP ERR! : This message indicates that the generator has failed tostop within the selected time.

LEVEL ERROR! : This message indicates that the fuel level shutdown has occured.LEVEL PREALARM! : This message indicates that the fuel level warning (pre-alarm)

has occured.MAINS BR.NOT CL.ALR! : This message indicates that a mains breaker not closed

alarm has occured.MAINS BR.NOT OP.ALR! : This message indicates that a mains breaker not opened

alarm has occured.MAINTENANCE ERROR! : This message indicates that the generator is now due for

maintenance.MULTPLE ENGAGE FAIL! : This message indicates that the multiple engage fail has

occured.OVER CURRNT EL.TRIP! : This message indicates that a over current electrical trip

has occured.OVER CURRENT ERROR! : This message indicates that a over current shutdown has

occured.OVER CURRENT WARNNG! : This message indicates that a over current warning

(pre-alarm) has occured.OVER SPEED ERROR! : This message indicates that the over speed shutdown has

occured.OVER SPEED PREALARM! : This message indicates that the over speed warning (pre-

alarm) has occured.PRESSURE PREALARM! : This message indicates that a low oil pressure warning

(pre-alarm) has occured.SHORT CIRCT EL.TRIP! : This message indicates that a short circuit electrical trip

has occured.SHORT CIRCUIT ERROR! : This message indicates that a short circuit shutdown has

occured.SHORT CIRCUIT WARNN! : This message indicates that a short circuit warning (pre-

alarm) has occured.SPARE-4 ERROR! : This message indicates that a spare 4 alarm has occured.SPARE-5 ERROR! : This message indicates that a spare 5 alarm has occured.SPARE-6 ERROR! : This message indicates that a spare 6 alarm has occured.


SPEED LOSS ERROR! : This message indicates that the magnetic pick-up sensor fail(speed loss error) has occured.

TEMPERAT. PREALARM! : This message indicates that a high engine coolanttemperature warning (pre-alarm) has occured.

UNDER SPEED ERROR! : This message indicates that the under speed shutdown hasoccured.

UNDER SPED PREALARM! : This message indicates that the under speed warning(pre-alarm) has occured.

Table 6.1 Fault finding

Symptom Possible remedy

Check the battery and wiring to the unit.

Check the DC supply. ( measure voltage between pins 39 and 40 )Unit is inoperative.

Check the DC fuse.

Check engine oil level and pressure..

Check oil pressure switch and sender and wiring.Low oil pressure faultoperates after enginehas started. Check configured polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open or

Normally Closed) or that sender is compatible with the device.

Check engine temperature.

Check temperature switch and sender and wiring.

High enginetemperatureFault operates afterengine has started.

Check configured polarity (if applicable) is correct (i.e. Normally Open orNormally Closed) or that sender is compatible with the device.

Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on the panel.Shutdown faultoperates. Check configuration of input.

Check relevant switch and wiring of fault indicated on the panel.Warning faultoperates. Check configuration of input.

Check fuel solenoid and wiring, fuel and battery. Reset theEAOM-210 FL and restart the engine.

Failed to Start fault.Engine failed to startafter Pre-set numberof Attempts.

Check the signals that the EAOM-210 FL is using to determine if the enginehas started. Refer to engine manual.

Check wiring to starter solenoid.

Check battery supply.Starter motorinoperative.

Check battery supply is present on the Start output pin 33 of theEAOM-210 FL.

Disconnect the equipment totally from electricity in the best and correct way duringmechanical and electrical maintenance. When this is not possible, the equipment must be in the

“OFF” position for preventing any accident.


Section 7 Specifications & Ratings

Specification: Description:Equipment use Electrical control equipment for generating sets

Housing & Mounting 144 mm x 204 mm x 37 mm. (including connectors) plastichousing for panel mounting.

Panel Cut-Out 138 mm x 186 mm.

Protection IP54 at front panel, IP20 at rear side.

Weight Approximately 0,76 Kg.

Environmental rating Standard, indoor at an altitude of less then 2000 meters withnon-condensing humidity.

Operating / StorageTemperature

0°C to +50°C / -25°C to +70°C

Operating / StorageHumidity

90 % max. (non-condensing)

Installation Over VoltageCategory

II Appliances, portable equipment.

Pollution Degree II, Normal office or workplace, non conductive pollution

Mode of Operation Continuous

EN 61000-6-4, EMC Generic Emission Standard for industrialequipment

EMC

EN 61000-6-2, EMC Generic Immunity Standard for industrialequipment

Electrical Safety EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for electrical equipment formeasurement, control and laboratory use

DC Battery SupplyVoltage 8 to 32 VDC max. operating current is 360 mA.

Cranking Dropouts Battery voltage can be “0” VDC for max. 100 ms during cranking(battery voltage should be at least nominal voltage beforecranking).

Battery VoltageMeasurement

8 to 32 VDC, accuracy: 1 % FS, resolution: 0,1 V

Mains VoltageMeasurement

Selectable three phase or single phase, 4 wire connection forthree phase, 2 wire connection for single phase gen-set. 35 to300 VAC Ph-N, 15.6 to 99.9 Hz. Accuracy: 1 % FS, Resolution: 1 V

Mains Frequency 15.6 to 99.9 Hz (min. 35 VAC Ph-N) Accuracy: 0,25 % FS,Resolution: 0,1 Hz.

Generator VoltageMeasurement

Selectable three phase or single phase, 4 wire connection forthree phase, 2 wire connection for single phase gen-set. 35 to300 VAC Ph-N, 15.6 to 99.9 Hz. Accuracy: 1 % FS, Resolution: 1 V

Generator Speed From magnetic pick-up: 35 to 10000 Hz (4 to 35 volts peakcontinuously.) Accuracy: 0,25 % FS

Generator Frequency From alternator voltage: 15.6 to 99.9 Hz (min. 35 VAC Ph-N)Accuracy: 0,25 % FS, Resolution: 0,1 Hz.

CT secondary 5A.

Charge GeneratorExcitation

220mA, max 4W.


Specification: Description:LCD Display 128x64 Dot-matrix LCD display showin:

Mains volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)Mains volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)Mains HzGenerator volts (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)Generator volts (L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1)Generator HzEngine RpmGenerator kVAGenerator kWGenerator kVArGenerator kVAhGenerator kWhGenerator kVArhGenerator power factor (pf)Load amps (IL1, IL2, IL3)Earth current (IEA)Engine oil pressureCoolant temperatureFuel levelBattery voltageCharge generator voltageReal timeEngine run timeNext maintenance hourNext maintenance monthEvent logsWorking modesEngine statusError messagesProgram parameters

Failed to start

Low oil pressure

High temperature

Speed failure

Voltage failure

Charging fail

Spare 1

Spare 2

Failure Indicators

Spare 3

OFF mode LED

TEST mode LED

AUTOMATIC mode LED

MANUAL mode LED

Engine start LED

Engine stop LED

Engine running

Main voltage available LED

Generator ready LED

Mains contactor LED

Status indicators

Generator contactor LED

Communicationinterface

RS 232 serial communication with PC.CanBus communication with Expansion module.


Specification: Description:Emergency stop (NC)

Configurable failure input-1 (NO or NC selectable)



Low oil pressure or configurable failure input-4 (NO or NCselectable)

High temperature or configurable failure input-5 (NO or NCselectable)

Contact sensing inputs


Fuel relay output. 16A at DC supply voltage

Start relay output. 16A at DC supply voltage

Horn or configurable relay output-1. 16A at DC supply voltage

Mains open relay output. 5A at DC supply voltage

Mains close relay output. 5A at DC supply voltage

Generator open relay output. 5A at DC supply voltage

Generator close relay output. 5A at DC supply voltage

Configurable relay output-2. 5A at DC supply voltage


Relay outputs



Section 8 Block Diagram

POWERSUPPLY

RELAYOUTPUTS

BATTERYVOLTAGESENSING

MICROCONTROLLER

ANALOGTO

DIGITALCONVERTOR

COUNTER&

TIMER

MAINS&

GENERATORVOLTAGESENSING

&CONDITIONING

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMGENERATOR

VOLTAGE

LCD DISPLAY&

INDICATORS

+BATTERY

MAINS L1

MAINS L2MAINS L3

MAINS N

FAILURE&

CONTROLINPUTS

PUSHBUTTONS

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMMAGNETIC

PICK-UP

RS232COMM.

GEN. L1

GEN. L2GEN. L3

GEN. N

MAGNETICPICK-UP

LOADCURRENTS

&EARTH

CURRENTSENSING

ANALOGSENDERS

IEA

LOAD L1LOAD L2LOAD L3


User Defined Parameter:

List-1:

Definition of Parameter User Defined Value

Operator parameters

(MAINS LEVELS PAGE) MAINS LEVELS pageMAINS UNDER VOLTAGE Mains Under VoltageMAINS UNDER V.RET. Mains Under Voltage ReturnMAINS OVER VOLTAGE Mains Over VoltageMAINS OVER V.RETURN Mains Over Voltage ReturnMAINS UNDER FREQ. Mains Under FrequencyMAINS UNDER F.RET. Mains Under Frequency ReturnMAINS OVER FREQ. Mains Over FrequencyMAINS OVER F.RETURN Mains Over Frequency Return

(GEN.VOLT.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR VOLTAGE LEVELS pageGEN.UNDER VOLTAGE Generator Under VoltageGEN.UNDER V.PRE-ALR Generator Under Voltage Pre-AlarmGEN.LOADING VOLTAGE Generator Loading VoltageGEN.OVER V.PRE-ALR Generator Over Voltage Pre-AlarmGEN.OVER V.PR-A.RET Generator Over Voltage Pre-Alarm ReturnGEN.OVER VO.SHUTDWN Generator Over Voltage Shutdown

(GEN.FREQ.LEVELS PAGE) GENERATOR FREQUENCY LEVELS pageGEN.UNDER FREQUENCY Generator Under FrequencyGEN.UNDER F.PRE-ALR Generator Under Frequency Pre-AlarmGEN.LOADING FREQ. Generator Loading FrequencyGEN.OVER F.PRE-ALR Generator Over Frequency Pre-AlarmGEN.OVER F.PR-A.RET Generator Over Frq Pre-Alarm ReturnGEN.OVER FR.SHUTDWN Generator Over Frequency Shutdown

(GEN.CUR/POW.LVL.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER LEVELS pageGEN.OVER CURRENT Generator Over CurrentGEN.SHORT CIRCUIT Generator Short CircuitGEN.EARTH FAULT Generator Earth Fault



Technician parameters

(GEN.CUR/POW.ACT.PAGE) GENERATOR CURRENT/POWER ACTIONS pageCT PRIMARY CT PrimaryEARTH FAULT CT PRIM CT Primary (Earth Fault)

OVER CUR.ACTIONS

Over Current Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

OVER CUR.ALARM TIME Over Current Alarm Time

SHORT CIR.ACTIONS

Short Circuit Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

SHORT CIR.ALRM TIME Short Circuit Alarm Time

EARTH FAULT ACTIONS

Earth Fault Actions-Disable-Warning (Alarm Only, No Shutdown)-Electrical Trip (Alarm/Off Load GeneratorFollowed By Shutdown After Cooling)-Shutdown (Alarm And Shutdown)

EARTH FAU.ALRM TIME Earth Fault Alarm TimeTOTAL ENERGY CLEAR Total Energy ClearACTIVE ENERGY CLEAR Active Energy ClearREACTIVE ENERGY CLR Reactive Energy Clear

(MISCELLANEOUS PAGE) MISCELLANEOUS pageSENS.OPT.GEN.F.ENAB Sensing Options Generator Frq En/DisSNS.OP.PICKP ENA&FW Sensing Opt Pickup En/Dis & Flywheel

AC SYSTEMAc System 0 =1phase 2wire, 1= 3phase4wire 2= 3phase 4wire Series Delta

FAST LOAD.FEAT.ENAB Fast Loading Feature En/DisALL WRN.ARE LTCH.EN All Warnings Are Latched En/DisMAINS FAIL.DETEC.EN Mains Failure Detection En/Dis

LK.MA.FA.FO.MA.CN.ELook Mains Failure For Mains Cont.En/Dis

GAS/DIESEL SELECT Engine Fuel (Gas/ Diesel) SelectionSTOP/FUEL SELECTION Stop / Fuel SelectionSTOP SOLENOID TIME Stop Solenoid TimeIGNITION DELAY Ignition DelayGAS VALVE DELAY Gas Valve DelayMIN.IGNITION SPEED Min Ignition SpeedNOMINAL FREQUENCY Nominal Alternator FrequencyNOMINAL SPEED Nominal Speed



(ENGINE STAR.OPT PAGE) ENGINE STARTING OPTIONS pageAU.ALR.PRIOR STRT.E Audible Alarm Prior To Starting En/DisNUMBR OF STR.ATTEMP Number Of Start AttemptsCRANKING TIME Cranking TimeCRANK REST TIME Crank Rest TimeMUL.STR.ENG.ATEMP.E Multiple Start Engage Attempts E/D (Pick)ENGAGE ATTEMPT TIME Engage Attempt Time (Pickup)ENG.ATEMP.REST TIME Engage Attempt Rest Time (Pickup)PICK.SNSR FAIL DELY Pickup Sensor Fail Delay(Pickup)

(ENG.CRANK DISCN.PAGE) ENGINE CRANK DISCONNECT pageCRNK DISCN.ON GEN.F Crank Disconnect On Gen. FrequencyCRNK DISCN.ON MAG.P Crank Disconnect On Magnetic PickupCRNK DISCN.ON GEN.V Crank Disconnect On Gen. VoltageCRNK DISC.ON CH.G.V Crank Disconnect On Charge Alt. VoltageCRNK DISCN.ON OIL P Crank Disconnect On Oil Pressure

(GEN.SPED SETING PAGE) GENERATOR SPEED SETTINGS pageGEN.UNDER SPEED Generator Under SpeedGEN.UNDR SPED PRE-A Generator Under Speed PrealarmGEN.UNDR SP.PR-A.RT Generator Under Speed Prealarm ReturnGEN.OVER SPED PRE-A Generator Over Speed PrealarmGEN.OVER SP.PR-A.RT Generator Over Speed Prealarm ReturnGEN.OVER SP.SHUTDWN Generator Over Speed Shutdown

(ENG.PLANT BATTR PAGE) ENGINE PLANT BATTERY pageBAT.UNDER V.WARNING Battery Undervolts WarningBAT.UNDR V.WARN.RET Battery Undervolts Warning ReturnBAT.UNDER VOL.DELAY Batt Undervolts Volts DelayBAT.OVER V.WARNING Battery Overvolts WarningBAT.OVER V.WARN.RET Battery Overvolts Warning ReturnBAT.OVER VOL.DELAY Batt Overvolts DelayCHARGE ALT.WARNING Charge Alternator Warning

(ANALOGUE INPUTS PAGE) ANALOGUE INPUTS pageOIL PRES.INPUT TYPE Oil Pressure Input TypeOIL PRES.PRE-ALARM Oil Pressure Pre-AlarmOIL PRES.PRE-AL.RET Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm ReturnOIL PRES.SHUTDOWN Oil Pressure ShutdownTEMP.INPUT TYPE Temperature Input TypeTEMP.PRE-ALARM Temperature Pre-AlarmTEMP.PRE-ALARM RET Temperature Pre-Alarm ReturnTEMP.SHUTDDOWN Temperature ShutdownLEVEL PRE-ALARM Level Pre-AlarmLEVEL PRE-ALARM RET Level Pre-Alarm ReturnLEVEL SHUTDOWN Level Shutdown



(ANALG.SENDR LIN.PAGE) ANALOGUE SENDER LINEARISATIONS pageOIL PRESS.SENDER 0 Oil Pressure Sender 0OIL PRESSURE 0 Oil Pressure 0OIL PRESS.SENDER 1 Oil Pressure Sender 1OIL PRESSURE 1 Oil Pressure 1OIL PRESS.SENDER 2 Oil Pressure Sender 2OIL PRESSURE 2 Oil Pressure 2OIL PRESS.SENDER 3 Oil Pressure Sender 3OIL PRESSURE 3 Oil Pressure 3OIL PRESS.SENDER 4 Oil Pressure Sender 4OIL PRESSURE 4 Oil Pressure 4TEMP.SENDER 0 Temperature Sender 0TEMPERATURE 0 Temperature 0TEMP.SENDER 1 Temperature Sender 1TEMPERATURE 1 Temperature 1TEMP.SENDER 2 Temperature Sender 2TEMPERATURE 2 Temperature 2TEMP.SENDER 3 Temperature Sender 3TEMPERATURE 3 Temperature 3TEMP.SENDER 4 Temperature Sender 4TEMPERATURE 4 Temperature 4LEVEL SENDER 0 Level Sender 0LEVEL 0 Level 0LEVEL SENDER 1 Level Sender 1LEVEL 1 Level 1LEVEL SENDER 2 Level Sender 2LEVEL 2 Level 2LEVEL SENDER 3 Level Sender 3LEVEL 3 Level 3LEVEL SENDER 4 Level Sender 4LEVEL 4 Level 4

(CAN BUS CONFIG. PAGE) CAN BUS CONFIGURATION pageEXPANS.MODUL SELECT Expansion module selection






INDICATION



SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List


INPUT TIME DELAY Input time delay






INDICATION



SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List








INDICATION



SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

0 Remote Start1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator22 Remote Inhibit23 Test on Load24 Generator is supplying the load in OFFmode25 Low Oil Pressure







INDICATION



SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List

0 Remote Start1 Auxiliary Mains Fail2 Simulate Lamp Test Button3 Simulate Horn Reset Button4 Simulate Alarm Reset Button5 Simulate Off Button6 Simulate Auto Button7 Simulate Test Button8 Simulate Manual Button9 Simulate Start Button10 Simulate Stop Button11 Generator Closed Auxiliary12 Generator Load Inhibit13 Mains Closed Auxiliary14 Mains Load Inhibit15 Auto Restore Inhibit16 Auto Start Inhibit17 Panel Lock18 Scheduled Runs Inhibited19 Reset Maintenance Alarm20 Transfer To Generator/Open Mains21 Transfer To Mains/Open Generator22 Remote Inhibit23 Test on Load24 Generator is supplying the load in OFFmode25 High Temperature







INDICATION



SELECT FROM LIST

If Select From List





(CONFIG.OUTPUT-1 PAGE) CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (1) pagePOLARITY Polarity (Normally Open, Normally Closed)

FUNCTION

0 NOT USED1 AUDIBLE ALARM2 ALARM RESET3 AUTO START INHIBIT4 AUXILIARY MAINS FAILURE5 BATTERY HIGH VOLTAGE6 BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE7 CALLING FOR SCHEDULED RUN8 CHARGE ALTERNATOR FAILURE9 COMMON ALARM10 COMMON ELECTRICAL TRIP ALARM11 COMMON SHUTDOWN ALARM12 COMMON WARNING ALARM13 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH PRE-ALARM14 COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH SHUTDOWN15 COOLING DOWN TIMER IN PROGRESS16 DELAYED ALARMS ACTIVE17 DIGITAL INPUT1 ACTIVE18 DIGITAL INPUT2 ACTIVE19 DIGITAL INPUT3 ACTIVE20 DIGITAL INPUT4 ACTIVE21 DIGITAL INPUT5 ACTIVE22 DIGITAL INPUT6 ACTIVE23 EXPANSION INPUT1 ACTIVE24 EXPANSION INPUT2 ACTIVE25 EXPANSION INPUT3 ACTIVE26 EXPANSION INPUT4 ACTIVE27 EXPANSION INPUT5 ACTIVE28 EXPANSION INPUT6 ACTIVE29 EXPANSION INPUT7 ACTIVE30 EXPANSION INPUT8 ACTIVE31 EARTH FAULT32 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTERSTART33 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AFTERSTOP34 EMERGENCY STOP35 FAIL TO START ALARM36 FAIL TO STOP ALARM37 FUEL RELAY ENERGISED38 GAS ENGINE IGNITION OUTPUT39 GENERATOR AT REST40 GENERATOR AVAILABLE41 GENERATOR CLOSED AUXILIARY42 GENERATOR FAILED TO CLOSE43 GENERATOR FAILED TO OPEN44 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM45 GENERATOR HIGH FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN46 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM47 GENERATOR HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN48 GENERATOR LOAD INHIBIT49 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY PRE-ALARM50 GENERATOR LOW FREQUENCY SHUTDOWN51 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE PRE-ALARM52 GENERATOR LOW VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN53 RESERVED54 GENERATOR STOPPING55 HORN OUTPUT56 LAMP TEST57 LEVEL PREALARM58 LOSS OF MAGNETIC PICK-UP SPEED SIGNAL59 MAINTENANCE DUE ALARM60 MAINS CLOSED AUXILIARY61 MAINS FAILED TO CLOSE62 MAINS FAILED TO OPEN63 MAINS FAILURE64 MAINS HIGH FREQUENCY65 MAINS HIGH VOLTAGE66 MAINS LOAD INHIBIT67 MAINS LOW FREQUENCY68 MAINS LOW VOLTAGE69 NO LOADING COMMAND70 OIL PRESSURE LOW PRE-ALARM71 OIL PRESSURE LOW SHUTDOWN72 OVER CURRENT73 OVERSPEED PRE-ALARM74 OVERSPEED SHUTDOWN75 PANEL LOCK76 PRE-HEAT(during preheat timer)77 PRE-HEAT(until end of cranking)78 PRE-HEAT(until end of warming)79 PRE-HEAT(until end safety on)80 REMOTE START PRESENT81 REMOTE STOP DELAY IN PROGRESS82 SHORT CIRCUIT83 START RELAY ENERGISED84 STARTING ALARM85 STARTING ALARMS ARMED86 STOP BUTTON PRESSED87 SYSTEM IN AUTO MODE88 SYSTEM IN MANUAL MODE89 SYSTEM IN OFF MODE90 SYSTEM IN TEST MODE91 UNDERSPEED SHUTDOWN92 UNDERSPEED PRE-ALARM93 WAITING FOR GENERATOR




FUNCTION




(EXP.CONFG.OUT-1 PAGE) EXPANSION CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT (1) pagePOLARITY Polarity (Normally Open, Normally Closed)

FUNCTION





FUNCTION




(START TIMERS PAGE) START TIMERS pageMAINS TRANS.DELAY Mains Transient DelayREMOTE START DELAY Remote Start DelayREMOTE STOP DELAY Remote Stop DelayPRE-HEAT Pre-HeatPRE-HEAT BYPASS Pre-Heat BypassSAFETY ON DELAY Safety On DelayHORN DURATION Horn DurationCHRG.EXCITATION TIM Charge Excitation TimeELECTR.COOL.FAN TIM Cooling Fan TimeMAINS FAIL DELAY Mains Fail Delay

(LOAD/STP.TIMERS PAGE) LOAD/STOPPING TIMERS pageWARM UP TIME Warmup TimerRETURN DELAY Return DelayCOOLING TIME Cooling TimerGEN.FR.ERR.CNT.TIME Generator Frequency Error Control TimeGEN.VL.ERR.CNT.TIME Generator Voltage Error Control TimeFAIL TO STOP TIME Fail To Stop Time

(BREAKERS PAGE) BREAKERS pageHARDW.BREAKER SELCT Hardware Breaker SelectionGEN.CLOS.BREK.C.TYP Gen Close Breaker Contact TypeGEN.CLOS.BREK.R.TYP Gen Close Breaker Relay TypeGEN.CLOSE TIMER Gen Close TimerGEN.OPEN.BREK.C.TYP Gen Open Breaker Contact TypeGEN.OPEN.BREK.R.TYP Gen Open Breaker Relay TypeGEN.OPEN TIMER Gen Open TimerMAIN CLS.BREK.C.TYP Main Close Breaker Contact TypeMAIN CLS.BREK.R.TYP Main Close Breaker Relay TypeMAINS CLOSE TIMER Mains Close TimerMAIN OPN.BREK.C.TYP Main Open Breaker Contact TypeMAIN OPN.BREK.R.TYP Main Open Breaker Relay TypeMAINS OPEN TIMER Mains Open TimerBREKR.CLOS.PULS.TIM Breaker Close Pulse TimeBREKR.OPEN.PULS.TIM Breaker Open Pulse TimeTRANSFER TIME Transfer Time

(LCD CONFIG.PAGE) LCD CONFIGURATION pageERR.MESS SCROLL TIM Scroll Time For Error MessagesDIGITAL CONTRAST Digital ContrastBACKLIGHT ON/OFF Backlight On/Off

(ENG.MAINT.ALARM PAGE) ENGINE MAINTENANCE ALARM pageRUNN.HOURS INTERVAL Running Hours IntervalMAINT.DATE INTERVAL Maintenance Date Interval

ENG.STP.WH.MANT.E/DForce Engine Shutdown WhenMaintenance Is Due En/Dis

ENGIN.RUN.HOUR(LSB) Engine Running Hour (Lsb)ENGINE RUNNING HOUR Engine Running HourENGIN.RUN.HOUR(MSB) Engine Running Hour(Msb)

(COMMUNICATION PAGE) COMMUNICATION pageSLAVE ADDRESS Slave Address

BAUD RATE

Baud Rate 0=1200 1=2400 2=4800 3=9600 4=19200

PARITY Parity; 0= NONE, 1= ODD, 2= EVENSTOP BIT Stop Bit



(WR.CALENDR&EXER.PAGE) WORKING CALENDAR & EXERCISE page

WORK.PERIOD ON MON.Working calendar working time onMonday

WORK.START TIME MONWorking calendar work start time onMonday

WORK.PERIOD ON TUE.Working calendar working time onTuesday

WORK.START TIME TUEWorking calendar work start time onTuesday

WORK.PERIOD ON WED.Working calendar working time onWednesday

WORK.START TIME WEDWorking calendar work start time onWednesday

WORK.PERIOD ON THU.Working calendar working time onThursday

WORK.START TIME THUWorking calendar work start time onThursday

WORK.PERIOD ON FRI. Working calendar working time on Friday

WORK.START TIME FRIWorking calendar work start time onFriday

WORK.PERIOD ON SAT.Working calendar working time onSaturday

WORK.START TIME SATWorking calendar work start time onSaturday

WORK.PERIOD ON SUN. Working calendar working time on Sunday

WORK.START TIME SUNWorking calendar work start time onSunday

EXER.WORKING PERIODGenerator exercise working time onrelated day

EXER.WR.DAY OF WEEK Generator exercise working day of week

EXER.WORK.START TIMGenerator exercise work start time onrelated day

(DATE SETUP PAGE) DATE SETUP pageYEAR YEARMONTH MONTHDATE DATEDAY DAYHOUR HOURMINUTE MINSECOND SEC

(PASSWORD PAGE) PASSWORD pageOPERATOR PASSWORD OPERATOR PASSWORDTECHNICIAN PASSWORD TECHNICIAN PASSWORD

Change Date : . . . . . / . . . . . / . . . . . . .Change Technician Name :

EA

OM

-9F

& E

AO

M-9

F N

D A

uto

ma

tic

Tra

ns

fer

Sw

itc

h C

on

tro

lle

rs,

Fla

t Ty

pe

- - - - - - - - - - -

- Monitors (Only EAOM-9F)3-phase mains supply voltage Battery voltageAlternator voltage Engine running timeAlternator frequency Error IndicationEngine Speed Program Parameters

- ControlsEngine fuel supply or Engine Stopping Load transfer on mains failureStarter motor Return to mainsAlarm horn Mains contactorPreheat Generator contactorAutomatic generator start

- Fail MonitoringMains Supply Voltage Engine StartAlternator Voltage and Frequency Alternator Over CurrentEngine Speed Emergency StopEngine Temperature Maintenance DueOil Pressure Low Battery VoltageCharge Generator Voltage

- Programming using the buttons and display on the front panel or RS-232 communication port, using PC based software.

Protection, control and meteringAutomatic engine start/stop and load transferAutomatic shutdown on fault conditionLED status and fault indicationSimple push-button controlled operationManual, automatic and test mode controlTwo user-configurable inputsOne user-configurable outputFully programmableRS-232 communication portStandard modem communication

Instruction Manual. ENG EAOM-9F & EAOM-9F ND 02 V00 07/07

EAOM-9F & EAOM-9F NDAutomatic Transfer Switch Controllers,

Flat Type

Technician Parameters

EAOM-9F / 9F ND SOFT

File Programming

Adjustment

Settings About

COM1 Communication

Observation Operator Parameters

Measurement Values

Mains Voltage (L12)Mains Voltage (L1N)Mains Voltage (L23)Mains Voltage (L2N)Mains Voltage (L31)Mains Voltage (L3N)

VacVacVacVacVacVac

Generator UV VoltageGenerator FrequencyBattery VoltageMaintenance TimeExercise TimeRunning Time

000000

00.0

11.00 / 0

00

VacHzVdcHour / DayHourHour

Failures

Start Failure

High Temperature

Low oil Pressure

Battery Fail

Over Speed

Generator Voltage Failure

Charge Genarator Failure

Emergency Stop

Over Current

Spare-1

Spare-2

Routine Maintenance

Outputs

Mains Contactor Out

Generator Contactor Out

Configurable Out Output1

Selenoid Out

Start Out

Horn Out

Modes

Off Auto Manual Test Program

2

Instruction manual of EAOM-9F EAOM-9F consists of two main sections. Explanation of these sections are below. Also, there is another section which include technical specifications of the device. All titles and page numbers in instruction manual are in “CONTENTS” section. User can reach to any title with section number.

Installation:

In this section, physical dimensions of the device, panel mounting, electrical wiring, physical and electrical installation of the device to the system are explained.

Operation and Parameters:

In this section, user interface of the device, how to access to the parameters, description of the parameters are explained.

Also in these sections, there are warnings to prevent serious injury while doing the physical and electrical mounting or using the device.

Explanation of the symbols which are used in these sections are given below.

& ND

This symbol is used to determine the dangerous situations as a result of an electric shock. User must pay attention to these warnings definitely.a

c This symbol is used for safety warnings. User must pay attention to these warnings.

This symbol is used to determine the important notes about functions and usage of the device.

ABOUT INSTRUCTION MANUAL

i

This symbol is used for VDC

This symbol is used for VAC

Z

V

3

CONTENTS

Page 6

Page 14

Page 9

Page 18

Page 26

1.PREFACE............................................................................................................................................1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS1.2 WARRANTY1.3 MAINTENANCE

2.INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION2.2 DIMENSIONS2.3 PANEL CUT-OUT2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS2.5 PANEL MOUNTING2.6 INSTALLATION FIXING SCREWS2.7 REMOVING FROM THE PANEL

3.ELECTRICAL WIRINGS......................................................................................................................3.1 TERMINAL LAYOUT AND CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

4.RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE, PROGRAMMING THE DEVICE OVER PC OR MODEM...................4.1 CABLE CONNECTION BETWEEN RS-232 TERMINAL OF THE DEVICE AND PC4.2 CABLE CONNECTION BETWEEN RS-232 TERMINAL OF THE DEVICE AND MODEM4.3 PC INTERFACE4.3.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS4.3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS4.3.2.1 MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS4.3.3 INSTALLING EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F SOFTWARE4.3.4 USING OF EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE4.3.5 DESCRIPTION4.3.6 OBSERVATION WINDOW 4.3.7 OPERATOR PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.8 TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.9 MAIN MENU4.3.9.1 FILE4.3.9.2 PROGRAMMING 4.3.9.3 SETTINGS4.3.10 ENTERING TO THE OPERATOR PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.11 ENTERING TO THE TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.12 ENTERING TO THE ADJUSTMENT WINDOW4.3.13 LOAD THE CONFIGURATION FILE FROM DISC4.3.14 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION FILE TO THE DISC 4.3.15 UPLOAD4.3.16 DOWNLOAD

5.PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................................................

5.1.14 “POWER ON” DEFAULT MODE CONFIGURATION 5.1.15 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 5.1.16 MAINTENANCE INDICATION 5.1.17 OPERATOR PASSWORD 5.1.18 TECHNICIAN PASSWORD 5.1.19 ENGINE EXERCISE FUNCTION 5.1.20 MAINS CONTACTOR CONTROL SELECTION

ND ND

5.1. PROGRAM FUNCTIONS 5.1.1 MAINS VOLTAGE 5.1.2 ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE 5.1.3 ALTERNATOR FREQUENCY 5.1.4 ENGINE COOLING TIME 5.1.5 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOWER LIMIT 5.1.6 ENGINE STARTING 5.1.7 ENGINE STARTED SIGNALS 5.1.8 SPEED SENSING INPUT SELECTION 5.1.9 STOP / FUEL SOLENOID SELECTION 5.1.10 STOP MAGNET ENERGISING TIME 5.1.11 OIL PRESSURE BY-PASS TIME 5.1.12 CONTROL ON DELAY 5.1.13 CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

5.1.21 HORN BLINK SELECTION

5.1.24 REMOTE CONTROL MODE SELECTION 5.2 CHANGING and SAVING OPERATOR PARAMETER VALUE 5.3 CHANGING and SAVING TECHNICIAN PARAMETER VALUE

9. FAULT FINDING.................................................................................................................................

10.PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS..................................................................................................

11.SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................................................................................

5.1.22 ENGINE STARTING DELAY5.1.23 ENGINE FUEL SELECTION AND FUEL-STARTER DELAY TIME

6. COMMISSIONING.............................................................................................................................. 6.1 MANUAL OPERATION 6.2 AUTO OPERATION 6.3 TEST MODE OPERATION

7. LAMP TEST.........................................................................................................................................

8. OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................8.1 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION

8.2 DISPLAY MODE INDICATORS 8.3 MODE TRANSITION

8.4 MANUAL START8.5 MANUAL STOP8.6 AUTO OPERATION8.7 TEST OPERATION8.8 ENGINE EXERCISING

9.1 FAULT INDICATIONS 9.1.1 FAILED TO START LED 9.1.2 HIGH TEMPERATURE LED 9.1.3 LOW OIL PRESSURE LED 9.1.4 CHARGE GENERATOR FAILURE LED 9.1.5 OVER SPEED LED 9.1.6 GENERATOR VOLTAGE FAILURE LED 9.1.7 OVER CURRENT LED 9.1.8 CONFIGURABLE INPUT-1 AND 2 LED 9.1.9 EMERGENCY STOP MESSAGE LED 9.1.10 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE MESSAGE LED 9.1.11 MAINTENANCE TIME MESSAGE LED

4

Page 39

Page 44

Page 49

Page 40

Page 41

Page 47

5

Manufacturer Company Name : Emko Elektronik A.S.

Manufacturer Company Address: DOSAB, Karanfil Sokak, No:6, 16369 Bursa, Turkiye

The manufacturer hereby declares that the product conforms to the following standards and conditions.

Product Name :

Model Number :

Type Number : EAOM-9F EAOM-9F

Product Category : Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

Conforms to the following directives :

Electrical control equipment for generating sets

EAOM-9F & EAOM-9F ND

& ND

EMC : BS EN 50081-2, EMC Generic Emission Standard for industrial equipment

BS EN 50082-2, EMC Generic Immunity Standard for industrial equipment

Electrical Safety : EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

1. PREFACE

6

The provides for automatic transfer of a load from mains to generator in the event of a mains supply failure. Intended for unattended operation, it is able to detect failure of any phase of the mains and to start and switch over to a generator if the mains voltage goes outside pre-set limits. Both automatic and manual control is possible. A test mode is also available which allows the generator to be run without taking the load. The unit monitors generator operation and gives warning of any faults that are detected, by LED indicators. The unit monitors:Mains supply voltage Alternator voltage and frequency Engine temperature Oil Pressure Charge generator voltage Engine speed

It controls: Engine fuel supply or engine stopping Mains and Generator contactors Starter motor Alarm horn Automatic generator start and load transfer on mains failure

EAOM-9F Features a four-digit, seven-segment LED display, providing extensive monitoring of unit and generator parameters, including:Three phase mains voltageAlternator output voltage and frequencyEngine RPMBattery voltageElapsed timeError indicationEngine running timeProgram Parameters

EAOM-9F ND has no display, offers identical functionality and programming via RS-232, and can be used where electrical and engine metering is already in place.

The unit is extensively programmable through the front panel, with password protection on two levels. Operational parameters can also be monitored and controlled from a PC via a built-in RS-232 port.If the engine fails to start on the first attempt, further attempts are made up to a programmed number of times or until successful.If a fault is detected, the unit shuts down the engine and indicates the failure by flashing a relevant fault LED.Emergency stop and remote inhibit inputs provide for remote control of the engine.Configurable inputs can be programmed to perform many functions, such as warning alarms,stopping the engine or disconnecting the load. A configurable output can be programmed for various functions, including alarms, operation as a pre-heat output, indication of engine running status, and indication that the product is in Automatic mode.

The unit can be programmed using the buttons and display on the front panel. Refer to Section 5 Parameters for details. Alternatively, the unit can be programmed via the RS-232 communication port, using PC based software.

EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND

Over Current Emergency Stop Maintenance Due Low Battery Voltage

Engine Start Alternator

Preheat Automatic generator start Return to mains

EAOM-9F/ EAOM-9F ND can communicate with this software over modem.

1.1 General Specifications

7

+BATTERY

NMAINS L1MAINS L2MAINS L3

GEN. L1

N


MAINS&


&CONDITIONING

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMGENERATOR

VOLTAGE

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMMAGNETIC

PICK-UP

FAILURE&

CONTROLINPUTS

PUSHBUTTONS

MAGNETICPICK-UP

ANALOGTO

DIGITALCONVERTER

COUNTER&

TIMER

MICROCONTROLLERTRANSISTOR

OUTPUTS

POWERSUPPLY

FAILURE &STATUS

INDICATORS

RS-232+MODEMCOMM.

8

1.2 Warranty

EMKO Elektronik warrants that the equipment delivered is free from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty is provided for a period of two years. The warranty period starts from the delivery date. This warranty is in force if duty and responsibilities which are determined in warranty document and instruction manual performs by the customer completely.

1.3 Maintenance

Repairs should only be performed by trained and specialized personnel. Cut power to the device before accessing internal parts.Do not clean the case with hydrocarbon-based solvents (Petrol, Trichlorethylene etc.). Use of these solvents can reduce the mechanical reliability of the device. Use a cloth dampened in ethyl alcohol or water to clean the external plastic case.

9

Carefully unpack the unit and check for damage to the unit or to the cables supplied. Retain the packing in case of future need, e.g. returning the unit for calibration.Check the contents, as follows:• One EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit.• Operating Manual.• Screw fixings.• RS-232 Cable.

Before commencing installation:• Disconnect all electrical power to the machine.• Make sure the machine cannot operate during installation.• Follow all of the machine manufacturers' safety warnings.• Read and follow all installation instructions.

Report any shortage or damage to your local sales office as soon as possible.

A visual inspection of this product for possible damage occured during shipment is recommended before installation. It is your responsibility to ensure that qualified mechanical and electrical technicians install this product.

Be sure to use the rated power supply voltage to protect the unit against damage and to prevent failure.

Keep the power off until all of the wiring is completed so that electric shock and trouble with the unit can be prevented.

Never attempt to disassemble, modify or repair this unit. Tampering with the unit may results in malfunction, electric shock or fire.

Do not use the unit in combustible or explosive gaseous atmospheres.

During the equipment is putted in hole on the metal panel while mechanical installation some metal burrs can cause injury on hands, you must be careful.Montage of the product on a system must be done with it’s own fixing screws. Do not do the montage of the device with inappropriate fixing screws. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.It is your responsibility if this equipment is used in a manner not specified in this instruction manual.

Before beginning installation of this product, please read the instruction manual and warnings below carefully.

2. INSTALLATION

c

9

204mm

14

4m

m

10

2.1 General Description

2.2 Dimensions

Front PanelIP65 protection

NEMA4X

LabelPocket

Mounting Holes

ConnectionTerminals

Þekil 2.2. Side View

Figure 2.1. Front View

96mm

11

2.3 Panel Cut-Out

Operating Temperature : -25°C to 70°C

Max. Operating Humidity : 90% Rh (non-condensing)

Altitude : Up to 2000m.

Operating Conditions

Forbidden Conditions:Corrosive atmosphereExplosive atmosphereHome applications (The unit is only for industrial applications)

2.4 Environmental Ratings

c

17.2

5m

m1

7.2

5m

m

R=

4.5

mm

R=

4.5

mm

=4

5R

.m

m=

45

R.

mm

17

.25

mm

17

.25

mm

m5mm5m 5mm5mm

R=4.5mmR=4.5mm

R=4.5mmR=4.5mm

186 mm186 mm

10

3.5

mm

10

3.5

mm

196 mm196 mm

13

8 m

m1

38

mm

12

During installation into a metal panel, care should be taken to avoid injury from metal burrs which might be present. The equipment can loosen from vibration and become dislodged if installation parts are not properly tightened. These precautions for the safety of the person who does the panel mounting.

1. Before mounting the device in your panel, make sure that the cut-out is of the right size2. Make sure that the diameter of the holes are of the right size and coordinate of the holes are true.3. Check front panel gasket position4. Insert the device through the cut-out. If the mounting screws are on the unit, put out them before inserting the unit to the panel.

2.5 Panel Mounting

c

1

3

2

22

2

4

The un i t is des igned for panel mounting.

1. Insert the unit in the panel cut-out from the front side.2. Insert the fixings through the mounting holes and tighten the fixing screws to secure the unit against the panel.

Fixing is done by four screw fixings

2.6 Installation Fixing Screws

Montage of the unit to a system must be done with it’s own fixing screws. Do not do the montage of the device with inappropriate fixing screws. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.

During mechanical installation, beware of any sharp burrs on the metal panel aperture. Ensure that the fixings are properly tightened to prevent the fixings becoming loose due to panel vibration.c

1. Loosen the screws.2. Pull the unit through the front side of the panel

Before starting to remove the unit from panel, power off the unit and the related system.

2.7 Removing from the Panel

c

13

3.1 Terminal Layout and Connection Instructions

14

The Remote Inhibit input is only active when the unit is in the AUTO Mode. When asserted, the engine will not start up. If the engine was already running when this input becomes active, the engine will shut down. The generator operates normally when the input is open circuit.

While installing the unit, battery voltage range must be controlled and appropriate battery voltage must be applied to the unit. Controlling prevents damages in unit and system and possible accidents as a result of incorrect battery voltage.

Switch on the battery voltage only after that all the electrical connections have been completed.

External fuse is recommended.In case of failure it is suggested to return the instrument to the manufacturer for repair.You must ensure that the device is correctly configured for your application. Incorrect

configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled, and/or personal injury. It is your responsibility, as the installer, to ensure that the configuration is correct. Device parameters has factory default values. These parameters must be set according to the system’s needs. There is severe danger for human life in the case of unauthorized intervention.

Only qualified personnel and trained technicians should work on this equipment. Do not open

or dismantle the product enclosure.

This equipment contains internal circuits with voltage dangerous to human life. c

1 (

5V

)

2 (

Tx

)

3 (

Rx

)

4 (

GN

D)

RS 232COMMUNICATION

INTERFACE

•• • •

aa

cc

OPEN COLLECTOR TRANSISTOR OUTPUTS

MAX. 500 mA

CE

3. ELECTRICAL WIRINGS

3.2 Electrical Wiring Diagram

15

Single Phase Electrical Wiring

Three Phase Electrical Wiring

Ensure the battery supply is of the correct polarity and that the battery negative rail is grounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit for convenience and to speed up installation.The fuses should be as follows:FUSE-1, FUSE 3, FUSE-4, FUSE-5, FUSE-6 1 A. TFUSE-2 2 A. T

c

MAINS CONTACTOR

N

LMAINS

L N

LOAD

GENERATOR CONTACTOR

R-5

MAINS VOLTAGE

R-6

GENERATOR VOLTAGE

GENERATOR

N

L

- B

AT

TE

RY

FU

SE

-3

U-6

FS

E

+ B

AT

TE

RY

FU

SE

-1 STA

RT

OU

TP

UT

HO

RN

OU

TP

UT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E O

UT

PU

T

GE

N. C

ON

TA

CT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L O

UT

PU

T

MA

INS

CO

NTA

CT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L O

UT

PU

T

SO

LE

NO

ID O

UT

PU

T

FUSE-2

BA

TT

ER

Y

R-1 R-2 R-3 R-4 R-5

D+(W.L)

CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

TU

RE

OV

ER

CU

RR

EN

T

E.S

TO

P

RE

MO

TE

IN

HIB

IT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

EFA

ILU

RE

IN

PU

T-1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

EFA

ILU

RE

IN

PU

T-2

MagneticPickup

(up to 10kHz)

BATTERY NEGATIVE MUST BE GROUNDED

R-6

MAINS CONTACTORNL1L2L3

MAINS

L3 L2 L1 N

LOAD

GENERATOR CONTACTOR

R-5

MAINS VOLTAGE

R-6

GENERATOR VOLTAGE

GENERATOR

NL1L2L3

- B

AT

TE

RY

FU

SE

-3

FU

SE

-4

FU

SE

-5

FU

SE

-6

+ B

AT

TE

RY

FU

SE

-1

STA

RT

OU

TP

UT

HO

RN

OU

TP

UT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E

CO

NT

RO

L O

UT

PU

T

CO

NTA

CT

OR

CO

NT

RO

L O

UT

PU

T

SO

LE

NO

ID O

UT

PU

T

FUSE-2

BA

TT

ER

Y

R-1 R-2 R-3 R-4 R-5

CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

TU

RE

OV

ER

CU

RR

EN

T

E.S

TO

P

RE

MO

TE

IN

HIB

IT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

EFA

ILU

RE

IN

PU

T-1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

EFA

ILU

RE

IN

PU

T-2

MagneticPickup

(up to 10kHz)


R-6

1- Connect the unit as shown in the appropriate diagram above. Be sure to connect the battery supply the right way round and battery negative should be grounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit to facilitate connection.2- Screened cable must be used for connecting the Magnetic Pickup, ensuring that the screen is grounded at one end ONLY.

+

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 158 7

c1

c1

c2

++

c1

c1

c2

4 3 2 1 5 6

12 11 10 913 14

1234 5 6

13 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

GE

N. C

ON

TA

CT

OR

OU

TP

UT

MA

INS

D+(W.L)


16

Mains PEN conductor 2.5Description Cable Size (mm) Notes

Mains voltage input (L1) 2.53 phase applications only Mains voltage input (L2) 2.5

2.5Mains voltage input (L3) 3 phase applications only Alternator PEN conductor 2.5Alternator voltage input (L1) 2.5

7 1 500 mAZ

8 1 500 mAZ

19 500 mAZ

110 500 mAZ

111 500 mAZ

112 500 mAZ

2.5 13 Supplies to unit.

2.5 Supplies to unit

1Input from magnetic pick-up

Configurable failure input-2 1 Switch to 0 VZ (NO)Configurable failure input-1 Switch to 0 VZ (NO)1Input from remote inhibit Switch to 0 VZ (NO)1

20 Input from emergency stop 1

21 Input from high current Switch to 0 VZ (NO)122 Input from high temperature 1 Switch to 0 VZ (NO)23 Input form low oil pressure Switch to 0 VZ (NC)124 Input from charge generator 1

Table 2.1 shows the connections and recommended cable sizes. Table 2.2 describes the functions of the connections.

Pin123456

14

171819

Switch to 0 VZ (NC)


Pin FunctionMains PEN conductor EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND

6

7

Alternator contactor transistor output (via external relay)

9

Horn transistor output. Alarm output. (via external relay)

11

Start transistor output. Controls starter motor. (via external relay)

17

19

20

21

22

23

17

18

1

5

8

10

121314

24

Mains contactor transistor output. For mains contactor normally closed ornormally open can be selected. (via external relay)

Configurable failure output. Can be programmed to provide transistor output closure when : alarm occurs, engine is running, unit is ready for automatic operation or preheat function. (Via external relay)

Fuel / Stop transistor output. Controls fuel to engine or control engine stopping (via external relay)

18

4.RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE, PROGRAMMING THE DEVICE OVER PC OR MODEM

4.1 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and PC


EAOM-9F

Standard communication cable


EAOM-9F

MODEM communication cable

Green

Yellow

White

Brown

Brown

White

Green

Note: For 9600 baud rate, cable length must be maximum 10 meters.

PC

MODEM



4.2 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and Modem

19

The PC interface kit comprises of a 9 pin D connector/FCC68(4 pin) connection lead with 2 meters of cable, and the optional PC Software (Supplied on CD-ROM)

RS-232 non-isolated Serial interface9600 Baud Rate8 data bits, No Parity,1 Stop BitMaximum allowable cable length is 10 meters

Processor : 486 66MHZOperating Systems : Windows 95/98/XP, Windows NT, Windows 2000Ram : 16 MbyteMonitor : 14’’ SVGA (640x480 resolution)Fixed Disk Free Space : 5 MbyteDisk Drive : CD-ROMCommunication : An RS-232 communication port is needed to communicate with the

EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive on the PC. CD will autostart, then select E AOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND Install from the menu .

Press the windows START button icon, then select EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND SW Þ EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND from the program Menu.

EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit communicates with the PC using RS-232 communications. The PC software allows the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit’s parameters and status information to be displayed on the PC screen. Operator and Technician parameters can be viewed. Parameters are password protected.There are four windows in EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND PC SW: Observation Window, Operator Parameters Window,Technician Parameters Window and Adjustment Window.

4.3 PC Interface

4.3.1 Technical Specifications

4.3.2 Installation Instruction

4.3.2.1 Minimum System Requirements

4.3.3 Installing EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND Software

4.3.4 Using Of EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND Communication Software

4.3.5 Description

20

When the program runs firstly, a window is shown to determine how the connection will be established: over modem or RS-232 communication port. This selection is made with the ‘Connect with Modem’ check box. If the comport settings are correct, when ‘Connect’ button is pressed, connection is established. With ‘Add New Phone Number’ button, user can access to the window below and save the location name and phone number for using to connect with modem.

4.3.6 Observation Window

Firstly, enter phone number and location name (It is used to remember where the phone number belongs) and press ‘Ok’ button for saving these values.

When the connection is established, main screen is shown.

21

Measurement ValuesMains VoltageGenerator VoltageGenerator FrequencyBattery VoltageMaintenance HourRunning Time Exercise Time

FailuresStart FailureHigh TemperatureLow Oil PressureOver SpeedGenerator Voltage FailureCharge Generator FailureOver CurrentConfigurable Inputs 1 & 2Battery FailEmergency StopRoutine Maintenance

OutputsMains Contactor OutputGenerator Contactor OutputConfigurable Output-1Solenoid outputStart outputHorn outputSerial communication port (RS-232)

ModesOffAutoManualTestProgram

22

Operator parameters can be viewed and edited. Parameters are password protected. When the operator password is entered, it is compared with operator password that is registered inside the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit.

All parameters can be viewed and edited in this window. Parameters are password protected. When the technician password is entered, it is compared with technician password that is registered inside the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit.

With this menu, a configuration file can be opened, parameters can be saved, printed and printer setings can be changed.

Open :This menu allows the user to load the registered configuration files to the PC.Save :This menu allows the user to save the parameters with a name defined by

user.Print :This menu allows the user to print the parameters.Printer Setup:This menu allows the user to select the printer that is connected to network or PC

and change the configuration of the printer.Exit :Exit the program.

This menu is active if operator or technician parameters page is accessed. With this menu, parameters can be read from the device or write to the device.

Download : With this menu user can load parameters from PC to EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND .Upload : User can load the parameters stored on EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit to PC.Add New Phone Number : User can be saved the phone number which is used for connecting with the modem.

4.3.7 Operator Parameters Window

4.3.8 Technician Parameters Window

4.3.9 MAIN MENU

4.3.9.1 FILE

4.3.9.2 PROGRAMMING

Communication Port Settings: With this menu, user can determine the serial port configurations of the PCLanguage: Turkish or English can be selected.

4.3.9.3 Settings

Connect: With this menu, the window below is observed. According to the ‘Connect with Modem’ check status, connection can be establish over RS-232 port or modem. If the comport settings are done correctly, when the ‘Connect’ button is pressed, connection is established.

Disconnect: If the connection is established over modem or RS-232 port, connection can be cut off with this selection.

Click Operator Parameter tab. Enter the operator password. If the password is correct, operator parameters will be viewed.

4.3.10 Accessing to the Operator Parameters Page

23

24

Click Technician Parameter tab. Enter the technician password. If password is correct, all parameters will be viewed.

4.3.11 Accessing to the Technician Parameters Page

Click Adjustment tab. Enter the technician password. If the password is correct, adjustment page will be shown.

4.3.12 Accessing to the Adjustment Page

Click 'Open' in File menu. Choose configuration file which includes operator or technician parameters on Open Dialog Box. When the user clicks the 'Open' button on the Open Dialog Box, parameters will be transferred to PC window.

4.3.13 Load the Configuration File From Disc

4.3.14 Save the Configuration File to the Disc

Click 'Save' in File menu. After choosing where to save the file, enter the file name. When the user clicks the 'Save' button on Save Dialog Box, all parameters will be saved to the file.

For loading parameters from EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND unit to PC follow the steps below. If user is in operator parameters window, only operator parameters will be viewed. If user is in Technician Parameters Window, all parameters will be viewed. Press 'Upload' in Program menu. While loading the parameters, the hour-glass cursor is displayed. Please wait for the upload operation to complete, when the cursor returns to normal.

For loading parameters from PC to EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND follow the steps below. If user is in operator parameters window, only operator parameters will be loaded. If user is in Technician Parameters Window, all parameters will be loaded. Press 'Download' in Program menu. While loading the parameters, the hour-glass cursor is displayed. Please wait for the download operation to complete, when the cursor returns to normal.

25

4.3.15 Upload

4.3.16 Download

The unit is extensively programmable through the front panel and via PC software.

Table 4 Programmable function definitions

Engine started signal P26.0

P26.2 P26.3

0=No, 1=Yes

Alternator voltage limit for crank disconnection

P35

60060606060

600600600600

30.0 75.00 999

0000 9999

VVVVVVVVVV

60

HzDay

Hour

1 10 Number0 99 Minute

0 999 Second0 30 Minute0 99 Second0 999 Hour0 999 Minute

500 5000 Rpm1 1000 Number

7.2 24.0 VZ0.1 25.0 Second

0 99 Second

5 99 Second40 360 VV

20.0 45.0 Hz0 99 Second0 99 Second

0.0 10.0 Second0.0 10.0 Second

0/10/10/10/1

Charge GeneratorSpeedAlternator VoltageOil Pressure

P26.1

50.0/60.0 Hz

1/3

Stop / Fuel

0=Off,1=Auto Number

Min Default UnitDefinition of Parameter MaxMains Voltage Connection LevelMains Voltage Disconnection LevelMains Voltage Upper LimitAlternator Voltage Lower Limit Alternator Voltage Upper Limit Speed Upper Limit Periodic Maintenance Day Set Value(0 = dis)Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value(0 = dis)

Number of Starting AttemptsEngine Cooling Time(0 disable cool process)

Horn Duration (0 Continuous) Mains Transition Delay Preheat Time Exercise Time (0 Disable) Exercise Duration Time Period Single / Three Phase Selection

Speed Sensing Input Selection

Nominal Alternator FrequencyNominal Speed Tooth Number Battery Voltage Lower LimitMains Change Over DelayStop / Fuel Solenoid SelectionStop Magnet Energising Time

Starting Attempt Duration

Speed Limit for Crank DisconnectionOil Pressure By-Pass TimeControl on DelayAlternator Voltage Fault Control DelaySpeed Fault Control Delay

Engine running time reset

“Power ON” default mode configuration

Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

32030044032044053.0365

5000

33

603

100

203

0

50.03000

1008.01.0

Fuel20

1010

530040.0

30105.05.0

26

0

NoP00P01P02P03P04P05P06P07P08P09P10

P12P13P14P15P16P17

P18

P19P20P21P22P23P24P25P26

P28P29P30P31P32P33P34

P36

Press ‘Silence Alarm’ button to reset

0=Alternator Signal(Internal)

1=Magnetic Pickup

Enter technician password to reset time to “0” (zero)

5. PARAMETERS

0=None, 1=ExistsHorn Blink Selection 1P11

0.0 25.0 SecondEngine Starting Delay 0.0P27

27

Normal / Fail safe configuration of inputs 310 NumberMin Default UnitDefinition of Parameter Max

0NoP37

0 All normal1 Temperature Fail-safe2 Pressure Fail-safe3 Temp. + Pressure Fail-safe4 Conf. Input1 Fail-safe5 Conf. Input1 + Temp. Fail-safe6 Conf. Input1 + Pressure Fail-safe7 Conf. Input1 + Temp + Pressure Fail-safe8 Conf. Input2 Fail-safe9 Conf. Input2 + Temp. Fail-safe10 Conf. Input2 + Pressure Fail-safe11 Conf. Input2 + Temp + Pressure Fail-safe12 Conf. Input1 + Conf. Input2 Fail-safe13 Conf. Input1 + Conf. Input2 + Temp. Fail-safe14 Conf. Input1 + Conf. Input2 + Pressure Fail-safe15 Conf. Input1 + Conf. Input2 + Pressure + Temp. Fail-safe16 Current Fail-safe17 Current + Temp. Fail-safe18 Current + Pressure Fail-safe19 Current + Pressure + Temp. Fail-safe20 Current + Conf. Input1 Fail-safe21 Current + Conf. Input1 + Temp. Fail-safe22 Current + Conf. Input1 + Pressure Fail-safe23 Current + Conf. Input1 + Pressure + Temp. Fail-safe24 Current + Conf. Input2 Fail-safe25 Current + Conf. Input2 + Temp. Fail-safe26 Current + Conf. Input2 + Pressure Fail-safe27 Current + Conf. Input2 + Pressure + Temp. Fail-safe28 Current + Conf.Input2 + Conf.Input1 Fail-safe29 Current + Conf. Input2 + Conf. Input1 + Temp. Fail-safe30 Current + Conf. Input2 + Conf. Input1 + Pressure Fail-safe31 Current + Conf.Input2 + Conf.Input1 + Pressure + Temperature

0 Force product into AUTO mode

28

100 NumberNo Min Default UnitDefinition of Parameter MaxP38 0

0 10 0 Second0 10 0 Second

Configurable Output 0 13 0 Number

Mains Contactor Selection. Number

Configurable Input-1 Delay Time Configurable Input-2 Delay Time

0

1 Disable front panel controls

4 LED flashes and alarm sounds until reset

2 LED status indication only3 LED flashes and alarm sounds whileinput is active

5 As “4” plus engine stops

7 As “3” but only while engine running.6 As “2” but only while engine running.

8 As “4” but only while engine running.

10 As “8” and the alternator contactor isde-energised

Configurable Failure Input-1 Operation:

9 As “5” but only while engine running.

100 NumberP39 0Configurable Failure Input-2 Operation:Selections are same with P38

0 Alarm output1 Engine running2 Ready for automatic transfer on mains failure3 Preheat. Active for preheat time (P13)4 Load transfer permitted5 Over speed shutdown output6 Over current alarm output7 High temperature alarm output8 Low oil pressure alarm output9 Maintenance due alarm output10 Failed to start alarm output11 Voltage failure alarm output12 Charging fail alarm output13 Low battery voltage alarm output

0=Mains contactor is NO

1=Mains contactor is NC

P40P41P42

P43

NumberP47 0000 9990 0000P48 0000 9990 0000 Number

Operator Password (P00 to P16 and P47) Technician Password (P00 to P48)

P44 1Motor Fuel (Gas/Diesel) Selection

P45 0.0 25.0Fuel-Starter (Diesel)/Starter-Fuel (Gas) Delay

P46 0 2 0Remote Control Mode Selection

0=Gas1=Diesel

0 Prevent running1 Run without load2 Run with load

2.0Time

P00 Mains Voltage Connection LevelP01 Mains Voltage Disconnection LevelP02 Mains Voltage Upper LimitP13 Mains Transition Delay

In Automatic mode, the unit uses these parameters to decide when to switch the load between the mains supply and the alternator – assuming the alternator is providing a satisfactory output.If the mains voltage is higher than the Upper Limit or lower than the Disconnection Level, the unit connects the load to the generator instead of to the mains.If the load is running on the mains and the mains voltage falls, the unit will switch the load to the generator when the mains voltage falls below the Disconnection Level. Conversely, if the mains voltage is low and the load is running on the generator, the unit will not restore the mains supply to the load until the mains voltage is between Connection Level and Mains Voltage Upper Limit for Mains Transition Delay (P13) value. This hysteresis prevents constant switching between mains and generator as the mains varies about the switching levels. Figure 5.1 shows how, in automatic mode, the load is transferred between mains and generator as the mains voltage varies over time.

P10 = Engine Cooling Time

P13 = Mains Transition DelayP23 = Mains Change Over Delay

P13 P13

2P

3

P3

2

P10

Mains Voltage Upper Limit

Connection Level

Disconnection Level

Mains Contactor

GeneratorContactor

Generator Available

Figure 5.1

Default Values

Time

2P

3

2P

3

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

YES

NO

29

5.1 Program Functions

5.1.1 Mains Voltage

30

While generator is running on-load and if mains is available, load is taken to the mains. Generator runs off-load during Engine Cooling Time (P10) to cool down before shut-down. (Figure 5.1)

If the battery voltage drops below the defined Battery Voltage Lower Limit (P22), an alarm occurs and “Low Battery Failure” LED illuminates.

Number of Starting Attempts (P09)Starting Attempt Duration (P28)

When the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND receives an Engine Start command, it energises the start solenoid to drive the starter motor and energises the Fuel solenoid (if selected – see Section 5.1.9 Stop/Fuel selection) Starting attempt duration (P28) defines the maximum period for the start solenoid output is being active if one of the Engine Started Signals is not received (Refer to 5.1.7). It makes a new attempt after a delay equal to twice the defined Starting attempt duration (P28). Number of starting attempts (P09), defines the number of unsuccessful tries that the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND will make before abandoning the attempts. If all these attempts fail, EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND will stop the starting attempts and start failure indication is displayed. Start failure can be reset with reset button.

P05 Speed Upper LimitP34 Speed Fault Control Delay

A fault will be reported if the alternator output frequency exceeds the upper limit for more than the time defined as the Speed Fault Control Delay (P34). The fault will only occur if the engine has been running for the period defined as the Control on Delay (P32). This failure immediately stops the generating set without engine cooling time.

P03 Alternator Voltage Lower LimitP04 Alternator Voltage Upper LimitP33 Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay

A fault will be reported if the alternator output voltage goes outside the window defined by the upper and lower limits for more than the time defined as the Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay (P33). The fault will only occur if the engine has been running for the period defined as the Control on Delay (P32). This failure immediately stops the generating set without Engine Cooling Time (P10)

5.1.2 Alternator Voltage

5.1.3 Alternator Frequency

5.1.4 Engine Cooling Time (P10)

5.1.5 Battery Voltage Lower Limit (P22)

5.1.6 Engine Starting

This parameter specifies the method by which the unit monitors generator speed. The choice is between alternator frequency and external magnetic pick-up. Speed is monitored so as to detect when the engine has started. See Sections 5.1.3 Alternator Frequency, 5.1.7 Engine started signals (P25) and 5.1.6 Engine Starting. Where alternator frequency is used, Nominal Alternator Frequency (P19) and Nominal Speed (P20) must be set correctlyWhere the magnetic pick-up is used, Nominal Alternator Frequency (P19), Nominal Speed (P20) and Tooth Number (P21) must be set correctly.

This parameter allows the use of either a Stop solenoid or a Fuel solenoid. (See Section 5.1.6 Engine Starting.)

If Fuel Solenoid selected, the fuel solenoid will be energised while the engine is running and de-energised to cut off the fuel and stop the engine. If Stop Solenoid selected, the stop solenoid is normally de-energised and only energised to stop the engine. The solenoid remains energised for the period defined as the Stop Magnet Energising Time (P25).

This parameter sets the period for which the Stop solenoid is energised to stop the engine. It applies only where parameter Stop / Fuel Solenoid Selection (P24) is set to Stop Solenoid.

This sets the delay before a Low Oil Pressure warning will be generated. The Low Oil Pressure fault indicator will light if the oil pressure switch contact remains opened, while the engine is running, after the period defined by parameter. This period begins when the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND has detected engine starting and has cut off the drive to the starter motor. This failure immediately stops the generating set, without Engine Cooling Time (P10).

If the unit detects that the engine is running, it will de-energise the start solenoid to disconnect the starter motor. Conversely, if the engine does not start after the starting attempt duration, the unit will turn off the starter motor and wait twice of the Starting Attempt Duration (P28) then start again.Hence, the unit must be able to detect when the engine has started. Four signals are available to provide engine running information, as follows:0. Charge Generator (P26.0 ); from charging generator energising coil current.1. Speed (P26.1); if engine speed is higher than Speed Limit for Crank Disconnection (P30), pay attention to the Speed Sensing Input Selection (P18) (Refer to 5.1.8)2. Alternator Voltage (P26.2); if alternator voltage is higher than Alternator Voltage Limit for Crank Disconneciton (P29)3. Oil Pressure (P26.3); it looks if oil pressure switch is closedIt is advisable to select at least two of them - preferably 1)Engine Speed and either 0)Charge Generator or 2) Alternator Voltage.If any of the selected signals appears, the unit assumes that the engine has started.

31

5.1.7 Engine Started Signals (P26)

5.1.8 Speed Sensing Input Selection (P18)

5.1.9 Stop / Fuel Solenoid Selection (P24)

5.1.10 Stop Magnet Energising Time (P25)

5.1.11 Oil Pressure By-Pass Time (P31)

32

P37 Normal / Fail safe Configuration of InputsP38 Configurable Input-1 OperationP39 Configurable Input-2 OperationP40 Configurable Input-1 Delay TimeP41 Configurable Input-2 Delay Time

Temperature, Pressure, Configurable Input-1, Configurable Input-2 and Over current failure inputs can be configured individually as a “normal” or “fail safe” input by Normal / Fail Safe Configuration of Inputs (P37) parameter. If the configurable input is normal, contact closure to input active,If the configurable input is fail safe, contact open to input active, On any of these inputs causes the horn to sound for the period programmed by Horn Duration (P12) and lights the appropriate indicator on the panel. The EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND can be configured to respond in any of eleven different ways to each one of these inputs. If the input is active, according to the parameter selection, the events that are listed below occurs:0. The unit changes over to AUTO mode1. The front panel is disabled2. The led continuously lights on with no flash3. Indication is unlatched - the LED flashes. This input has no effect if any other alarm condition is present.4. Indication is latched. The LED flashes while the horn is sounding and then stays on until the Failure Reset button is pressed.5. As 4 in addition, the engine is shut down.

Options 6...10 are effective only while the engine is running.6. As 27. As 38. As 49. As 510. As 8

The unit’s initial default mode is “OFF” when power is switched on. The default mode can be configured to “AUTO” by adjusting this parameter.

Z

During the initial period after the engine has been started, there can be fluctuations in engine speed and alternator output that could generate spurious fault indications. Control On Delay (P32) defines a period during which any fault indications, except High Temperature, will be ignored by the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND. Also, in the event of a mains failure, transfer of the load from mains to generator will be delayed until the end of the Control On Delay (P32) period. This period begins when the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND has detected engine starting and has cut off the drive to the starter motor.

5.1.12 Control On Delay (P32)

5.1.13 Configurable Inputs

5.1.14 “Power ON” Default Mode Configuration(P36)

33

When active, this output provides battery voltage (12 VZ or 24 VZ) and can be programmed in one of four different ways:

0. Alarm output. Active when any fault is reported until reset. It can be used for either audible or visual alert.

1. Engine running. Active while the engine is running2. Output is active after one second while the unit is in Test or Auto mode. Output is passive when the unit is Off or manual.3. Preheat function. On starting the output is active for time period defined in Preheat Time (P14) prior to running the starter motor.

.(P00) and Mains Voltage Disconnection Level (P01)

. (P28)

(P03) (P10)

.

.

.

.....

4 Load transfer permitted. This output is active while the alternator output voltage is between Mains Voltage Connection Level . This output can be used to control a contactor that transfers the load to the alternator once the generator set is up and running.5 Over speed shut-down output. The fault will only occur after the engine has been running for the period defined as the Starting Attempt Duration and Alternator Voltage Lower Limit

. This failure immediately stops the generating set, without Engine Cooling Time and activated this output.6 Over current alarm output. Active when over current fault is report.7 High temperature alarm output. Active when high temperature fault is reported.8 Low oil pressure alarm output. Active when low oil pressure fault is reported.9 Maintenance due alarm output. Active when maintenance due fault is reported.10 Failed to start alarm output. Active when failed to start fault is reported.11 Voltage failure alarm output. Active when voltage failure fault is reported.12 Charging fail alarm output. Active when charging fail fault is reported.13 Low battery voltage alarm output. Active when low battery voltage fault is reported.

P06 Periodic Maintenance Day Set ValueP07 Periodic Maintenance Hour Set ValueP08 Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

To ensure reliability, the generator must be serviced at regular intervals. The EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND can be set to indicate when a service is due. Set Periodic Maintenance Day Set Value (P06) to the number of running hours between services. Use Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value (P07) to reset the hours counter at each service. When the engine has run for the defined number of hours, the LED with exclamation mark will flash.The maintenance alarm is also triggered after a fixed time period P06 (90-365 days).

Use this option to change the Operator password. This password allows access to the parameters from Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) to Exercise Duration Time Period (P16) and Operator Password ( P47).

Use this option to change the Technician password. It allows access to the all parameters: from Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) to Technician Password (P48).

5.1.15 Configurable Output (P42)

5.1.16 Maintenance Indication

5.1.17 Operator Password (P47)

5.1.18 Technician Password (P48)

In automatic or test mode, when it is necessary to run the generator, generator starts to run after this time.

5.1.22 Motor Çalýþtýrma Geciktirmesi (P27)

Motor Fuel (Gas/Diesel) Selection (P44)Fuel-Starter (Diesel) / Starter-Fuel (Gas) Delay Time (P45)

If Gas is selected (P44=0), when generator starts to run, firstly start output active then after Fuel-Starter (Diesel) / Starter-Fuel (Gas) Delay Time (P45) solenoid output becomes active.If Diesel is selected (P44=1), when jenerator starts to run, firstly solenoid output active then after Fuel-Starter (Diesel) / Starter-Fuel (Gas) Delay Time (P45) start output becomes active.

5.1.23 Engine Fuel Selection and Fuel-Starter Delay Time

In Automatic mode, device can prevent to work the generator or work with load or without load with remote inhibit input. When remote inhibit input is active;

If the parameter is 0, then device prevents to work the generator even all the conditions are supplied.

If the parameter is 1, generator runs even the conditions are not supplied and generator does not take the load during mains voltage is okay.

If the parameter is 2, generator runs even the conditions are not supplied and take the load even mains voltage is okay.

If generator contactor changes over to disconnect the load from the generator and if the mains voltages are okay, mains contactor changes over to connect to load to the mains.

5.1.24 Remote Control Mode Selection (P46)

If the parameter is 0, if a failure occurs, horn output is active during Horn Duration (P12) or until the failures are removed.If the parameter is 1, horn output is active for 1 second and passive for 1 second during Horn Duration (P12) or till the failures are removed.

5.1.21 Horn Blink Selection (P11)

34

P15 Exercise TimeP16 Exercise Duration Time Period

This function allows the engine to be run automatically, without load, at fixed intervals, as specified by Exercise Time(P15). The engine runs for the number of minutes specified by Exercise Duration Time Period (P16). Exercising will only occur if the unit is set to Auto mode when exercising is due. To disable exercising, set Exercise Time (P15) to zero.

The contact output can be configured for Normally Open or Normally Closed contactors. Parameter value “0” (default) selects Normally Open, “1” selects Normally Closed.

5.1.19 Engine Exercise Function

5.1.20 Mains Contactor Control Selection (P43)

35

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Operation Screen When button is pressed, all leds and digits

are energised, because prog button is also used as

test button. Continue to press the prog buton for 5 seconds, Operator Menu Entering screen is shown

and prog led lights on.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

When button is pressed, operator

password entering screen is shown.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Operator Password Entering Screen


Change the password with and buttons

After entering the password, push the button for confirming the password and accessing to the first parameters of operator parameters.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Operator Menu Entering Screen

NOTE : If no operation is performed for 20 seconds, the device exits from the programming mode and turns to the main operation screen.

5.2 Changing and Saving Operator Parameter Value

36

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Mains Voltage Connection Level Value


Mains Voltage Connection Level Parameter

Mains Voltage Disconnection Level Parameter

Press button for accessing to the Value

Press button for saving the value and accessing to the Parameter

Change the parameter with and buttons


NOTE : Other operator paramaters can be accessed as explained forFor exiting from programming mode, press

37

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST





VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

When button is pressed for 10 seconds, technician menu entering screen is

shown.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Technician Password Entering Screen


After entering the password, press the button for confirming the password and accessing to the first parameters of technician parameters.



VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Technician Menu Entering Screen

When button is pressed, technician



5.3 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter Value

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST









NOTE : Other technician paramaters can be accessed as explained forFor exiting from programming mode, press

38

39

These commissioning checks may interfere with the power supply to the load. Therefore they should not be carried out with a mission-critical load connected to the system.

1. Check that the unit is correctly wired and that the wiring is of a standard and rating compatible with the system.2. Check that the correct fuses are fitted.

3. Be sure that the parameters are suitable for your system. Please refer to the Section 5 Parameters for details.

4. Take temporary steps to prevent the engine from starting ( for example, disable the fuel solenoid ).5. After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, connect the battery supply.6. On the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND, press the Man (20) button. The associated LED (11) should light.7. Press the Engine Start (19) button. The LED (10) should light.8. Check that the engine start sequence commences. The starter motor should run for the programmed time period (P28) for the pre-set (P09) number of times.9. Check that the Start Failure LED flashes and the LED (10) switches off.10. Check that the unit changes to the OFF mode and the LED (12) should light.11. Restore the engine to operational state (reconnect the fuel solenoid).12. Press the Man (20) button. The LED (11) should light.13. Press the Engine Start (19) button. The LED (10) should light.14. Check the start sequence, as follows: The starter motor runs

The engine startsThe starter motor disengages once the engine is running.

If not, check that the engine is fully operational (fuel available etc.) and check the wiring and programming of the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND. 15. Check that the engine runs up to it’s operating speed. If not and an alarm is present, check that the alarm is valid and then check the input wiring.16. Press the Engine Stop (18) button. At this moment the LED (9) should light. The engine should stop. Allow time for the engine to come to rest.

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit and is present.2. Check that the remote inhibit switch (if fitted) is set to disable (contact is open).3. At the EAOM-9F / EAOM-9F ND, press the Auto (23) button. The LED (14) on the button should light.4. Switch off the mains supply to the unit. Check that the generator starts and after a delay, the load is transferred to the generator5. Restore the mains supply to the unit. Check that, after a delay, the load is transferred back to the mains and the generator, after a further delay, shuts down.6. If a remote inhibit switch is fitted, set it to inhibit (contact is closed)7. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the generator does not start.8. Restore the mains supply and set the remote inhibit switch to disable.

c

6. COMMISSIONING

6.1 Manual Operation

6.2. Auto Operation

40

When button is pressed, all leds and digits are energised.

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit.2. Press the Test (22) button. The LED (13) should light.3. Check that the generator starts and that the load is still connected to the mains.4. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the contactors change over to connect the load to the generator. Check also that the Auto (14) LED is lit. The unit changes operating mode to AUTO Mode automatically.5. Restore the mains supply. Check that the contactors reconnect the load to the mains supply.6. Check that the generator shuts down with Engine Cooling Time (P10)


7. LAMP TEST

Number

The green LED indicates that the engine has started and is running.

2626

2525

1616 1717 1515 2424

88

33

1818 1919 2020

222223232121

1212 1414 1313

99 1010 1111

66 77

55

22

2828

11

2727

44

Comment

1

2

3

The LED indicates that the load is connected to the mains. The LED shows that the load is supplied from the generator.The red LED illuminates only when EAOM-9F / -9F ND is in programming mode.

5

4

678

9

10

11 This red LED shows that the unit is in the Manual mode. This red LED shows that the unit is in OFF mode. This red LED shows that the Unit is in TEST mode.

1213

This red LED shows that the Unit is in the AUTO mode. 14

15

16

17

41

18

19

8. OPERATION


The Stop button is used for stopping the engine when the unit is in theManual mode.

Prog/Lamp Test.. Lights all the LEDs and segments on the panel so that you can see if any are not working. Holding the button pressed for five seconds puts the unit into Programming mode and LED (8) illuminates

This button opens the mains contactor only operative when manual mode is selected

Multi Function Display. This is used for displaying the electrical measurements during normal operation and editing / inspecting programming parameters in programming mode.

The Display Scroll Button is used for rotating between measurement screen in normal operation and between programming parameters in programming mode.

The AUTO button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the Auto mode The TEST button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the Test mode

The MAN button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the Manual mode The OFF button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the Off mode

Number Comment20212223

24

25

Failure Indicators. Detailed information available in Section 926

27

28

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

Four-digit, seven-segment LED display, with annunciators to indicate the parameter being displayed. Use the scroll button to select the desired parameter. The button selects the

parameters in sequence, as follows. Note that line to line voltage readings are prefixed by L while

line to neutral readings are prefixed by n

• Mains voltage L1-L2, prefix L

• Mains voltage L1-N, prefix n




• Mains voltage L3-N, prefix n• UV - Alternator voltage L1• Frequency (Hz)

• Battery voltage ( VZ)• Timers

Engine running time, in hours (since last reset). This is a six digit number, the first three digits are prefixed H (high) and the second three digits are prefixed L (low). Automatic exercise timer. Elapsed waiting time (hours) to the next exercise is prefixed E The exercise running time (minutes) is prefixed r• The Alarm horn LED will flash continually if the unit detects at least one of the faults listed below. When the Display Select button is pressed so as to select this option, the display will show the cause of the fault indication. If more than one error condition is present, repeated pressing of the button will show each in turn.

Possible error messages are:EStP – Emergency S t opbAT1 – Low Battery Voltage AlarmServ – Routine Maintenance due info

8.2 Display Mode Indicators

This button opens the alternator contactor only when manual mode is selected

42

The mode can be changed at any time. A change in mode will not effect the current state of the generator or load connection. For example; if the unit is in Auto mode with the generator running and the load running on the generator, changing the mode to Manual will not effect the operating state. Any changes between Auto, Manual and Test modes will not change the operating state.

43

8.3 Mode Transition

1. Press the Man (20) button. The LED (11) will switch on.2. Press the Engine Start (19) button on the panel. The LED (10) will switch on. The engine should start. The sequence is as follows:! The starter motor runs! The engine startsOnce the engine is running,! The LED (3) “Engine Running” illuminates.! The “Alternator Ready” LED (2) switches on after “Control on Delay (P30)” time period.! The generator will not supply the load unless the “Generator Ready” LED (2) is illuminated (The contactor open / close button does not work)3. Once both LEDs have illuminated, press the Mains Contactor Button (27) to disconnect the load from the mains supply LED (6) should go off.4. Press the Generator Contactor Button (5) to connect the load to the generator supply. LED (7) should light.

When the “Engine Stop” (18) button is pressed, the LED (9) is illuminated and engine is stopped When the “Engine Stop” button is pressed while the load is connected to the alternator output (generator output), the alternator contactor is released then the engine is stopped.

Press the Auto (23) button to select Auto mode. The LED (14) in the corner of the button will light to indicate this mode has been selected. In the event of a mains voltage failure, the unit will start up the generator and, once the generator is running and generator is available to take the load, will transfer the load to the generator. When the mains is restored and stable, it will transfer the load back to the mains and, after Engine Cooling Time (P10) shut down the generator.

Note that if 0 VZ in Remote Inhibit (Pin19), it will inhibit engine running.

Press the Test (22) button to select Test mode. The LED (13) will switch on. This mode allows for testing of the generator off load. All alarm circuits will operate so that any faults will be reported. If a mains failure occurs while the unit is in Test mode, the unit will revert to Auto mode and will switch the load to the generator.

8.4 Manual Start

8.5 Manual Stop

8.6 Auto Operation

8.7 Test Operation

The unit incorporates facilities for exercising the engine on a regular basis. If the unit is in Auto mode, after an interval (hours) determined by Exercise Time (P14), the unit will go into Test mode and start up the engine. The system will run in Test mode, without transferring the load to the alternator, for the period (minutes) determined by Exercise Duration Time Period (P15). At the end of this period, the unit will revert to Auto mode, shut down the engine and reset the exercise interval timer. If the unit is not in Auto mode at that time, the unit will restart the exercise interval timer without having exercised the engine. If the mains fails while the engine is being exercised, the unit will revert to Auto mode and transfer the load to the alternator. If the user changes the mode, the engine exercise will be abandoned and the unit will respond according to the mode selected and the current state of the mains supply.

8.8 Engine Exercising

Indicators on the central section of the panel will flash if a fault is detected. Fault conditions latch so that further operation is prevented. If a failure is indicated, proceed as follows:

1. Change the unit in to MAN mode and stop the generator2. Find and fix the fault.3. Press the Failure Reset (16) button to enable a restart.4. Select the required mode of operation – Manual, Auto or Test.

This LED flashes if the engine has not started after the programmed Number of Starting Attempts (P09). The unit must be reset, by pressing the Failure Reset (16) button, before a fresh attempt can be made.

This LED flashes if the thermostatic switch on the engine indicates high temperature. If this fault occurs, the EAOM-9F will stop the engine without any Engine Cooling Time (P10).

This LED flashes if the Oil Pressure Switch on the engine indicates low oil pressure while the engine is running. To obtain this indication, the engine must have been running for at least the period specified by the Oil Pressure By-Pass Time (P31). If this fault occurs, the EAOM-9F will stop the engine without any Engine Cooling Period (P10).

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P32) time. This LED flashes if the field current for the battery charge generator fails to fall to zero after the engine has started. This failure will not stop the generating set.

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P32) time. This LED flashes if the alternator speed goes above the Speed Upper Limit (P05). For a fault to be indicated, the speed must be over this limit for longer than the period defined by the Speed Fault Control Delay (P34).Alternator speed is measured either by measuring alternator output frequency or by monitoring an external magnetic pick-up, as selected by Speed Sensing Input Selection (P18). This failure immediately stops the generating set, without any Engine Cooling Time (P10) period.

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P32) time. This LED flashes if the alternator output voltage is outside of the limits programmed into Alternator Voltage Lower Limit (P03), and Alternator Voltage Upper Limit (P04), for a time period longer than the Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay (P33). This failure immediately releases the generator contactor, and stops the generating set without any Engine Cooling Time (P10) period.

44

9. FAULT FINDING

9.1 Fault indications

9.1.1 Failed to Start LED

9.1.2 High Temperature LED

9.1.3 Low Oil Pressure LED

9.1.4 Charge Generator Failure LED

9.1.5 Over Speed LED

9.1.6 Generator Voltage Failure LED

The remote Emergency Stop button has been pressed and has shut down the engine. After fixing the fault press Failure Reset (16) to remove the indication and restore EAOM-9F operation. This failure is indicated with Led in EAOM-9F ND and as error messages in EAOM-9F. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9F the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button .

The LED switches on when the battery voltage falls below the value specified by the Battery Voltage Lower Limit (P21) EAOM-9F measures battery voltage at the EAOM-9F terminals. This failure is indicated with Led in EAOM-9F ND and as error messages in EAOM-9F. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9F, the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button .

The interval (hours run) between routine maintenance, set by Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value (P07), has expired. On completion of the required engine maintenance, reset the maintenance timer using Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset (P08). This failure is indicated with Led in EAOM-9F ND and as error messages in EAOM-9F. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9F, the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button . This failure is not stopped the generating set. If the failure is cleared with the reset button, hours run is cleared by the EAOM-9F.

If the inputs are configured to be controlled after the engine starts to run. This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P32) time.These LEDs indicate the status of the Configurable Input-1 (Pins 18) and Configurable Input-2 (Pin 17), and the controller can be programmed to perform various functions when these inputs become active.

45

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P32) time. The unit monitors an external Over Current relay (Pin 21) when the Generator is running and the Load is on the Generator. If the input becomes active at any time,this LED flashes and the generator contactor is released, but the engine continues to run.

9.1.7 Over Current LED

9.1.8 Configurable Input-1 and 2 LED

9.1.9 EAOM-9FEmergency Stop Message LED ( ND only)

9.1.10 EAOM-9FLow Battery Voltage Message LED ( ND only)

9.1.11 EAOM-9FMaintenance Time Message LED ( ND only)

Symptom

Check all the wiring of the unit. Check the Z supply. (measure voltage between pins 14 and 13)

Check the Z fuse.

Check engine oil level and pressure.

Check oil pressure switch and wiring.

Check engine temperature and cooling systems. Check switch and wiring.

Check fuel solenoid and wiring, fuel and battery.Reset the EAOM-9F and restart the engine.

Check solenoid transistor output activated, (Fuel Solenoid if selected)

Check the signals that the EAOM-9F is using to determine if theengine has started. Refer to the engine manual.

Check wiring to starter solenoid. Check battery supply.Check battery supply is present on the Start output (Pin12) of theEAOM-9F.

Low oil pressure fault

after engine has

Unit is inoperative.

High engine Temperature.Fault after

Failed to Start fault.Engine failed to Start

Starter motor

Isolate the equipment from the electricity supply during mechanical and electrical maintenance. When this is not possible, the equipment must be in the “OFF” position.c

after Pre-set Number

Started.

engine has started.

Of Attempts.

Inoperative.

Possible Remedy

46

P18

P12

No

P02

P03P04P05P06

P07

P09

P13

P14

P16P17

0=Alternator

Pick-upP19P20P21P22P23P24P25

Engine started signal

P26.0 P26

P26.2 P26.3

0=No, 1=Yes

P15

P10

P28

Alternator voltage limit for crank disconnection P30

P31P32P33P34

Enter technician password

P36

P29

P35

P00

P01

600

6060

6060

600600

600600

30.0 75.090 365

0000 9999

VV

VVVV

VVVV

60

HzDay

Hour

1 10 Number0 99 Minute

0 999 Second0 30 Minute

0 99 Second0 999 Hour

0 999 Minute

500 5000 Rpm1 1000 Number

7.2 24.0 VZ0.1 25.0 Second

0 99 Second

5 99 Second

40 360 VV20.0 45.0 Hz

0 99 Second0 99 Second


0/1

0/10/10/1


P26.1

50.0/60.0 Hz

1/3

Stop / Fuel

0=Off,1=Auto NumberNormal / Fail safe configuration of inputsP37 310 Number

Min User Def.Value UnitDefinition of Parameter Max

Mains Voltage Connection LevelMains Voltage Disconnection LevelMains Voltage Upper Limit

Alternator Voltage Lower Limit Alternator Voltage Upper Limit Speed Upper Limit Periodic Maintenance Day Set Value

Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value Press ‘Silence Alarm’ button

Number of Starting AttemptsEngine Cooling Time(0 disable cool process)

Horn Duration (0 Continuous) Mains Transition Delay

Preheat Time Exercise Time (0 Disable)

Exercise Duration Time Period Single / Three Phase Selection




Speed Limit for Crank Disconnection

Oil Pressure By-Pass TimeControl on DelayAlternator Voltage Fault Control DelaySpeed Fault Control Delay


“Power ON” default mode configuration

1 = Magnetic(Internal)

Signal

to reset time to “0” (zero)

to resetP08 Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

10. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS

P11 0=None, 1=ExistsHorn Blink Selection

0.0 25.0 SecondP27

47

Engine Starting Delay

No

P42 13 Number0


Configurable Output

P43 Mains Contactor Selection

Operator Password (P00...P15 and P47)Technician Password (P00...P48)

0000 99900000 9990

Number

NumberNumber

P47P48

48

0=Mains contactoris NO

1=Mains contactoris NC

Configurable input-1 operationP38Configurable input-2 operationP39

P40P41

0 10 Number0 10 Number0 10 Second0 10 Second

Configurable input-1 delay time Configurable input-2 delay time

P44 Motor Fuel (Gas/Diesel) Selection

P45 0.0 25.0Fuel-Starter (Diesel)/Starter-Fuel (Gas)

P46 0 2Remote Control Mode Selection

0=Gas1=Diesel

0 Prevent running1 Run without load2 Run with load

Delay Time

Equipment Use : Electrical control equipment for generating setsHousing& Mounting : 144 mm x 204 mm x 37 mm (including connectors) plastic housing for panel mountingPanel Cut-Out : 138 mm x 186 mmProtection : NEMA 4X (IP65 at front panel, IP20 at rear side).Weight : Approximately 0.45 Kg.Environmental Ratings : Standard, indoor at an altitude of less than 2000 meters with

non-condensing humidity.o o o oOperating/Storage Temperature : -25 C to +70 C / -40 C to +85 C

Installation Overvoltage Category : II Appliances, portable equipmentPollution Degree : II, normal office or workplace, none conductive pollutionMode of Operation : ContinuousEMC : EN-61000-6-4, EMC generic emission standard for industrial

equipment EN-61000-6-2, EMC generic immunity standard for industrial equipment

Electrical Safety : EN-61010-1, safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

Supply Voltage : 8-32 VZ

Supply Voltage Measurement : 8-32 VZ. Accuracy : 1%, Resolution : 0.1VZ

Mains Voltage Measurement : Three phase, 4 wire 35 to 300 VL-N V Accuracy : 1%FS,

Resolution : 1VV

Generator Voltage Measurement : Single phase, 2 wire 35 to 300 VL-N V Accuracy : 1%FS,

Resolution : 1VVMeasurement Accuracy : 1% of the range

Cranking Dropouts : Battery voltage can be 0 VZ for max. 100msec during cranking (battery voltage should be at least nominal voltage before cranking)

Generator Speed Measurement : From alternator or magnetic pickup

Alternator Frequency Range :10-110 Hz. (@35-300 VL-NZ)Magnetic Pickup Freq. Range : 3 5 Hz - 10 kHz (@3-35 Volts peak)

Charge Generator Excitation :12 VZ or 24 VZ, 200 mA, max 3WCommunication Interface : RS-232 serial communicationContact Sensing Input : Emergency stop (NC), Oil pressure switch, Temperature switch,

Remote inhibit input (NO), Configurable input 1, Configurable input 2, Over current input

Outputs : Start, Fuel, Horn, Configurable Output, Mains Contactor Output, Generator Contactor Output(All outputs are 500mA Transistor Output)

Display (4-digit, 7-segment LED display) : Mains L1 – L2 Voltage, Mains L1 – N Voltage, Mains L2 – L3 Voltage, Mains L2 – N Voltage, Mains L3 – L1 Voltage, Mains L3 – N Voltage, Alternator Voltage, Alternator Frequency, Engine Speed, Battery voltage, Engine running time, Error indication, Program Parameters (Only EAOM-9F)

Failure Indicators : Failed to start, High temperature, Low oil pressure, Over speed, Generator voltage failure, Charge failure, Over current, Configurable

input 1, Configurable input 2, Low battery voltage (observed with led in EAOM-9F ND, failure message in EAOM-9F), Maintenance due (observed with led in EAOM-9F ND, failure message in EAOM-9F) Emergency stop (observed with led in EAOM-9F ND, failure message in EAOM-9F)

Status Indicators :Off mode, Auto mode, Test mode, Manual mode, Engine start, Engine stop, Engine running, Mains voltage available, Generator is

ready to take the load, Mains contactor, Generator contactorInformation Alarms : Low battery voltage (EAOM-9F), Maintenance due (EAOM-9F),

Emergency stop (EAOM-9F)Approvals : GOST-R,

49

11. SPECIFICATIONS

EA

OM

-9 A

uto

ma

tic

Tra

ns

fer

Sw

itc

h C

on

tro

lle

r w

ith

Me

teri

ng

, 9

6x

96

DIN

Siz

e

- Protection, control and metering- Automatic engine start/stop and load transfer- Automatic shutdown on fault condition- LED status and fault indication- Simple push-button controlled operation- Manual, automatic and test mode control- Two user-configurable inputs- One user-configurable output- Fully programmable- RS-232 communication port- Standard modem communication

- MonitorsMains voltages (Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral)Alternator voltage and frequencyBattery voltageEngine running timeExercise time

- ControlsEngine fuel supply or engine stopping Load transfer to mainsStarter motor PreheatAutomatic generator start External alarm hornLoad transfer on mains failure

- Fail MonitoringEngine start Engine temperatureMains voltage Oil pressureAlternator voltage and frequency Emergency stopEngine speed Low battery voltageCharging generator Scheduled maintenance due

- Programming using the buttons and display on the front panel or RS-232 communication port, using PC based software.

Instruction Manual. ENG EAOM-9 02 V00 07/07

EAOM-9Automatic Transfer Switch Controller with

Metering, 96x96 DIN Size

2

Instruction manual of EAOM-9 consists of two main sections. Explanation of these sections are below. Also, there is another section which include technical specifications of the device. All titles and page numbers in instruction manual are in “CONTENTS” section. User can reach to any title with section number.

Installation:

In this section, physical dimensions of the device, panel mounting, electrical wiring, module mounting to the device, physical and electrical installation of the device to the system are explained.


In this section, user interface of the device, how to access to the parameters, description of the parameters are explained.

Also in these sections, there are warnings to prevent serious injury while doing the physical and electrical mounting or using the device.


This symbol is used to determine the dangerous situations as a result of an electric shock. User must pay attention to these warnings definitely.a

c This symbol is used for safety warnings. User must pay attention to these warnings.

This symbol is used to determine the important notes about functions and usage of the device.


i

This symbol is used for VDC

This symbol is used for VAC

Z

V

3

CONTENTS

Page 6

Page 14

Page 9

Page 18

Page 25

1.PREFACE............................................................................................................................................1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS1.2 WARRANTY1.3 MAINTENANCE

2.INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION2.2 DIMENSIONS2.3 PANEL CUT-OUT2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS2.5 PANEL MOUNTING2.6 INSTALLATION FIXING SCREWS2.7 REMOVING FROM THE PANEL

3.ELECTRICAL WIRINGS......................................................................................................................3.1 TERMINAL LAYOUT AND CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAM3.2.1 SINGLE PHASE WIRING DIAGRAM3.2.2 THREE PHASE WIRING DIAGRAM

4.3 PC INTERFACE4.3.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS4.3.2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS4.3.2.1 MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS4.3.3 INSTALLING EAOM-9 SOFTWARE4.3.4 USING OF EAOM-9 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE4.3.5 DESCRIPTION4.3.6 OBSERVATION WINDOW 4.3.7 OPERATOR PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.8 TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.9 MAIN MENU4.3.9.1 FILE4.3.9.2 PROGRAMMING 4.3.9.3 SETTINGS4.3.10 ENTERING TO THE OPERATOR PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.11 ENTERING TO THE TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS WINDOW4.3.12 ENTERING TO THE ADJUSTMENT WINDOW4.3.13 LOAD THE CONFIGURATION FILE FROM THE DISC4.3.14 SAVE THE CONFIGURATION FILE TO THE DISC 4.3.15 UPLOAD4.3.16 DOWNLOAD

5.PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................................................

5.1.14 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 5.1.15 MAINTENANCE INDICATION

5.1.16 ENGINE EXERCISE 5.1.17 OPERATOR PASSWORD 5.1.18 TECHNICIAN PASSWORD

4.RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE, PROGRAMMING THE DEVICE OVER PC OR MODEM...................4.1 CABLE CONNECTION BETWEEN RS-232 TERMINAL OF THE DEVICE AND PC4.2 CABLE CONNECTION BETWEEN RS-232 TERMINAL OF THE DEVICE AND MODEM

5.1. PROGRAM FUNCTIONS 5.1.1 MAINS VOLTAGE 5.1.2 ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE 5.1.3 ALTERNATOR FREQUENCY 5.1.4 ENGINE COOLING TIME 5.1.5 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOWER LIMIT 5.1.6 ENGINE STARTING 5.1.7 ENGINE STARTED SIGNALS 5.1.8 SPEED SENSING INPUT SELECTION 5.1.9 STOP / FUEL SOLENOID SELECTION 5.1.10 STOP MAGNET ENERGISING TIME 5.1.11 OIL PRESSURE BY-PASS TIME 5.1.12 CONTROL ON DELAY 5.1.13 CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

5.2 CHANGING and SAVING OPERATOR PARAMETER VALUE 5.3 CHANGING and SAVING TECHNICIAN PARAMETER VALUE

9. FAULT FINDING.................................................................................................................................

10.PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS..................................................................................................

11.SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................................................................................

6. COMMISSIONING.............................................................................................................................. 6.1 MANUAL MODE OPERATION 6.2 AUTO MODE OPERATION 6.3 TEST MODE OPERATION

7. LAMP TEST.........................................................................................................................................

8. OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................8.1 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION

8.2 DISPLAY MODE INDICATORS 8.3 MODE TRANSITION

8.4 MANUAL START8.5 MANUAL STOP8.6 AUTO OPERATION8.7 TEST OPERATION8.8 ENGINE EXERCISING

9.1 FAULT INDICATIONS 9.1.1 FAILED TO START LED 9.1.2 HIGH TEMPERATURE LED 9.1.3 LOW OIL PRESSURE LED 9.1.4 CHARGE GENERATOR FAILURE LED 9.1.5 OVER SPEED LED 9.1.6 GENERATOR VOLTAGE FAILURE LED 9.1.7 OVER CURRENT LED 9.1.8 CONFIGURABLE INPUT-1 AND 2 LED 9.1.9 EMERGENCY STOP MESSAGE LED 9.1.10 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE MESSAGE LED 9.1.11 MAINTENANCE TIME MESSAGE LED

4

Page 36

Page 42

Page 46

Page 37

Page 38

Page 45

5

Manufacturer Company Name : Emko Elektronik A.S.

Manufacturer Company Address: DOSAB, Karanfil Sokak, No:6, 16369 Bursa, Turkiye


Product Name :

Model Number :

Type Number : EAOM-9



Electrical control equipment for generating sets

EAOM-9

EMC : BS EN 50081-2, EMC Generic Emission Standard for industrial equipment

BS EN 50082-2, EMC Generic Immunity Standard for industrial equipment

Electrical Safety : EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use


1. PREFACE

6

The EAOM-9 provides for automatic transfer of a load from mains to generator in the event of a mains supply failure. Intended for unattended operation, it is able to detect failure of any phase of the mains and to start and switch over to a generator if the mains voltage goes outside pre-set limits. Both automatic and manual control is possible. A test mode is also available which allows the generator to be run without taking the load. The unit monitors generator operation and gives warning of any faults that are detected, by LED indicators. The unit monitors:Engine start

It controls:

EAOM-9 features a four-digit, seven-segment LED display, providing extensive monitoring of unit and generator parameters, including:

The unit is extensively programmable through the front panel, with password protection on two levels. Operational parameters can also be monitored and controlled from a PC via a built-in RS-232 port.If the engine fails to start on the first attempt, further attempts are made up to a programmed number of times or until successful.If a fault is detected, the unit shuts down the engine and indicates the failure by flashing a relevant fault LED.Emergency stop and remote inhibit inputs provide for remote control of the engine.Configurable inputs can be programmed to perform many functions, such as warning alarms, stopping the engine or disconnecting the load. A configurable output can be programmed for various functions, including alarms, operation as a pre-heat output, indication of engine running status and indication that the product is in Automatic mode.The unit can be programmed using the buttons and display on the front panel. Refer to Section 5 Parameters for details. Alternatively, the unit can be programmed via the RS-232 communication port, using PC based software.

Mains voltageAlternator voltage and frequencyEngine speedCharging generatorEngine temperatureOil pressureEmergency stopLow battery voltageScheduled maintenance due

Engine fuel supply or engine stoppingStarter motorAutomatic generator startLoad transfer on mains failureLoad transfer to mainsPreheatExternal alarm horn

Mains voltages (Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral)Alternator voltage and frequencyBattery voltageEngine running timeExercise timeError IndicationProgram Parameters

EAOM-9 can communicate with this software over modem.


7

+BATTERY

NMAINS L1MAINS L2MAINS L3

GEN. L1

N


MAINS&


&CONDITIONING

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMGENERATOR

VOLTAGE

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMMAGNETIC

PICK-UP

FAILURE&

CONTROLINPUTS

PUSHBUTTONS

MAGNETICPICK-UP

ANALOGTO

DIGITALCONVERTER

COUNTER&

TIMER

MICROCONTROLLERTRANSISTOR

OUTPUTS

RS-232COMM.

POWERSUPPLY

FAILURE &STATUS

INDICATORS

8

1.2 Warranty


1.3 Maintenance

Repairs should only be performed by trained and specialized personnel. Cut power to the device before accessing internal parts.Do not clean the case with hydrocarbon-based solvents (Petrol, Trichlorethylene etc.). Use of these solvents can reduce the mechanical reliability of the device. Use a cloth dampened in ethyl alcohol or water to clean the external plastic case.

9

Carefully unpack the unit and check for damage to the unit or to the cables supplied. Retain the packing in case of future need, e.g. returning the unit for calibration.Check the contents, as follows:• One EAOM-9 unit.• Operating Manual.• Screw fixings.• RS-232 Cable.

Before commencing installation:• Disconnect all electrical power to the machine.• Make sure the machine cannot operate during installation.• Follow all of the machine manufacturers' safety warnings.• Read and follow all installation instructions.

Report any shortage or damage to your local sales office as soon as possible.






During the equipment is putted in hole on the metal panel while mechanical installation some metal burrs can cause injury on hands, you must be careful.Montage of the product on a system must be done with it’s own fixing screws. Do not do the montage of the device with inappropriate fixing screws. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.It is your responsibility if this equipment is used in a manner not specified in this instruction manual.


2. INSTALLATION

c

9

10


2.2 Dimensions

Front PanelIP65 protection

NEMA4X

96m

m

96mm

106mm9mm 13mm

2.3 Panel Cut-Out

92

mm

92mm

Mounting holes

11

Operating Temperature : -25°C to 70°C

Max. Operating Humidity : 90% Rh (non-condensing)





c

12

The unit is designed for panel mounting.

1. Insert the unit in the panel cut-out from the front side.2. Insert the fixings through the mounting holes and tighten the fixing screws to secure the unit against the panel.

Fixing is done by two screw fixings

2.6 Installation Fixing Screws

Montage of the unit to a system must be done with it’s own fixing screws. Do not do the montage of the device with inappropriate fixing screws. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.

During mechanical installation, beware of any sharp burrs on the metal panel aperture. Ensure that the fixings are properly tightened to prevent the fixings becoming loose due to panel vibration.c


1. If fixing parts are on the unit firstly unscrew the fixing screws in the fixings parts to remove the fixings parts.

3. Insert the fixings parts in the slotted that is located on the right and left sides of the unit and tighten the fixing screws to secure the unit against the panel.

2. Insert the unit in the panel cut-out from the front. Maximum panel thickness is 7mm (0.28 inch)

2.5 Panel Mounting

c

Fixing part Fixing screw

1

2

33

13


1. Loosen the screws on the fixing parts on the left and right side of the device.2. Pull the fixing parts through the 2nd direction3. Take off the fixing parts.4. Pull the unit through the front side of the panel

Before starting to remove the unit from panel, power off the unit and the related system.c

1

4

23


14

While installing the unit, battery voltage range must be controlled and appropriate battery voltage must be applied to the unit. Controlling prevents damages in unit and system and possible accidents as a result of incorrect battery voltage.

Switch on the battery voltage only after that all the electrical connections have been completed.

External fuse is recommended.In case of failure it is suggested to return the instrument to the manufacturer for repair.You must ensure that the device is correctly configured for your application. Incorrect

configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled, and/or personal injury. It is your responsibility, as the installer, to ensure that the configuration is correct. Device parameters has factory default values. These parameters must be set according to the system’s needs. There is severe danger for human life in the case of unauthorized intervention.

Only qualified personnel and trained technicians should work on this equipment. Do not open

or dismantle the product enclosure.

This equipment contains internal circuits with voltage dangerous to human life. c

D+

(W.L

.)

CH

AR

GE

GE

N.

a

c

LO

W O

IL P

RE

S.

HIG

H T

EM

P.

HIG

H C

UR

RE

NT

E.S

TO

P

RE

M. IN

HIB

IT

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T1

CO

NF.

IN

PU

T2

Magnetic Pickup

(Max.10kHz)

MAINS VOLTAGE

MAXIMUM ~300V (Ph-N)

GEN.VOL.

MA

INS

CO

NTA

CT

OR

GE

NE

RA

TO

RC

ON

TA

CT

OR

CO

NF

IG.O

UT

HO

RN

SO

LE

NO

ID

+B

AT

STA

RT

BATTERY VOLTAGE

12VZ(8-16VZ)

24VZ(16-32VZ)

3. ELECTRICAL WIRINGS

All rear connectors are two-part removable and can be unplugged to facilitate fast and convenient connection. If remote start operation is required, the installer should ensure sufficient visual and audible warning takes place before commanding the start sequence. FUSE-1, FUSE-3, FUSE-4, FUSE-5 and FUSE-6 should be 1 A. TFUSE-2 should meet the current required by solenoids (Max. 16A. T). FUSE-7, FUSE-8 should be max 5A. T.

1- Connect the unit as shown in the appropriate diagram above. Be sure to connect the battery supply the right way round and battery negative should be grounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit to facilitate connection.2- Screened cable must be used for connecting the Magnetic Pickup, ensuring that the screen is grounded at one end ONLY.

c

3.2 Electrical Wiring Diagram

3.2.1 Single Phase Wiring Schematic

3.2.2 Three Phase Wiring Schematic

MAINS VOLTAGE

5A

FU

SE

-4

a

-BA

T

+B

AT

FU

SE

-1

FU

SE

-2

BA

TT

ER

Y

STARTER

40

A


c1

c1

+

N

L1

L2

L3

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

AT

UR

E

OV

ER

CU

RR

EN

T

E.S

TO

P

RE

MO

TE

IN

HIB

IT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T-1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T-2

MA

GN

ET

IC P

ICK

-UP

CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E O

UT

PU

T

HO

RN

SG

N

GN

D

MA

INS

RE

LA

Y a

10

A

10

A

STA

RT

RE

LA

Y

FU

EL

/S

TO

PR

EL

AY

CHARGEGEN D+(W.L.)

B+

40

A

5A

5A

10

A

c2

FU

SE

-3

N

L1

L2

L3

FU

SE

-5

FU

SE

-6

LOAD

E ct ic te lole r al in r ck

inMechanical terlock

M G

16 15 14 13 2 1 3 4 18 17

GE

NR

EL

AY

GENERATORVOLTAGE

5628272625242322212019789101112

MAINS VOLTAGE

5A

FU

SE

-4

a

-BA

T

+B

AT

FU

SE

-1

FU

SE

-2

BA

TT

ER

Y

STARTER

40

A


c1

c1

+

N

L

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

AT

UR

E

OV

ER

CU

RR

EN

T

E.S

TO

P

RE

MO

TE

IN

HIB

IT

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T-1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T-2

MA

GN

ET

IC P

ICK

-UP

CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E O

UT

PU

T

HO

RN

SG

N

GN

D

MA

INS

RE

LA

Y a

10

A

10

A

STA

RT

RE

LA

Y

FU

EL

/S

TO

PR

EL

AY

CHARGEGEN D+(W.L.)

B+

40

A

5A

5A

10

A

c2

FU

SE

-3

N

L

LOAD

ct ic te loEle r al in r ck

M ch ical in erloe an t ck

M G

16 15 14 13 2 1 3 4 18 17

GE

NR

EL

AY

GENERATORVOLTAGE

5628272625242322212019789101112

15

FU

SE

-7

FU

SE

-8

FU

SE

-7

FU

SE

-8


Mains contactor control

Description Cable Size Notes

Alternator contactor control

Table 3.1 shows the connections and recommended cable sizes. Table 3.2 describes the functions of the connections.

Pin

1,23,45 Configurable output6 Output to horn7 Output to fuel/stop solenoid8 Output to start relay9 Positive battery supply input10 Positive battery supply input11 Negative battery supply to input12 Negative battery supply to input13 Mains neutral connection14 Mains L1 voltage input15 Mains L2 voltage input16 Mains L3 voltage input17 Alternator neutral connection18 Alternator L1 voltage input19 Input from charge generator20 Input from Low Oil Pressure switch21 Input from High Temperature switch22 Input from over-current sensor23 Emergency stop input24 Input from Remote Inhibit switch25 Input from Spare-1 switch26 Input from Spare-2 switch27 Input from Magnetic pickup28 Input from Magnetic pickup

2.5 Volt-free on/off contact2.5 Volt-free on/off contact1.0 Max. 5A@24 VZ2.5 Max. 10A@24 VZ

(mm)

2.5 Max. 10A@24 VZ 2.5 Max. 10A@24 VZ2.5 For relay outputs1.02.52.51.01.0

3-phase only1.03-phase only1.0

1.0

1.01.0

0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NC)

0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NO)0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NO)

0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NC)0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NO)0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NO)0.5 Switch to 0 VZ(NO)

16


Pin FunctionMains contactor. Volt-free relay contact. Closed to select mains.

17

1,2Alternator contactor. Volt-free relay contact. Closed to select Alternator.3,4Configurable output can be programmed to provide contact closure when: alarm 5occurs, engine is running, unit is ready for automatic operation or preheat function.Output to horn.6Output to Fuel/Stop solenoid. Controls fuel to engine or controls engine stopping.7Output to Start relay. Controls starter motor.8Battery positive input.+12 VZ or +24 VZ. Feeds relay outputs.9Positive battery input +12 VZ or +24 VZ.10Negative battery input (0 VZ)11Negative battery input (0 VZ)12Mains neutral connection.13L114

1516

L2L3

Mains input. Used to detect mains failure for controlling automatic transfer ofload to alternator pins 15 and 16 not used on single phase applications.

Alternator neutral connection.17Input from alternator L1. Unit can be programmed to use frequency of alternator

18output to detect when engine has started.

19

Input from Low Oil Pressure switch. The oil pressure switch must be the type that 20

closes when oil pressure is normal and opens on low oil pressure (failure conditionor engine stopped) Input from High Temperature switch. Switched to 0V when engine temperature

21exceeds thermostat setting.Over current input. Normally open contact. Closed on over current. On over current,

22unit de-activates Alternator contactor to remove load. Engine is not shut down.Emergency Stop. Normally closed contact. Open circuit to stop engine.23Input from Remote Inhibit switch. Normally open contact – allows normal Automatic 24mode operation. Close to 0V to inhibit automatic load transfer on mains failure.Spare 1 input. Normally open. When switched to 0V, sounds the horn and flashes 25indicator on panel. Can be programmed to stop the engine or de-energise the alternator contactor.Spare 2 input. Normally open. When switched to 0V, sounds the horn and flashes 26indicator on panel. Can be programmed to stop the engine or de-energise the alternator contactor.Input from magnetic pickup. Unit can be programmed to read engine speed from 27,28magnetic pick-up and detect to engine has started.

Charge generator failure input. It can be used to detect when engine has started. The EAOM-9 connection replaces the usual charge indicator lamp. It supplies current to the rotor coil from the battery until the engine is running.

18

4.RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE, PROGRAMMING THE DEVICE OVER PC OR MODEM

4.1 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and PC


EAOM-9

Standard communication cable


EAOM-9

MODEM communication cable

Green

Yellow

White

Brown

Brown

White

Green

Note: For 9600 baud rate, cable length must be maximum 10 meters.

PC

MODEM



4.2 Cable Connection Between RS-232 Terminal of the Device and Modem

19

The PC interface kit comprises of a 9 pin D connector/FCC68(4 pin) connection lead with 2 meters of cable and the optional PC Software (Supplied on CD-ROM)

RS-232 non-isolated Serial interface9600 Baud Rate8 data bits, No Parity,1 Stop BitMaximum allowable cable length is 10 meters

Processor : 486 66MHZOperating Systems : Windows 95/98/XP, Windows NT, Windows 2000Ram : 16 MbyteMonitor : 14’’ SVGA (640x480 resolution)Fixed Disk Free Space : 5 MbyteDisk Drive : CD-ROMCommunication : An RS-232 communication port is needed to communicate with the

EAOM-9 unit

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive on the PC. CD will autostart, then select E AOM-9 Install from the menu.

Press the windows START button icon, then select EAOM-9 SW Þ EAOM-9 from the program menu.

EAOM-9 unit communicates with the PC using RS-232 communications. The PC software allows the EAOM-9 unit’s parameters and status information to be displayed on the PC screen. Operator and Technician parameters can be viewed. Parameters are password protected.There are four windows in EAOM-9 PC SW: Observation Window, Operator Parameters Window,Technician Parameters Window and Adjustment Window.

4.3 PC Interface

4.3.1 Technical Specifications

4.3.2 Installation Instruction

4.3.2.1 Minimum System Requirements

4.3.3 Installing EAOM-9 Software

4.3.4 Using Of EAOM-9 Communication Software

4.3.5 Description

20

In this window the values listed below can be observed.

Measurement ValuesMains VoltagesGenerator UV VoltageGenerator FrequencyBattery VoltageMaintenance HourExercise TimeRunning Time

FailuresLow Oil PressureHigh TemperatureFailed to StartCharging FailureVoltage FailureOver SpeedFailure 1 & 2Over CurrentBattery FailEmergency StopRoutine Maintenance

OutputsMains Contactor OutputGenerator Contactor OutputConfigurable Output-1Solenoid outputStart outputHorn output

ModesOffAutoManualTestProgram

4.3.6 Observation Window

21

Operator parameters can be viewed and edited. Parameters are password protected. When the operator password is entered, it is compared with operator password that is registered inside the EAOM-9 unit.

All parameters can be viewed and edited in this window. Parameters are password protected. When the technician password is entered, it is compared with technician password that is registered inside the EAOM-9 unit.

This menu allows the user to save configuration files to the disk, read from disk and write to the disc

Open :This menu allows the user to load the registered configuration files to the PC.Save :This menu allows the user to save the parameters with a name defined by

user.Print :This menu allows the user to print the parameters.Printer Setup:This menu allows the user to select the printer that is connected to network or PC

and change the configuration of the printer.Exit :Exit the program.

This menu is active only when the Operator or Technician Parameters Window is open. Using this menu allows the user to upload parameters from the EAOM-9 unit to the PC or download from the PC to the EAOM-9 unit.

Download : With this menu user can load parameters from PC to EAOM-9.Upload : User can load the parameters stored on EAOM-9 unit to PC.

4.3.7 Operator Parameters Window

4.3.8 Technician Parameters Window

4.3.9 MAIN MENU

4.3.9.1 FILE

4.3.9.2 PROGRAMMING

Communication Port Settings: With this menu, user can determine the serial port configurations of the PCLanguage: Turkish or English can be selected.

Click Operator Parameter tab. Enter the Operator Parameter password. If the password is correct, operator parameters will be viewed.

4.3.9.3 Settings

4.3.10 Entering to the Operator Parameters Window

22

Click Technician Parameter tab. Enter the Technician Parameter password. If password is correct, all parameters will be viewed.

4.3.11 Entering to the Technician Parameters Window

Click Adjustment tab. Enter the Technician password. If password is correct, adjustment window will be viewed.

4.3.12 Entering to the Adjustment Window

23

For loading parameters from EAOM-9 unit to PC follow the steps below. If user is in operator parameters window, only operator parameters will be viewed. If user is in Technician Parameters Window, all parameters will be viewed. Press 'Upload' in Program menu. While loading the parameters, the hour-glass cursor is displayed. Please wait for the upload operation to complete, when the cursor returns to normal.

For loading parameters from PC to EAOM-9 follow the steps below. If user is in operator parameters window, only operator parameters will be loaded. If user is in Technician Parameters Window, all parameters will be loaded. Press 'Download' in Program menu. While loading the parameters, the hour-glass cursor is displayed. Please wait for the download operation to complete, when the cursor returns to normal.

24

Click 'Open' in File menu. Choose configuration file which includes operator or technician parameters on Open Dialog Box. When the user clicks the 'Open' button on the Open Dialog Box, parameters will be transferred to PC window.

Click 'Save' in File menu. After choosing where to save the file, enter the file name. When the user clicks the 'Save' button on Save Dialog Box, all parameters will be saved to the file.

4.3.13 Load the Configuration File From the Disc

4.3.14 Save the Configuration File to the Disc

4.3.15 Upload

4.3.16 Download

The unit is extensively programmable through the front panel and via PC software.

Engine started signal P24.0

P24.2 P24.3

0=No, 1=Yes


P32

60060606060

600600600600

30.0 75.00000 9999

VVVVVVVVVV

60

HzHour

1 10 Number0 99 Minute0 999 Second0 30 Minute0 99 Second0 999 Hour0 999 Minute

500 5000 Rpm1 1000 Number

7.2 24.0 VZ0.1 25.0 Second

0 99 Second

5 99 Second40 360 VV

20.0 45.0 Hz0 99 Second0 99 Second


0/10/10/10/1


P24.1

50.0/60.0 Hz

1/3

Stop / Fuel

Min Default UnitDefinition of Parameter MaxMains Voltage Connection LevelMains Voltage Disconnection LevelMains Voltage Upper LimitAlternator Voltage Lower Limit Alternator Voltage Upper Limit Speed Upper Limit Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value

Number of Starting AttemptsEngine Cooling Time(0 disable cool process) Horn Duration (0 Continuous) Mains Transition Delay Preheat Time Exercise Time (0 Disable) Exercise Duration Time Period Single / Three Phase Selection




Speed Limit for Crank DisconnectionOil Pressure Control Delay TimeControl on DelayAlternator Voltage Fault Control DelaySpeed Fault Control Delay


Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

32030044032044053.0

5000

33

603

100

203

0

50.03000

1008.01.0

Fuel20

10105

30040.0

30105.05.0

25

NoP00P01P02P03P04P05P06P07P08P09P10P11P12P13P14P15

P16

P17P18P19P20P21P22P23

P24

P25P26P27P28P29P30P31

Press ‘Silence Alarm’ button to reset

0=Alternator Signal(Internal)

1=Magnetic Pickup

Enter technician password to reset time to “0” (zero)

5. PARAMETERS

26

Configurable Failure Input-1 60 NumberMin Default UnitDefinition of Parameter Max

0NoP33

0 Led flashes while input = 0 Volt 1 Led flashes while horn is sounding and then stays on until reset2 As '1' plus engine stops3 As '0' but only while engine running4 As '1' but only while engine running5 As '4' plus engine stops6 As '4' plus alternator contactor de-energised

Configurable Failure Input-2 60 Number0P34

0 Led flashes while input = 0 Volt 1 Led flashes while horn is sounding and then stays on until reset2 As '1' plus engine stops3 As '0' but only while engine running4 As '1' but only while engine running5 As '4' plus engine stops6 As '4' plus alternator contactor de-energised

Configurable Output 130 Number0P35

0 - Alarm Out1 - Engine running2 - Ready for Automatic transfer 3 - Preheat4 - Load Permit5 - Over Speed6 - Over Current7 - High Temperature8 - Low Oil Pressure9 - Maintenance Due10 - Failed to Start11 - Voltage Failure12 - Charging Failure13 - Low Battery Voltage

NumberP36 0000 9990 0000P37 0000 9990 0000 Number

Operator password (P00 to P15 and P36) Technician password (P00 to P37)

P00 Mains Voltage Connection LevelP01 Mains Voltage Disconnection LevelP02 Mains Voltage Upper Limit

In Automatic mode, the unit uses these parameters to decide when to switch the load between the mains supply and the alternator – assuming the alternator is providing a satisfactory output.If the mains voltage is higher than the Mains Voltage Upper Limit (P02) or lower than the Mains Voltage Disconnection Level (P01), the unit connects the load to the generator instead of to the mains.If the mains voltage is low and the load is running on the generator, the unit will not restore the mains supply to the load until the mains voltage is between Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) and Mains Voltage Upper Limit (P02) for Mains Transition Delay (P11) value. This hysteresis prevents constant switching between mains and generator as the mains varies about the switching levels. Figure 5.1 shows how, in automatic mode, the load is transferred between mains and generator as the mains voltage varies over time.

P09 = Engine Cooling Time

P11 = Mains Transition DelayP21 = Mains Change Over Delay

P11 P11

2P

1

P1

2

P09

Mains Voltage Upper Limit

Connection Level

Disconnection Level

Mains Contactor

GeneratorContactor

Generator Available

Figure 5.1

Default Values

Time2

P1

2P

1

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

YES

NO

27

5.1 Program Functions

5.1.1 Mains Voltage

28

If the battery voltage drops below the defined Battery Voltage Lower Limit, an alarm occurs and “Low Battery Failure” LED illuminates.

Number of Starting Attempts (P08)Starting Attempt Duration (P25)

When the EAOM-9 receives an Engine Start command, it energises the start solenoid to drive the starter motor and energises the Fuel solenoid (if selected – see Section 5.1.9 Stop/Fuel selection). Starting attempt duration (P25) defines the maximum period for the start solenoid output is being active if one of the Engine Started Signals is not received (Refer to 5.1.7). It makes a new attempt after a delay equal to twice the defined Starting Attempt Duration (P25). Number of Starting Attempts (P08), defines the number of unsuccessful tries that the EAOM-9 will make before abandoning the attempts. If all these attempts fail, EAOM-9 will stop the starting attempts and start failure indication is displayed. Start failure can be reset with reset button.

P05 Speed Upper LimitP31 Speed Fault Control Delay

A fault will be reported if the alternator output frequency exceeds the upper limit for more than the time defined as the Speed Fault Control Delay (P31). The fault will only occur if the engine has been running for the period defined as the Control on Delay (P29). This failure immediately stops the generating set without engine cooling time.

P03 Alternator Voltage Lower LimitP04 Alternator Voltage Upper LimitP30 Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay

A fault will be reported if the alternator output voltage goes outside the window defined by the upper and lower limits for more than the time defined as the Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay (P30). The fault will only occur if the engine has been running for the period defined as the Control on Delay (P29). This failure immediately stops the generating set without Engine Cooling Time (P09)

5.1.2 Alternator Voltage

5.1.3 Alternator Frequency



5.1.6 Engine Starting

When operating under heavy load, the engine can get very hot and is only prevented from overheating by circulating coolant. If the engine is stopped abruptly under these conditions, it can overheat as the coolant flow is cut off. Where EAOM-9 controls the load, via one of the configurable outputs, it can ensure that the engine continues to run after the load has been removed. Engine Cooling Time (P09) defines the duration of this cooling off period.

This parameter specifies the method by which the unit monitors generator speed. The choice is between alternator frequency and external magnetic pick-up. Speed is monitored so as to detect when the engine has started. See Sections 5.1.3 Alternator Frequency, 5.1.6 Engine Starting and 5.1.7 Engine started signals (P24) Where alternator frequency is used, Nominal Alternator Frequency (P17) and Nominal Speed (P18) must be set correctlyWhere the magnetic pick-up is used, Nominal Alternator Frequency (P17), Nominal Speed (P18) and Tooth Number (P19) must be set correctly.

This parameter allows the use of either a Stop solenoid or a Fuel solenoid. (See Section 5.1.6 Engine Starting.)

If Fuel Solenoid selected, the fuel solenoid will be energised while the engine is running and de-energised to cut off the fuel and stop the engine. If Stop Solenoid selected, the stop solenoid is normally de-energised and only energised to stop the engine. The solenoid remains energised for the period defined as the Stop Magnet Energising Time (P23).

This parameter sets the period for which the Stop solenoid is energised to stop the engine. It applies only where parameter Stop / Fuel Solenoid Selection (P22) is set to Stop Solenoid.

This sets the delay before a Low Oil Pressure warning will be generated. The Low Oil Pressure fault indicator will light if the oil pressure switch contact remains opened, while the engine is running, after the period defined by parameter. This period begins when the EAOM-9 has detected engine starting and has cut off the drive to the starter motor. This failure immediately stops the generating set, without Engine Cooling Time (P09).

The unit must de-energise the Start solenoid to disconnect the starter motor, once the engine is running. Conversely, if the engine does not start after the pre-set start time, the unit will turn off the starter motor and try again. Hence, the unit must be able to detect when the engine has started. Four signals are available to provide engine running information as follows :0. Charge Generator (P24.0 ); from charging generator energising coil current. 1. Speed (P24.1); if engine speed is higher than Speed Limit for Crank Disconnection (P27), pay attention to the Speed Sensing Input Selection (P16) (Refer to 5.1.8)2. Alternator Voltage (P24.2); if alternator voltage is higher than Alternator Voltage Limit for Crank Disconneciton (P26)3. Oil pressure; it looks if oil pressure switch is closed.Any or all of these signals can be selected for use. It is advisable to select at least two of them –preferably 1. Engine speed, 2. Charging generator or Alternator voltage.See Section 5.1.6 Engine Starting. If any of the selected signals appears, the unit assumes that the engine has started.

29

5.1.7 Engine Started Signals (P24)

5.1.8 Speed Sensing Input Selection (P16)


5.1.10 Stop Magnet Energising Time (P23)

5.1.11 Oil Pressure Control Delay Time (P28)

30

A contact closure to 0V on any of these inputs causes the horn to sound for the period programmed by Horn Duration (P10) and lights the appropriate indicator on the panel. The Unit can be programmed to respond in one of seven ways:0. Indication is unlatched - the LED flashes only while the input is 0V. This input has no effect if any other alarm condition is present.1. Indication is latched. The LED flashes while the horn is sounding and then stays on until the reset button is pressed.2. This is the same as 1 but, in addition, the engine is shut down. Options 3-6 are effective only while the engine is running.3. Indication is unlatched - the LED flashes only while the input is 0V. This input operates only if the engine is running and has no effect if any other alarm condition is present.4. Indication is latched. The LED flashes while the horn is sounding and then stays on until the reset button is pressed. This input operates only if the engine is running.5. As 4 but, in addition, the engine is shut down.6. As 4 but, in addition, the alternator contactor is de-energised to disconnect the load from the alternator. The engine in not shut down.

During the initial period after the engine has been started, there can be fluctuations in engine speed and alternator output that could generate spurious fault indications. Control On Delay (P29) defines a period during which any fault indications, except High Temperature, will be ignored by the EAOM-9. Also, in the event of a mains failure, transfer of the load from mains to generator will be delayed until the end of the Control On Delay (P29) period. This period begins when the EAOM-9 has detected engine starting and has cut off the drive to the starter motor.


5.1.13 Configurable Inputs

When active, this output provides battery voltage (12VZ or 24VZ) and can be programmed in one of fourteen different ways:

0. Alarm output. Active when any fault is reported until reset. It can be used for either audible or visual alert.1. Engine running. Active while the engine is running2. Ready for automatic transfer. Output is active while the unit is in Manual, Test or Auto mode.3. Preheat function. On starting the output is active for time period defined in Preheat Time (P12) prior to running the starter motor.

.(P00) and Mains Voltage Disconnection Level (P01)

.

.

.

.

.....

4 Load transfer permitted. This output is active while the alternator output voltage is between Mains Voltage Connection Level . This output can be used to control a contactor that transfers the load to the alternator once the generator set is up and running.5 Over speed alarm6 Over current alarm.7 High temperature alarm output. Active when high temperature fault is reported.8 Low oil pressure alarm output. Active when low oil pressure fault is reported.9 Maintenance due alarm output. Active when maintenance due fault is reported.10 Failed to start alarm output. Active when failed to start fault is reported.11 Voltage failure alarm output. Active when voltage failure fault is reported.12 Charging fail alarm output. Active when charging fail fault is reported.13 Low battery voltage alarm output. Active when low battery voltage fault is reported.

5.1.14 Configurable Output (P35)

P06 Periodic Maintenance Hour Set ValueP07 Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

To ensure reliability, the generator must be serviced at regular intervals. The EAOM-9 can be set to indicate when a service is due. Set Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value (P06) to the number of running hours between services. Use Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset (P07) to reset the hours counter at each service. When the engine has run for the defined number of hours, the LED with exclamation mark will flash.

Use this option to change the Operator password. This password allows access to the parameters from Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) to Exercise Duration Time Period (P14) and Operator Password ( P36).

Use this option to change the Technician password. It allows access to the all parameters: from Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) to Technician Password (P37).

5.1.15 Maintenance Indication



P13 Exercise TimeP14 Exercise Duration Time Period

This function allows the engine to be run automatically, without load, at fixed intervals, asspecified by Exercise Time (P13). The engine runs for the number of minutes specified by Exercise Duration Time Period (P14). Exercising will only occur if the unit is set to Auto mode when exercising is due. To disable exercising, set Exercise Time (P13) to zero.

5.1.16 Engine Exercise

31

32

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST





VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

When button is pressed, operator


VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST




After entering the password, push the button for confirming the password and accessing to the first parameters of operator parameters.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST



5.2 Changing and Saving Operator Parameter Value

33

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST









NOTE : Other operator paramaters can be accessed as explained forFor exiting from programming mode, press

34

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST





VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

When button is pressed for 10 seconds, technician menu entering screen is

shown.

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST



After entering the password, press the button for confirming the password and accessing to the first parameters of technician parameters.



VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

Technician Menu Entering Screen

When button is pressed, technician



5.3 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter Value

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

PROGPROG

RESETRESET TESTTEST









NOTE : Other technician paramaters can be accessed as explained forFor exiting from programming mode, press

35

These commissioning checks may interfere with the power supply to the load. Therefore they should not be carried out with a mission-critical load connected to the system.

1. Check that the unit is correctly wired and that the wiring is of a standard and rating compatible with the system.2. Check that the correct fuses are fitted.

3. Be sure that the parameters are suitable for your system. Please refer to the Section 5 Parameters for details.

4. Take temporary steps to prevent the engine from starting ( for example, disable the fuel solenoid).5. After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, connect the battery supply.6. On the EAOM-9, press the Man (15) button. The LED on the button should light.7. Press the Engine Start (14) button. The LED on the button should light.8. Check that the engine start sequence commences. The starter motor should run for the programmed time period Starting Attempt Duration (P25) for the Number of Starting Attempts (P08) number of times.9. Check that the Start Failure LED flashes and the LED on the Engine Start button switches off.10. Restore the engine to operational state (reconnect the fuel solenoid).11. Press the Man (15) button. The LED on the button should light.12. Press the Engine Start (14) button. The LED on the button should light.13. Check the start sequence, as follows: The starter motor runs

The engine startsThe starter motor disengages once the engine is running.

If not, check that the engine is fully operational (fuel available etc.) and check the wiring and programming of the EAOM-9. 14. Check that the engine runs up to it’s operating speed. If not and an alarm is present, check that the alarm is valid and then check the input wiring.15. Press the Engine Stop (13) button. At this moment the LED on the button should light. The engine should stop. Allow time for the engine to come to rest.

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit and is present.2. Check that the remote inhibit switch (if fitted) is set to enable (contact is open).3. Check the mains voltage readings on the display.4. Press the Auto button (18). The led on the button should light.5. Switch off the mains supply to the unit. Check that the Alternator starts and after Control On Delay (P29) the load is transferred to the alternator.6. Restore the mains supply to the unit. Check that after Mains Transition Delay (P11) the load is transferred back to the mains and the Alternator shuts down after Engine Cooling Time (P09).7. Select Auto mode.8. If a remote inhibit switch is fitted, set it to inhibit (closed).9. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the alternator does not start.10. Restore the mains supply and set the remote inhibit switch to enable.

c

6. COMMISSIONING

6.1 Manual Operation

6.2. Auto Operation

36

37

When button is pressed, all leds and digits are energised.

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit.2. Press the Test (17) button. The LED on the button should light.3. Check that the generator starts and that the load is still connected to the mains.4. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the contactors change over to connect the load to the generator. Check also that the Auto (18) LED is lit. The unit changes operating mode to AUTO Mode automatically.5. Restore the mains supply. Check that the contactors reconnect the load to the mains supply.6. Check that the generator shuts down after Engine Cooling Time (P09)


7. LAMP TEST

Hz./RPM

TEST AUTO

MANUAL

OFF

EAOM - 9

RESET

PROG

TEST

UV

VL12/L1N

VL23/L2N

VL31/L3N

FAILED TO START

HIGH TEMPERATURE

LOW OIL PRESSURE

OVER SPEED FAILURE

VOLTAGE FAILURE

CHARGING FAIL

OVERCURRENT

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~

RPM

VV

STOP START

IV

SPARE-1

SPARE-2

Number Comment

1

2

8. OPERATION


Hz./RPM

TEST AUTO

MANUAL

OFF

EAOM - 9

RESET

PROG

TEST

UV

VL12/L1N

VL23/L2N

VL31/L3N

FAILED TO START

HIGH TEMPERATURE

LOW OIL PRESSURE

OVER SPEED FAILURE

VOLTAGE FAILURE

CHARGING FAIL

OVERCURRENT

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~

RPM

VV

STOP START

SPARE-2

3

45

6

78

9

1 2

101112131415161718

Multi Function Display. This is used for displaying the electrical measurements during normal operation and editing / inspecting programming parameters in programming mode.The Display Scroll Button is used for rotating between measurement screen in normal operation and between programming parameters in programming mode.

3Green LED lights to indicate that engine is running, as indicated by the signals selected by program parameter Engine Started Signals (P24).

4Green LED indicates that mains voltage is available and is within the parameters set by Mains Voltage Connection Level (P00) and Mains Voltage Upper Limit (P02)

5Green LED lights to indicate that alternator output is available and within the parameters set by Alternator Voltage Lower Limit (P03) and Alternator Voltage Upper Limit (P04)

6In Manual mode, this button controls the mains contactor, toggling between on and off, as indicated by LED 8

7In Manual mode, this button controls the alternator output contactor, toggling between on a nd off, as indicated by LED 9. Note : It is not possible to connect the mains and the alternator to the load at the same time. If one switch is operated to connect mains or alternator to the load, the unit will de-energise the other contactor before energising the selected contactor. In addition, the contactors should be wired and interlocked such that the two contactors can not be energised simultaneously.

8 Green LED lights to indicate that mains contactor is energised.

9 Green LED lights to indicate that alternator output contactor is energised.

10 Prog/Lamp Test.. Lights all the LEDs and segments on the panel so that you can see if any are not working. Holding the button pressed for five seconds puts the unit into Programming mode.

38

IV

SPARE-1

Number Comment

11 Up/Reset. R estores unit operation after it has latched in a fault condition. The up- arrow function is used in Programming mode as detailed in Section 5.3 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter Value.

12 Dec/Alarm Reset.. Silences the audible alarm. The down arrow button is used in Programming mode as detailed in Section 5.3 Changing and Saving Technician Parameter Value.

13 Engine Stop. Stops the engine in Manual mode. A red LED in the corner shows that the button has been pressed.

14 Engine Start. Starts the engine. A red LED in the corner shows that the button has been pressed.

15 Manual mode. To control engine and contactors manually.

16 Off Mode

17 Test mode. This runs the alternator without connecting the load to the generator. The load will continue to be powered from the mains. The unit will indicate any faults detected in the alternator as if the unit was in Auto mode. If a mains failure occurs while the unit is in Test mode the unit will revert to Auto mode and proceed to connect the load to the alternator.

18 Auto mode. In the event of a mains failure, the unit will:De-energise the mains contactor to disconnect the loadStart the generatorOnce the alternator output is available and after the Control on Delay (P29), the unit energises the alternator contactor to connect the load to the alternator.When the mains supply is restored, the unit will, after the Mains Transition Delay (P11), de-energise the alternator contactor and energise the mains contactor, thus transferring the load back to the mains. The unit will then shut down the alternator after the Engine Cooling Time (P09)Note that an active (0V) input at pin24 Remote Inhibit will inhibit Automatic mode so that no automatic load transfer can occur.

39

VL31/L3N

VL23/L2N

VL12/L1N

UV

Hz./RPM

Four-digit, seven-segment LED display, with annunciators to indicate the parameter being displayed. Use the scroll button to select the desired parameter. The button selects the

parameters in sequence, as follows. Note that line to line voltage readings are prefixed by L while

line to neutral readings are prefixed by n






• Mains voltage L3-N, prefix n• Alternator voltage L1-UV• Frequency (Hz)

• Battery voltage ( VZ)• Timers

8.2 Display Mode Indicators

Engine running time, in hours (since last reset). This is a six digit number, the first three digits are prefixed H (high) and the second three digits are prefixed L (low). Automatic exercise timer. Elapsed waiting time (hours) to the next exercise is prefixed E, the exercise running time (minutes) is prefixed r• The Alarm horn LED will flash continually if the unit detects at least one of the faults listed below. When the Display Select button is pressed so as to select this option, the display will show the cause of the fault indication. If more than one error condition is present, repeated pressing of the button will show each in turn.

Possible error messages are:EStP – Emergency S t opbAT1 – Low Battery Voltage AlarmServ – Routine Maintenance due info

40

The mode can be changed at any time. A change in mode will not effect the current state of the generator or load connection. For example; if the unit is in Auto mode with the generator running and the load running on the generator, changing the mode to Manual will not effect the operating state. Any changes between Auto, Manual and Test modes will not change the operating state.

41

8.3 Mode Transition

1. Press the Man (15) button. The LED on the button will switch on.2. Press the Engine Start (14) button on the panel. The LED on the button will switch on. The engine should start. The sequence is as follows:! The starter motor runs! The engine startsOnce the engine is running,! The LED (3) “Engine Running” illuminates.! The Generator Ready LED (5) switches on after Control on Delay (P29) time period.! The generator will not supply the load unless the Generator Ready LED (5) is illuminated (The contactor open / close button does not work)3. Once both LEDs have illuminated, press the Mains Contactor Button (6) to disconnect the load from the mains supply LED (8) should go off.4. Press the Generator Contactor Button (7) to connect the load to the generator supply. LED (9) should light.

When the Engine Stop (13) button is pressed, the LED (9) on the button is illuminated and engine is stopped. When the Engine Stop button is pressed while the load is connected to the alternator output (generator output), the alternator contactor is released then the engine is stopped.

Press the Auto (18) button to select Auto mode. The LED on the button will light to indicate this mode has been selected. In the event of a mains voltage failure, the unit will start up the generator and, once the generator is running and generator is available to take the load, will transfer the load to the generator. When the mains is restored and stable, it will transfer the load back to the mains and, after Engine Cooling Time (P09) shut down the generator.Note that if 0V in Remote Inhibit (Pin24), it will inhibit engine running.

Press the Test (17) button to select Test mode. The LED on the button will switch on. This mode allows for testing of the generator off load. All alarm circuits will operate so that any faults will be reported. If a mains failure occurs while the unit is in Test mode, the unit will revert to Auto mode and will switch the load to the generator.

8.4 Manual Start

8.5 Manual Stop

8.6 Auto Operation

8.7 Test Operation

The unit incorporates facilities for exercising the engine on a regular basis. If the unit is in Auto mode, after an interval (hours) determined by Exercise Time (P13), the unit will go into Test mode and start up the engine. The system will run in Test mode, without transferring the load to the alternator, for the period (minutes) determined by Exercise Duration Time Period (P14). At the end of this period, the unit will revert to Auto mode, shut down the engine and reset the exercise interval timer. If the unit is not in Auto mode at that time, the unit will restart the exercise interval timer without having exercised the engine. If the mains fails while the engine is being exercised, the unit will revert to Auto mode and transfer the load to the alternator. If the user changes the mode, the engine exercise will be abandoned and the unit will respond according to the mode selected and the current state of the mains supply.

8.8 Engine Exercising

Indicators on the central section of the panel will flash if a fault is detected. Fault conditions latch so that further operation is prevented. If a failure is indicated, proceed as follows:1. Change the unit in to MAN mode and stop the generator2. Find and fix the fault.3. Press the Failure Reset (11) button to enable a restart.4. Select the required mode of operation – Manual, Auto or Test.

This LED flashes if the engine has not started after the programmed Number of Starting Attempts (P08). The unit must be reset, by pressing the Failure Reset (11) button, before a fresh attempt can be made.

This LED flashes if the thermostatic switch on the engine indicates high temperature. If this fault occurs, the EAOM-9 will stop the engine without any Engine Cooling Time (P09).

This LED flashes if the Oil Pressure Switch on the engine indicates low oil pressure while the engine is running. To obtain this indication, the engine must have been running for at least the period specified by the Oil Pressure Control Delay Time (P28). If this fault occurs, the EAOM-9 will stop the engine without any Engine Cooling Period (P09).

After the engine has started, if a failure is detected in charge generator input this led flashes.

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P29) time. This LED flashes if the alternator speed goes above the Speed Upper Limit (P05). For a fault to be indicated, the speed must be over this limit for longer than the period defined by the Speed Fault Control Delay (P31).Alternator speed is measured either by measuring alternator output frequency or by monitoring an external magnetic pick-up, as selected by Speed Sensing Input Selection (P16). This failure immediately stops the generating set, without any Engine Cooling Time (P09) period.

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P29) time. This LED flashes if the alternator output voltage is outside of the limits programmed into Alternator Voltage Lower Limit (P03) and Alternator Voltage Upper Limit (P04), for a time period longer than the Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay (P30). This failure immediately releases the generator contactor, and stops the generating set without any Engine Cooling Time (P09) period.

42

9. FAULT FINDING

9.1 Fault indications

9.1.1 Failed to Start LED

9.1.2 High Temperature LED

9.1.3 Low Oil Pressure LED

9.1.4 Charge Generator Failure LED

9.1.5 Over Speed LED

9.1.6 Generator Voltage Failure LED

The remote Emergency Stop button has been pressed and has shut down the engine. After fixing the fault press Failure Reset (11) to remove the indication and restore EAOM-9 operation. This failure is indicated with an error messages in EAOM-9. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9 the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button .

The LED switches on when the battery voltage falls below the value specified by the BatteryVoltage Lower Limit (P20). The EAOM-9 measures battery voltage at the EAOM-9 terminals. This failure is indicated with an error messages in EAOM-9. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9, the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button .

The interval (hours run) between routine maintenance, set by Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value (P06), has expired. On completion of the required engine maintenance, reset the maintenance timer using Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset (P07). This failure is indicated with an error message in EAOM-9. When this failure occurs in EAOM-9, the led with exclamation mark starts to flash and user can see the error messages with the Scroll button . This failure is not stopped the generating set. If the failure is cleared with the reset button, hours run is cleared by the EAOM-9.

This input can be controlled continuously or when Control on Delay (P29) is expired after engine has started according to the user selection.It can be temporary or permanent.It can be configured to show the StatusOnly horn sounding and led flashingEngine stops beside horn sounding and led flashingContactor de-energising beside horn sounding and led flashing

43

This failure is indicated if the generator runs for Control On Delay (P29) time. The unit monitors an external Over Current relay (Pin 22) when the Generator is running and the Load is on the Generator. If the input becomes active at any time,this LED flashes and the generator contactor is released, but the engine continues to run.

9.1.7 Over Current LED

9.1.8 Configurable Input-1 and 2 LED

9.1.9 Emergency Stop Message

9.1.10 Low Battery Voltage Message

9.1.11 Maintenance Time Message

Symptom

Check all the wiring of the unit. Check the Z supply. (measure voltage between pins 10 and 11)

Check the Z fuse.

Check engine oil level and pressure.

Check oil pressure switch and wiring.Check engine temperature and cooling systems. Check switch and wiring.

Check fuel solenoid and wiring, fuel and battery.Reset the EAOM-9 and restart the engine.

Check solenoid transistor output activated, (Fuel Solenoid if selected)

Check the signals that the EAOM-9 is using to determine if theengine has started. Refer to the engine manual.

Check wiring to starter solenoid. Check battery supply.Check battery supply is present on the Start output (Pin8) of theEAOM-9.

Unit is inoperative.

Starter motor

Isolate the equipment from the electricity supply during mechanical and electrical maintenance. When this is not possible, the equipment must be in the “OFF” position.c

Inoperative.

Possible Remedy

44

Low oil pressure fault after engine has started

Failed to start fault. Engine failed to start after Number of Starting Attempts (P08)

High engine temperature fault after engine has started

P16

P10

No

P02

P03P04P05

P06

P08

P11

P12

P14P15

0=Alternator

Pick-upP17P18P19P20P21P22P23


P24.0 P24

P24.2 P24.3

0=No, 1=Yes

P13

P09

P25

Alternator voltage limit for crank disconnection P27

P28P29P30P31

Enter technician password

P26

P32

P00

P01

600

6060

6060

600600

600600

30.0 75.0

0000 9999

VV

VVVV

VVVV

60

Hz

Hour

1 10 Number0 99 Minute0 999 Second0 30 Minute

0 99 Second0 999 Hour

0 999 Minute

500 5000 Rpm1 1000 Number

7.2 24.0 VZ0.1 25.0 Second

0 99 Second

5 99 Second

40 360 VV20.0 45.0 Hz

0 99 Second0 99 Second


0/1

0/10/10/1

Charge GeneratorSpeedAlternator Voltage

Oil Pressure

P24.1

50.0/60.0 Hz

1/3

Stop / Fuel

Configurable Failure Input-1P33Configurable Failure Input-2P34

0 60 6


Mains Voltage Connection LevelMains Voltage Disconnection LevelMains Voltage Upper Limit

Alternator Voltage Lower Limit Alternator Voltage Upper Limit Speed Upper Limit

Periodic Maintenance Hour Set Value Press ‘Silence Alarm’ button

Number of Starting AttemptsEngine Cooling Time(0 disable cool process) Horn Duration (0 Continuous) Mains Transition Delay

Preheat Time Exercise Time (0 Disable)

Exercise Duration Time Period Single / Three Phase Selection




Speed Limit for Crank Disconnection

Oil Pressure Control Delay TimeControl on DelayAlternator Voltage Fault Control DelaySpeed Fault Control Delay


1 = Magnetic(Internal)

Signal

to reset time to “0” (zero)

to resetP07 Periodic Maintenance Hour Reset

45

10. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS

Configurable OutputP35 0 13Operator PasswordP36 0 9990Technician PasswordP37 0 9990

Equipment Use : Electrical control equipment for generating setsHousing& Mounting : 96 mm x 96 mm x 115 mm (excluding 13mm clips) housing for panel

mountingPanel Cut-Out : 92 mm x 92 mmProtection : NEMA 4X (IP54 at front panel, IP20 at rear side).Weight : Approximately 0.65 Kg.Environmental Ratings : Standard, indoor at an altitude of less than 2000 meters with non-

condensing humidity.o o o oOperating/Storage Temperature : -25 C to +70 C / -40 C to +85 C

Operating/Storage Humidity : 90 % max. (None condensing) Installation Overvoltage Category : II Appliances, portable equipment.Pollution Degree : II, normal office or workplace, none conductive pollutionMode of Operation : ContinuousEMC : EN-61000-6-4, EMC generic emission standard for industrial

equipment EN-61000-6-2, EMC generic immunity standard for industrial equipment

Electrical Safety : EN-61010-1, safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

Supply Voltage : 12.0VZ (8.0VZ to 16.0VZ) or 24.0VZ (16.0VZ to 32VZ) switch selectable

Supply Voltage Measurement : 8.0-40.0 VZ.

Mains Voltage Measurement : 35 to 300VL-NV. Accuracy:1%FS, Resolution : 1VV

Generator Voltage Measurement : 35 to 300VL-NV 2 wire connection. Accuracy:1%FS,

Resolution:1VVMeasurement Accuracy : Volts 1% Frequency : 0.25%

Cranking Dropouts : Battery voltage can be 0VZ for max. 100msn during cranking (battery voltage should be at least nominal voltage before cranking)

Generator Speed Measurement : From alternator or magnetic pickup

Alternator Frequency Range :10-110 Hz. (@35-300VL-NZ)Magnetic Pickup Freq. Range : 3 5 Hz - 10 kHz (@3-35 Volts peak)

Charge Generator Excitation :12 VZ or 24 VZ, 200 mA, max 3WCommunication Interface : RS-232 serial communicationContact Sensing Input : Emergency Stop (NC), Oil pressure switch (NC), Temperature switch

(NO), Remote inhibit input (NO), Configurable input 1 (NO), Configurable input 2 (NO), Over current input (NO)

Outputs : Start Relay Output 10A (@12/24VZ), Fuel Relay Output 10A

(@12/24VZ), Alarm Relay Output 10A (@12/24VZ),

Configurable Relay Output 5A(@12/24VZ), Mains Contactor

Relay Output. 5A(@12/24VZ), Generator Contactor Relay Output.

5A(@12/24VZ)Display (4-digit, 7-segment LED display) : Mains L1 – L2 Voltage, Mains L1 – N Voltage, Mains L2 – L3

Voltage, Mains L2 – N Voltage, Mains L3 – L1 Voltage, Mains L3 – N Voltage, Generator Voltage, Generator Frequency Hz, Engine Speed

RPM, Battery Voltage Z, Total Run Hours, Failure InformationFailure Indicators : Engine start, High temperature, Low oil pressure, Engine over speed

Generator voltage failure, Charging fail, Over current, User configurable input 1, User configurable input 2

Status Indicators : Off mode, Test mode, Auto mode, Manual mode, Manual engine start, Manual engine stop, Engine running, Mains voltage available, Generator is ready to take the load, Mains contactor, Generator contactor

Information Alarms : Low battery voltage, Emergency stop, Maintenance dueApprovals : GOST-R,

46

11. SPECIFICATIONS

EAOM-19 72 x 72,

- Automatic engine start / stop

- Generator voltage and frequency measurement and monitoring

- Battery voltage measurement and monitoring

- Simple push-button controlled operation

- Two user configurable inputs

- Provides charge generator excitation current

- Speed sensing from alternator frequency

- Fully programmable

Automatic Transfer Unit For Diesel Generators

- Led status and fault indication

- Mains voltage measurement and monitoring (Ph-Ph or Ph-N)

- Automatic shutdown on fault condition

EA

OM

-19

A

uto

ma

tic

Tra

ns

fer

Un

it F

or

Die

se

l G

en

era

tors

2

Instruction manual of EAoM-19 automatic transfer unit consists of two main sections. Explanation of these sections are below. Also, there is other section which include technical specifications of the unit. All titles and page numbers in instruction manual are in “CONTENTS” section. User can reach to any title with page number.

Installation:

In this section, physical dimensions of the unit, panel mounting, electrical connections, physical and electrical installation of the unit to the system are explained.


In this section, user interface of the unit, how to access to the parameters, description of parameters are explained.

Also in these sections, there are warnings to prevent serious injury while doing the physical and electrical mountage or using the unit.


This stmbol is used to determine the dangerous situations as a result of an electrical shock. User must pay attention to these warnings definitely.a

c This symbol is used for security warnings. User must pay attention to these warnings.

This symbol is used to determine the important notes about functions and usage of the unit.


i

1.INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................................1.2 WARRANTY...............................................................................................................................1.3 MAINTENANCE.........................................................................................................................

2.INSTALLATION..................................................................................................................................2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................2.2 DIMENSIONS............................................................................................................................2.3 PANEL CUT-OUT.......................................................................................................................2.4 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS....................................................................................................2.5 PANEL MOUNTING...................................................................................................................2.6 INSTALLATION FIXING CLAMP................................................................................................2.7 REMOVING FROM THE PANEL...............................................................................................

3.ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS..........................................................................................................3.1 TERMINAL LAYOUT AND CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS....................................................3.2 ELEKTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM..................................................................................

3.2.1 EAOM-19 SINGLE PHASE CONNECTIONS SCHEMATIC FOR TN-C AC POWER SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................

3.2.2 EAOM-19 THREE PHASE CONNECTIONS SCHEMATIC FOR TN-C AC POWER SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................

3.3 TOP LABEL VIEW OF THE EAOM-19......................................................................................3.4 UNIT WIRING............................................................................................................................3.5 UNIT WIRING DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................

4.DEFINITION OF FRONT PANEL AND ACCESSING TO THE PARAMETERS................................4.1 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION................................................................................................4.2 ACCESSING TO THE OPERATOR PARAMETERS.................................................................4.3 ACCESSING TO THE TECHNICIAN PARAMETERS...............................................................4.4 PARAMETER LIST....................................................................................................................4.5 EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS..........................................................................................

4.5.1 MAINS VOLTAGE CONNECTION (P00) AND DISCONNECTION LEVEL (P01), UPPER LIMIT (P02).........................................................................................................

4.5.2 ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE LOWER (P03) AND UPPER LIMIT (P04), FAULT CONTROL DELAY (P20)....................................................................................................................

4.5.3 ALTERNATOR FREQUENCY UPPER LIMIT (P05), FAULT CONTROL DELAY (P21)....4.5.4 ENGINE COOLING TIME (P07).......................................................................................4.5.5 MAINS TRANSITION DELAY (P09).................................................................................4.5.6 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOWER LIMIT (P11)......................................................................4.5.7 STOP / FUEL SOLENOID SELECTION (P13).................................................................4.5.8 STOP MAGNET ENERGISED TIME (P14)......................................................................4.5.9 ENGINE STARTED SIGNAL (P15)................................................................................4.5.10 STARTING ATTEMPT DURATION(P16), NUMBER OF STARTING ATTEMPTS(P06)..4.5.11 CONTROL ON DELAY (P19)..........................................................................................4.5.12 CONFIGURABLE INPUTS 1 AND 2 (P22 AND P23).....................................................

4.5.17 OPERATOR PASSWORD (P28)....................................................................................4.5.18 TECHNICIAN PASSWORD (P29)..................................................................................

5.COMMISSIONING..............................................................................................................................5.1 MANUAL MODE........................................................................................................................5.2 AUTO MODE.............................................................................................................................5.3 TEST MODE..............................................................................................................................

6.OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................6.1 ALTERNATE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................6.2 FAILURE INDICATORS DESCRIPTION...................................................................................6.3 MODE TRANSITION.................................................................................................................6.4 MANUAL START........................................................................................................................6.5 MANUAL STOP..........................................................................................................................6.6 AUTO OPERATION...................................................................................................................6.7 TEST OPERATION....................................................................................................................

4.5.13 HORN OUTPUT SELECTION (P24)..............................................................................4.5.14 CHOKE TIME (P25).......................................................................................................4.5.15 GENERATOR START DELAY (P26)..............................................................................4.5.16 OIL SENSOR SELECTION (P27)..................................................................................

CONTENTS

3

Page 6

Page 19

Page 13

Page 8Page 9

Page 6Page 7Page 7

Page 9Page 10Page 11Page 11Page 12Page 12

Page 13Page 14

Page 14

Page 15Page 16Page 17Page 18

Page 19Page 21Page 23Page 25Page 26

Page 26

Page 27Page 27Page 27Page 27Page 27Page 27Page 28Page 28Page 28Page 29Page 29Page 29Page 29

Sayfa 33

Sayfa 31Sayfa 31Sayfa 32Sayfa 32

Sayfa 33Sayfa 36Sayfa 38Sayfa 38Sayfa 38Sayfa 38Sayfa 38

Page 30Page 30Page 30

7.FAULT FINDING.................................................................................................................................

8.SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................................................................................

9.BLOK DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................

10. USER DEFINED PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................LIST-1...............................................................................................................................................

4

Page 40

Page 43

Page 39

Page 42

Page 43

5

Manufacturer Company Name : Emko Elektronik CO.

Manufacturer Company Address: DOSAB, Karanfil Sokak, No:6, 16369 Bursa, Turkey


Product Name : Automatic Transfer Unit For Diesel Generators

Model Number : EAOM-19

Type Number : EAOM-19



73 / 23 / EEC The Low Voltage Directive as amended by 93 / 68 / EEC

89 / 336 / EEC The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

Has been designed and manufactured according to the following specifications

EN 61000-6-4 EMC Generic Emission Standard for the Industrial Environment

EN 61000-6-2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard for the Industrial Environment

EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use


1.Introduction

6

The EAOM-19 provides for automatic transfer of a load from mains to generator in the event of a mains failure. The unit is able to detect failure of any phase of the mains and to start and switch over to a generator if the mains voltage goes outside pre-set limits. Both automatic and manual control is possible. A test mode is also available which allows the generator to be run without taking the load. The unit monitors generator operation and gives warning of any faults that are detected. It monitors:

!Mains voltage! Alternator output (voltage and frequency)! Engine speed! Battery voltage! Engine temperature!Oil pressure

It controls:

! Engine fuel supply or engine stopping, (via external solenoid)! Starter motor, (via external relay)! Automatic generator start and load transfer on mains failure, (via external mains and

generator contactors)! Alarm horn

A four-digit, seven-segment display provides extensive monitoring of unit and generator parameters, including:

!Mains voltages! Alternator voltage and frequency! Battery voltage! Error indication! Program parameters

The unit is extensively programmable, with password protection on two levels. In the event that the engine fails to start on the first attempt, the attempt will be repeated a programmed number of times or until successful. If a fault is detected, the unit shuts down the engine and indicates the failure by flashing a relevant fault LED. Two user configurable inputs are included that sound an external horn, flash indicators on the panel and can be programmed to stop the engine or disconnect the load.


7

1.2 Warranty


1.3 Maintenance

If the device is used with conditions which are explained in this instruction manual, there is no need to do periodic maintenance.

8

In package,- One piece unit- Two pieces fixing clamp- One piece instruction manual


If there is danger of serious accident resulting from a failure or defect in this unit , power off the system and seperate the electrical connection of the device from the system.

The unit is normally supplied without a power switch or a fuse. Use power switch and fuse as required.





During the equipment is putted in hole on the metal panel while mechanical installation some metal burrs can cause injury on hands, you must be careful.

Montage of the product on a system must be done with it’s fixing clamps. Do not do the montage of the device with in appropriate fixing clamp. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.


2.Installation

c

9


2.2 Dimensions

Maximum 15mm / 0.590 inch

72mm / 2.834 inch

72

mm

/ 2

.83

4 in

ch

83.5 mm / 3.287 inch11.5mm / 0.452 inch

Product Label

Front PanelIP65 protectionNEMA 4X

Panel Surface(maximum thickness 15mm / 0.590 inch)

Fixing Clamp

UV

z.H

O FFU O

A T

TEST

V1/L3

L3N

VL23/L2N

VL2 /L11

N

PROG

TEST RTESE

G

G

AOEM - 19

M N.AS ART T

N.MA

TOPS

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~MRP

VV

FA L DI ET ARO ST T

H GI HTEMPERATUREW OILLO PR

REESSU

O ER EV

SP EDUFAI RL

EVO

GLTA EAIL RF

U EC A GIN

H RGFAIL

VZO

AT V LB T.

T.IL REFA U

UV

Hz.

OFF AUTO

TEST

VL31/L3NVL23/L2NVL12/L1N

PROG

TEST RESET

G

G

EAOM - 19

MAN.START

MAN.STOP

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~

RPM

VV

FAILEDTO START

HIGHTEMPERATURE

LOW OILPRESSURE

OVER SPEEDFAILURE

VOLTAGEFAILURE

CHARGINGFAIL

VZBATT. VOLT.FAILURE

10

2.3 Panel Cut-Out

97 mm / 3.82 inch (min)

97

mm

/ 3

.82

in

ch

(m

in)

69

mm

/ 2

.72

in

ch

69mm / 2.72 inch

11

Operating Temperature : -25°C to +70 °C

Max. Operating Humidty : %90 Rh (non-condensing)





2.5 Panel Mounting

c

c

1

2

3

1-Before mounting the controller in your panel, make sure that the cut-out is of the right size.

2-Check front panel gasket position

3-Insert the device through the cut-out. If the mounting clamps are on the unit, put out them before inserting the unit to the panel.


UV

.zH

O FFAUTO

ET TS

V1 L

L / 3N3

VL2

N3/L2

V/L1

L1N

2

PROG

TTESESET

R

G

G

EAO 19

M -

N.MAT RS A T

.MANSTOP

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ R MP

VV

FAILEDS ART

TO TIH GHE P

T M ERATUREOLOW ILREP

SSURE

EE

OV R SP EDLFAI UREVOA GE

LTFAILURE

AI

CH RG NGFAIL

VZ TBAT . VO T.LFAILURE

12

2.6 Installation Fixing Clamp


c

1

2

Montage of the device to a system must be done with it’s own fixing clamps. Do not do the montage of the device with inappropriate fixing clamps. Be sure that device will not fall while doing the montage.

The unit is designed for panel mounting.

1-Insert the unit in the panel cut-out from the front.

2-Insert the mounting clamp from the rear side of the device and tighten the fixing screws to secure the unit against the panel.

c

3

1

2

Before starting to remove the device from panel, power off the device and the related system.

1-Loosen screws.

2-Lift the locking tabs located on both the right and left hand sides and pull the fixing clamp from the device while holding the unit in place.

3-Pull the unit through the front of the panel

VU

zH .

OFFTAU O

ET TS

V3L 1/L3N

V23 L N

L / 2

V1L 2/ 1NL

ROGP

E TT SR

ETES

G

G

OM 1EA

- 9

ANM.START

N.MASTOP

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~MPR

VV

FA LI EDST RT

TO AIGH H

T MP RATUR

EE

EO

L W LO

IP ES URR

SE

PVE S ED

OR

EF ILU EA

RV TAOL GEA LURF I

EAH

GI GC

R NF ILA

VZ TB T. OLT.A

VARE

F ILU

VU

zH .

OFFTAU O

ET ST

V3L 1/L3N

VL N

L23/ 2

V1L 2/ 1NL

R GP O

TESTRESET

G

G

E OM 1A

- 9

ANM.S AT RT

N.MAS OT P

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ PMR

VV

FA LEDI

T T S R

TOA

IGH HP

AT R

TEM ER U EO

LOW LIP ES URER

S

P D

OVE S ER

EILFA UREV

ALT EO

GAFL UREI

A GICH R NGLF IA

VZ TTB. VOLT.

A

EAIL R

FU

13

You must ensure that the unit is correctly configured for your application. Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled, and/or personal injury. It is your responsibility, as the installer, to ensure that the configuration is correct.Parameters of the unit has factory default values. These parameters must be set according to the system’s needs.

Only qualified personnel and technicians trained specially should work on this equipment. This equipment contains internal circuits with voltage dangerous to human life. There is severe danger for human life in the case of unauthorized intervention.



3.Electrical Connections


c

c

c

c

8 pieces

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

11 pieces

5.08mm

* * * * * * * *

*

7.62mm

Screw driver 0.8x3mm

Torque 0.5 Nm

3.2 Electrical Connection Diagram

14

3.2.1 EAOM-19 Single Phase Connections Schematic For TN-C AC Power Systems

MAINS

MAINS CONTACTOR GENERATOR CONTACTOR

LOAD

GENERATOR

GENERATOR RELAYMAINS RELAY

FU

SE

-4

FU

SE

-3

L L

L

N N

N

13 18 17 1619

CHARGEGEN. D+(W.L.)

B+

CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

FU

SE

-2

40

A

40

A

FU

SE

-1

BA

TT

ER

Y +-B

AT

+B

AT

+B

AT

STARTER


STARTRELAY

SOLENOIDRELAY

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

TU

RE

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T2 HO

RN

OU

TP

UT

1 2 3 4 5 7891011 6

1512 14

1

1

2

MEASUREMENTCIRCUIT

MEASUREMENTCIRCUIT5A@250VV 5A@250VV

16A@32VZ 16A@32VZ

16

A@

32

VZ

3

15

MAINS

MAINS CONTACTOR GENERATOR CONTACTOR

LOAD

GENERATOR

GENERATOR RELAYMAINS RELAY

FU

SE

-6

FU

SE

-5

FU

SE

-4

FU

SE

-3

1512

L1 L1

L1

N N

N

L2 L2

L2

L3 L3

L3

14 13 18 17 1619

CHARGEGEN. D+(W.L.)

B+ CH

AR

GE

GE

NE

RA

TO

R

FU

SE

-2

40

A

40

A

FU

SE

-1

BA

TT

ER

Y +

-BA

T

+B

AT

+B

AT

STARTER


STARTRELAY

SOLENOIDRELAY

LO

W O

IL P

RE

SS

UR

E

HIG

H T

EM

PE

RA

TU

RE

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T1

CO

NF

IGU

RA

BL

E IN

PU

T2 HO

RN

OU

TP

UT

1 2 3 4 5 7891011 6

1

2

1

3.2.2 EAOM-19 Three Phase Connections Schematic For TN-C AC Power Systems

Connect the unit as shown in the appropriate diagram, Section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2. Ensure the battery supply is of the correct polarity, and that the battery negative rail is grounded. The connectors can be unplugged from the rear of the unit for convenience and to speed up installation.

cThe fuses should be as follows:

FUSE 1 1A. TFUSE 2 According to current required by solenoids etc.FUSES 3,4 Max. 5A.FUSES 5,6 1A.

c

1-

2-

MEASUREMENTCIRCUIT

MEASUREMENTCIRCUIT

V Symbol means Vac, Z Symbol means Vdc

5A@250VV 5A@250VV

16A@32VZ 16A@32VZ

16

A@

32

VZ

3

c3-

16

3.3 Top Label View Of The EAOM-19

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

MA

INS

N

MA

INS

L1

MA

INS

L2

MA

INS

L3

GE

N. N

GE

N. L

1

MA

INS

RE

LA

Y

GE

N. R

EL

AY

5 A

5 A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

BA

TT

ER

Y -

BA

TT

ER

Y +

BA

TT

ER

Y +

STA

RT

SO

LE

NO

ID

HO

RN

OIL

PR

ES

S.

HIG

HT

EM

P.

CO

NF.

INP

UT-1

CO

NF.

INP

UT-2

CH

AR

GE

GE

N.

16

A

16

A

16

A P/N : EAOM-19

-BAT

17

Table 3.1 shows the connections and recommended cable sizes. Table 3.2 describesthe functions of the connections.

+ Battery supply to EAOM-192 1.0 Supplies to unit- Battery supply to EAOM-191 1.0 Supplies to unit

Pin DescriptionCable Size

(mm²)Notes

3 + Battery supply input 2.5Supplies to Pin4,5,6.

Output to start relay4 2.516 A. Max+DC supplay fromPIN3

Output to Fuel / Stop Solenoid5 2.5

Output to horn6 2.5

Input from oil pressure switch7 1.0 Switch to "0" VoltInput from temperature switch8 1.0 Switch to "0" VoltConfigurable failure input-19 1.0 Switch to "0" VoltConfigurable failure input-210 1.0 Switch to "0" VoltInput from charge generator11 1.0Mains voltage neutral12 1.0Mains voltage input (L1)13 1.0Mains voltage input (L2)14 1.0 3 phase onlyMains voltage input (L3)15 1.0 3 phase onlyGenerator voltage neutral16 1.0Generator voltage input (L1)17 1.0Mains contactor18 2.5 Relay output (5A)Generator contactor19 2.5 Relay output (5A)

16 A. Max+DC supplay fromPIN3

16 A. Max+DC supplay fromPIN3

3.4 Unit Wiring

Table 3.1 Unit Wiring

18

Table 3.2 Unit Wiring Description

Pin Function1 Negative battery input supplies EAOM-19.2 Positive battery input supplies EAOM-19.3 Battery positive input. Supplies Pin 4,5 and 6.4 Output to Start relay. +DC supply from pin 3. Controls starter motor.

6 Output to horn. +DC supplies from pin 3. Alarm output.

12 Mains voltage neutral.

16 Generator voltage neutral.

18 Mains contactor. Relay output (NC).19 Generator contactor. Relay output (NO).

5Output to Fuel/Stop solenoid. +DC supply from pin 3. Controls fuel to engine orcontrols engine stopping

8Input from Temperature switch. Switched to 0V, when engine temperature exceedsthermostat setting.

11Input from charge generator. Can be used to detect when engine has started. Must be connected to +BAT if not used.

17Input from generator L1 phase. Unit can be programmed to use frequency of alternator output to detect when engine has started.

7Input from Oil Pressure switch. The oil pressure switch must be the type that openswhen oil pressure is normal, and closes on low oil pressure. (failure condition orengine stopped.)

9Configurable input-1. Normally open. When switched to 0V, sounds the horn andflashes SPARE-1 LED on panel. Can be programmed to stop the engine or de-energise the generator contactor.

10Configurable input-2. Normally open. When switched to 0V, sounds the horn andflashes SPARE-2 LED on panel. Can be programmed to stop the engine or de-energise the generator contactor.

131415

L1L2L3

Mains voltage inputs. Used to detect failure for controlling automatic transfer of load to generator. Pins 14 and 15 not used on single phase applications.

3.5 Unit Wiring Description

4. Definition Of Front Panel And Accessing To The Parameters

19

Number Comment

1

6

7

8

4

9 The LED shows the load isn't connected to the mains. It's colour is red.10 The LED shows the load isn't connected to the generator. It's colour is red.

3

The LED shows the Unit is in TEST position. It's colour is red. The LED light off the unit is in other than TEST position.

In the MANUAL, AUTO and TEST modes the LED (3) lights on when the engine is in the start position. LED' s colour is green.

5The LED shows the load is supplied from the generator. It's colour is green. If this LED is lit that the generator contactor is closed and the load is supplied from the generator.

2The red LED shows the EAOM-19 is in the Programming Mode. The LED is lit when the unit is in the Programming Mode, lit lights off when the unit is in the other modes.

The LED shows the unit is in OFF position. It's colour is red. The LED light off the unit is in other than OFF position.The LED shows the Unit is in AUTO position. It's colour is red. The LED light off the unit is in other than AUTO position.In the MANUAL, AUTO and TEST modes the LED (8) lights on when the engine is stop position. LED' s colours is red.

The LED shows the load is connected to the mains. It's colour is green.


2

109

87

6

111213

17 18 19 20

27

24

25

21 22

3

4

5

161514

1

UV

Hz.

OFF AUTO

TEST

VL31/L3NVL23/L2NVL12/L1N

PROG

TEST RESET

G

G

EAOM - 19

MAN.START

MAN.STOP

~~ ~~~~~~~~~~

RPM

VV

FAILEDTO START

HIGHTEMPERATURE

LOW OILPRESSURE

OVER SPEEDFAILURE

VOLTAGEFAILURE

CHARGINGFAIL

VZBATT. VOLT.FAILURE

SPARE 1

SPARE 2

G

23

26

20

Number Comment

11The button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the TEST Mode. The unit changes operating mode to the TEST Mode and LED (1) is lit when this button is pressed.

13

14

17

18

19

20

12

The LAMP TEST function of the unit is operated and entered in the Programming Mode by using this button. The LAMP TEST function operates when the button is pressed first. When the button is pressed and keeping pressed for 5 seconds the unit is passed to the PROGRAMMING Mode and LED (2) is lit at the same time.

15 The button is used for transferring the load to the mains only in MANUAL mode.

16The button is used for transferring the load to the generator. It is active only in Manual Mode.

21The button is used for disconnecting the load from the mains. It is only active when the unit is in MANUAL Mode.

22The button is used for disconnecting the load from the generator. It is only active when the unit is in MANUAL Mode.

23Alternate Display Mode Button. It is used for rotating between parameters and approving of the values, of the unit and displays. See section 4 and Section 6.1

24Multi Function Display. It is used for Programming the Unit and features explained in section 6.

25Failure Indicators. Detailed information about this subject is explained in section 6.2.

The button used for starting the engine when the unit is in the MANUAL Mode. The LED (3) is lit when the button is pressed. It is only active when the unit is in MANUAL Mode.

The button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the OFF Mode. The unit changes operating mode to the OFF Mode and LED (6) is lit when this button is pressed.

The button is used for changing operating mode of the unit to the AUTO Mode. The unit changes operating mode to the AUTO Mode and LED (7) is lit when this button is pressed.

It runs as HORN SILENCE and DECREMENT button. The button, in the normal conditions runs for HORN SILENCE if the horn is running purpose when any failure is detected, it works decreasing values of parameters in PROGRAMMING Mode.

The button is used for stopping the engine when the unit is in the MANUAL Mode. The LED (8) is lit when the button is pressed. It is only active when the unit is in MANUAL Mode.

It runs as INCREMENT and FAILURE RESET button. The button, in the normal conditions runs for FAILURE RESET purpose when any failure is detected, it works increasing values of parameters in PROGRAMMING Mode.

26 Generator voltage okay led.27 Mains voltage okay led.

Press the increment button to access to the parameter value.

P00: Mains Voltage Connection Level

4.2 Accessing To The Operator Parameters

21

Press the increment button.

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.VL23 VL31

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


Operation Screen

Not1: If Enter button is pressed and the operator password is

zero, screen is ignored

and screen is shown.

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


Programming can be carried out only while the unit is in OFF mode. Press the OFF (17) button. If the engine is running, it will stop and the LED (6) lights on. Then proceed as follows:

Not2: User can access to parameters P00 to P09 and P28 only.

OPERATOR PASSWORD

When the button is pressed for 5 seconds, password is asked for accessing to parameters.




Not3: When screen is shown, parameters can be seen by pressing Enter button without entering operator password. But user can not change the parameters.

22

The value of parameter P00

P01: Mains Voltage Disconnection Level

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


IF NO KEYS ARE PRESSED FOR A PERIOD OF 2 MINUTES, THE UNIT WILL RETURN TO THE NORMAL OPERATION SCREEN.i

Operation Screen

User can access to the following parameter by pressing Enter button.

Change the parameter value with increment and decrement buttons.

Press Enter button to confirm the changed value or access the following parameter.



P02: Mains Voltage Upper Limit



User can access to the following parameter by pressing Enter button. On this way user can access to parameters P00 to P09 and P28 only.

To exit the programming mode,

press the PROG button.

4.3 Accessing To The Technician Parameters

23

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


P00: Mains Voltage Connection Level

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


Not2: User can access to all parameters (P00 to P29).

TECHNICIAN PASSWORD

When the button is pressed for 5 seconds, password is asked for accessing to parameters.



Press the increment button.


Not1: If Enter button is pressed and the technician password is

zero, screen is ignored

and screen is shown. Press the Enter button to confirm password. If the password is incorrect, the unit will drop out of program mode.

Not3: When screen is shown, parameters can be seen by pressing Enter button without entering operator password. But user can not change the parameters.


Operation Screen

Programming can be carried out only while the unit is in OFF mode. Press the OFF (17) button. If the engine is running, it will stop and the LED (6) lights on. Then proceed as follows:

24


P01: Mains Voltage Disconnection Level

RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


RESET

PROG

TEST

°F°F


User can access to the following parameter by pressing Enter button. On this way user can access to all parameters (P00 to P29).

IF NO KEYS ARE PRESSED FOR A PERIOD OF 2 MINUTES, THE UNIT WILL RETURN TO THE NORMAL OPERATION SCREEN.i

Operation Screen

User can access to the following parameter by pressing Enter button.





P02: Mains Voltage Upper Limit



To exit the programming mode,

press the PROG button.

Prm. No. Definition of Parameter Unit Lower / Upper Limit DefaultP00 Mains voltage connection level VAC 60 - 600 320P01 Mains voltage disconnection level VAC 60 - 600 300P02 Mains voltage upper limit VAC 60 - 600 440P03 Alternator voltage lower limit VAC 60 - 600 320P04 Alternator voltage upper limit VAC 60 - 600 440P05 Hz. 30.0 - 75.0 53.0P06 Number 1 -10 3

P09 Mains transition delay Minute 0 - 30 3P10 Single / Three phase selection Select 1 PH / 3 PH 3 PHP11 Battery voltage lower limit VDC 7.2 - 24.0 8.0

P13 Stop / Fuel solenoid selection StoP / FuEL FuELP14 Stop magnet energising time 0 - 99 20

P16 Starting attempt duration 5 - 99 5

P18 Speed limit for crank disconnection 20.0 - 45.0 40.0P19 Control on delay 0 - 99 10P20 Alternator voltage fault control delay 0.0 - 10.0 5.0P21 Speed fault control delay Second 5.0

P24 Horn output selection 0 - 1 0P25 Choke time 0.8

P15.0P15.1P15.2P15.3

P07

P08

P12

P15

P17

P22

P23

Speed upper limitNumber of starting attempts

Engine cooling time

Horn duration

Mains-Generator or Generator-Mains change over delay

Configurable failure input-2 (Pin10)The same as P22

Configurable failure input-1 (Pin9)



Charge generatorSpeedAlternator voltageOil pressure

0

1

2345

6

LED flashes and horn sounds. It is unlatched.LED flashes and horn sounds and then stays on until reset.As "1" plus engine stops.As "0" but only while engine running.As "1" but only while engine running.As "4" plus engine stops if running.As "4" plus generator contactor de-energised , if engine running.

Minute

Second

Second

SelectSecond

Select

Second

VAC

Hz.SecondSecond

Number

Number

NumberSecond

0 - 999

0 - 990 = disables cooling process

0.1 - 25.0

no / YES

40 - 360

0 - 6

0 - 6

0 = continuous

no / YESno / YESno / YES

0.0 - 10.0

0.0 - 10.0

3

60

1.0

YESNo

YESNo

300

0

0

P26 Generator start delay 0 - 9999 0P27 Oil sensor selection 0

SecondNumber 0 - 1

P28 Operator password (P00 to P09, and P28) 0 - 9999 0P29 Technician password (P00 to P29) 0

NumberNumber 0 - 9999

25

4.4 Parameter List

4.5 Explanation of Parameters

26

P00 Mains voltage connection levelP01 Mains voltage disconnection levelP02 Mains voltage upper limit

In Automatic mode, the unit uses these parameters to decide when to switch the load between the mains supply and the generator. If the mains voltage is higher than the Upper Limit or lower than the Disconnection Level, the unit connects the load to the generator instead of to the mains. If the load is running on the mains and the mains voltage falls, the unit will switch the load to the generator when the mains voltage falls below the Disconnection Level. Conversely, if the mains voltage is low and the load is running on the generator, the unit will not restore the mains supply to the load until the mains voltage reaches the Connection Level. This hysteresis prevents constant switching between mains and generator as the mains varies about the switching levels. Figure 4.1 shows how, in automatic mode, the load is transferred between mains and generator as the mains voltage varies over time.

Figure 4.1 Load Switching Levels

4.5.1 Mains Voltage Connection(P00) and Disconnection Level(P01), Upper Limit(P02)

Defaultlevels

440V

320V

300V

TimeMains

voltage

Upper limit

Mains voltage

Connection level

Disconnection level

Load switchingMains

GeneratorGeneratorMains Mains MainsGen.

27

4.5.2 Alternator Voltage Lower(P03) and Upper Limit(P04), Fault Control Delay(P20)

P03 Alternator voltage lower limitP04 Alternator voltage upper limitP20 Alternator voltage fault control delay

At the end of Contro on delay time defined by parameter P19, a fault will be reported if the generator voltage goes outside the window defined by the upper and lower limits for more than the time defined as the Alternator voltage fault control delay (P20). This failure immediately stops the generating set, without cool-down delay.

P05 Speed upper limitP21 Speed fault control delay

At the end of Contro on delay time defined by parameter P19, a fault will be reported if the generator frequency exceeds the upper limit for more than the time defined as the Speed fault control delay (P21). This failure immediately stops the generating set, without cool-down delay.

4.5.3 Alternator Frequency Upper Limit(P05), Fault Control Delay(P21)

This is the time the generator is to run off-load once the load transfer signal has ceased. This gives the engine time to cool down before shutdown. Parameter P07 Engine cooling time defines the duration of this cooling-off period.


In automatic mode, when the mains has been restored after an interruption, the unit will switch the load back from the generator to the mains supply after the delay programmed into P09. This delay allows time for the mains voltage to settle before reconnecting the load.

4.5.5 Mains Transition Delay (P09)

If the battery voltage drops below the defined Battery Voltage Lower Limit, an alarm occurs. It doesn't stop the generating set.


This parameter allows the use of either a Stop solenoid or a Fuel solenoid.

With Fuel Solenoid selected, the fuel solenoid will be energised while the engine is running and de-energised to cut off the fuel and stop the engine. With Stop Solenoid selected, the stop solenoid is normally de-energised and only energised to stop the engine. The solenoid remains energised for the period defined as the Stop Magnet Energising Time (P14).


28

This parameter sets the period for which the Stop solenoid is energised to stop the engine. It applies only where parameter P13 is set to Stop Solenoid.

The EAOM-19 must de-energise the Start solenoid, to disconnect the starter motor, once the engine is running. Conversely, if the engine does not start after the pre-set start time, the unit will turn off the starter motor and start again. Hence, the unit must be able to detect when the engine has started. Four signals are available to provide engine running information, as follows :

0 Charging generator energising coil current. This current should fall to zero once the engine has started.

1 Engine speed, as selected by parameter P18 Speed Limit for Crank Disconnection.

2 Alternator voltage, as selected by parameter P17 Alternator Voltage Limit for Crank Disconnection.

3 Oil pressure the oil pressure switch should open when the oil pressure is sufficient.

Any or all of these signals can be selected for use. It is advisable to select at least two of them preferably 1 Engine speed and either 0 Charging generator or 2 Alternator voltage.

See Section 4.5.10 . If any of the selected signals appears, the unitassumes that the engine has started.

4.5.8 Stop Magnet Energised Time (P14)

4.5.9 Engine Started Signal (P15)

4.5.10 Starting Attemt Duration(P16), Number Of Starting Attempts(P06)

Engine Starting:When the EAOM-19 receives an Engine Start command, it energises the start solenoid to drive the starter motor and energises the Fuel solenoid (if selected see Section 4.5.7 Stop/Fuel Solenoid selection (P13)) to provide fuel for the engine. If the EAOM-19 detects that the engine has started, it de-energises the starter motor. Engine started signals are defined by parameter P15 Engine started signal see Section 4.5.9.

Parameter P16 Starting attempt duration defines the maximum period for which drive will be applied to the starter motor. It makes a new attempt after a delay equal to twice the defined Starting attempt duration.

Parameter P06 Number of starting attempts defines the number of unsuccessful tries that the EAOM-19 will make before abandoning the attempts. If all these attempts fail, EAOM-19

operations are locked out and a Start Failure indication is displayed.( LED is

lit) The unit remains locked until the RESET (13) button has been pressed.

29

The unit can be configured to respond in any of seven different ways to each one of these inputs. A contact closure to 0V on any of these inputs causes the horn to sound for the period programmed by P08 and lights the appropriate indicator on the panel. The EAOM-19 can be programmed to respond in one of seven ways:

0 Indication is unlatched the LED flashes only while the input is 0V. This input has no effect if any other alarm condition is present.

1 Indication is latched. The LED flashes while the horn is sounding and then stays on until the RESET (13) button is pressed.

2 This is the same as 1 but, in addition, the engine is shut down.

Options 3...6 are effective only while the engine is running.

3 Indication is unlatched the LED flashes only while the input is 0V. This input operates only if the engine is running and has no effect if any other alarm condition is present.

4 Indication is latched. The LED flashes while the horn is sounding and then stays on until the RESET (13) button is pressed. This input operates only if the engine is running.

5 As 4 but, in addition, the engine is shut down.

6 As 4 but, in addition, the generator contactor is de-energised to disconnect the load from the generator. The engine is not shut down.

During the initial period after the engine has been started, there can be fluctuations in engine speed and alternator output that could generate spurious fault indications. Parameter P19 defines a period during which any fault indications, except High Temperature, will be ignored by the EAOM-19. Also, in the event of a mains failure, transfer of the load from mains to generator will be delayed until the end of the Control On Delay period. This period begins when the EAOM-19 has detected engine starting and has cut off the drive to the starter motor.


4.5.12 Configurable Inputs 1 and 2 (P22 and P23)

4.5.13 Horn Output Selection (P24)

This parameter determine the function of horn output(Pin 6);0: Alarm output, 1: Choke output.

4.5.14 Choke time (P25)

This parameter sets the period for which the choke output is energised.

4.5.15 Generator Start Delay (P26)

In automatic mode, when the mains has been interrupted, the unit will start the generator after the delay programmed into P26. This can be used to prevent nuisance tripping when switching loads etc.

30

4.5.16 Oil Sensor Selection (P27)

This parameter determine the function of oil sensor input(Pin 7);

f it is selected as oil pressure sensor(1), the oil pressure parameter (P15.3) of the engine started signals will be functional.

0: Oil level sensor.1: Oil pressure sensor.

If it is selected as oil level sensor(0), the oil pressure parameter (P15.3) of the engine started signals will not be functional. But i


Use this option to change the Operator password. This password allows access to program parameters P00 to P09 and P28.


Use this option to change the Technician password. It allows access to program parameters P00 to P29.

iTo prevent to changing unit program parameters by unauthorised personel don’t allow to the learning operator and technician passwords by the others. In case of this situation, change passwords immediately.

5. Commissioning

31

1. Check that the unit is correctly wired and that the wiring is of a standard and rating compatible with the system.

2. Check that the correct fuses are fitted.

3. Program the unit as detailed in Section 4.

4. Take temporary steps to prevent the engine from starting . (for example, disable the fuel solenoid.)

5. After a visual inspection to ensure it is safe to proceed, connect the battery supply.

6. On the EAOM-19, press the MAN ENGINE START (14) button. At this moment the LED (3) lights on.

7. Check that the engine start sequence commences. The starter motor should run for the programmed period (P16) for the pre-set (P06) number of times.

8. Check that the (Start Failure LED) flashes and the LED (3) lights off.

9. Check the unit will change to the STOP position and the LED (8) lights on.

10. Restore the engine to operational state (reconnect the fuel solenoid).

11. Press the MAN ENGINE START (14) button. The LED (3) will light on.

12. Check the start sequence, as follows:

the starter motor runs

the engine starts

the starter motor disengages once the engine is running.

If not, check that the engine is fully operational (fuel available etc.) and check the wiring and programming of the EAOM-19.

13. Check that the engine runs up to its operating speed. If not and an alarm is present, check that the alarm is valid and then check the input wiring.

14. Press the MAN ENGINE STOP (20) button. At this moment the LED (8) will light on. The engine should stop. Allow time for the engine to come to rest.

5.1 Manual Mode

32

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit and is present.

2. Check the mains voltage readings on the display.

3. At the EAOM-19, press the AUTO (18) button. The LED (7) on the button should light.

4. Switch off the mains supply to the unit. Check that the generator starts and, after a delay, the load is transferred to the generator.

5. Restore the mains supply to the unit. Check that, after a delay, the load is transferred back to the mains and the generator, after a further delay, shuts down.

1. Check that the mains is connected to the unit.

2. Press the TEST (11) button. At this moment the LED (1) will light on.

3. Check that the generator starts and that the load is still connected to the mains.

4. Switch off the mains supply. Check that the contactors change over to connect the load to the generator. Check also that the Auto (7) LED is lit. The unit changes operating mode to AUTO Mode automatically.

5. Restore the mains supply. Check that the contactors reconnect the load to the mains supply.

6. Check that the generator shuts down with cool-down period.

5.2 Auto Mode

5.3 Test Mode

6.1 Alternate Display Description

6. Operation

33

Four-digit, seven-segment LED display. This multi-function display the selected parameter from the list alongside. Use DISPLAY MODE (23) button to select which parameter is to be displayed, as indicated by the adjacent LEDs. The button selects the parameters in sequence, as follows.

Please note that phase-phase voltage readings are prefixed by 'P' while phase-neutral readings are prefixed by 'n'.

VL12 - Mains voltage L1-L2, prefix PVL12 - Mains voltage L1-N, prefix nVL23 - Mains voltage L2-L3, prefix PVL23 - Mains voltage L2-N, prefix nVL31 - Mains voltage L3-L1, prefix PVL31 - Mains voltage L3-N, prefix nGEN V. - Generator voltageGEN FRG. - Generator frequency (Hz)BATTERY - Battery voltage

The LED will flash if the unit detects an engine stopping error. When the

DISPLAY MODE (23) button is pressed so as to select this option, the display will show the cause of the error indication. This error message is:

StP.E - Stop Error

The LED will be skipped if there isn’t an engine stopping error.

ALARM

ALARM

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

34

Example 1: Using Alternate Display with Single phase selection

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Press the display mode button.

Mains Voltage L1-N Generator Voltage

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Generator Frequency (Hz) Battery Voltage

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Error Message

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Mains Voltage L1-N

Press the display mode button again.



If engine stopping error is not present when the display mode button is pressed, Error Message screen is skipped.


35

Example 2: Using Alternate Display with Three phase selection

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Mains Voltage L1-L2 Mains Voltage L1-N

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F


VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F


VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Generator Voltage Generator Frequency (Hz)

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Battery Voltage Error Message

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

Mains Voltage L1-L2

Press the display mode button.









Press the display mode button again.If engine stopping error is not present when the display mode button is pressed, Error Message screen is skipped.

6.2 Failure Indicators Description

36

Explanations :

1- (Start Failure LED) : The Unit drives to the starter motor according to

values determined in P06 and P16. But, starting the engine is not possible in this values the unit gives a Start Failure. In this case the LED flashes and the horn is sounded. The unit must be reset by pressing the RESET (13) button before a fresh attempt can be made.

2- (High Temperature Failure LED) : Failure will be active when the High

Temperature Switch is which is connected to the Unit via Pin 8 getting excessive hot as result of possible heating of engine. In this case the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded and engine shuts-down without any cool-down period.

3- (Low Oil Pressure Failure LED) : The sensor that is connected to the

Unit via Pin 7 is Normally Closed. The contact will open when Oil Pressure in the engine reaches to proper level. If the contact will not open the engine is running. In this case the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded and engine shuts-down without any cool-down period.

4- (Over Speed Failure LED) : The unit decides to the Over Speed Failure that

depending on the values of parameters P05 and P21. At the end of control on delay time defined by parameter P19, if the generator speed goes above the Speed Upper Limit and continues for of Speed Fault Control Delay time period, the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded and engine shuts-down without any cool-down period.

Generator speed is measured from alternator output frequency.

5- (Generator voltage Failure LED): The unit decides to the Generator Voltage

Failure when the Alternator Voltage is out of the values determined with P03, P04 and P20 parameters. At the end of control on delay time defined by parameter P19, if the alternator voltage is out of Alternator Voltage Lower Limit or Alternator Voltage Upper Limit and continues for of Alternator Voltage Fault Control Delay time period, the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded and generator contactor is released if closed, engine shuts-down without any cool-down period.

SPEED

Bat.VoltageFailure

SPEED

SPARE 1

SPARE 2

6- (Charge Generator Failure LED): At the end of control on delay time

defined by parameter P19, the unit checks + Voltage which comes from Charge Generator via Pin 11. If there is no Voltage the unit decides to Charge Generator Failure. In this case the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded.

7- (Battery Voltage Failure LED): Battery Voltage Failure is monitored

continues in all modes except "OFF" mode. This failure occurs continuously when the battery voltage falls below the value specified by the Battery voltage lower limit parameter P11. In this case the LED flashes and the Horn is sounded. It is self resetting once the fault has been removed.

The EAOM-19 measures battery voltage at the EAOM-19 terminals. Depending on the size and length of the cable to the battery, this may be somewhat less than the voltage as measured at the battery.

8- (Configurable Failure Input-1 LED): Configurable Failure-1 input works

on value determined in Parameter P22. When the input is active (Pin 9) the unit works according to selection of user.

9- (Configurable Failure Input-2 LED): Configurable Failure-2 input works

on value determined in Parameter P23. When the input is active (Pin 10) the unit works according to selection of user.

Bat.VoltageFailure

SPARE 1

SPARE 2

Once the EAOM-19 has given a shutdown signal to the engine it expects the engine to rest. It monitors the Engine Started Signal sources and if they still indicate engine movement when

30 seconds time period expires, The StPE alarm signal is generated. The LED

will flash continually.

ALARM

StPE - Stop Error Message (Fail to Engine Stopping):

37

VL12 GEN V.

GEN FRQ.

BATTERY

ALARM

VL23 VL31

°F°F

6.3 Mode Transition

38

The mode can be changed at any time. Any changes between Auto, Manual and Test modes will not effect the current state of the generator or load connection.

6.4 Manual Start

1. Press the MAN ENGINE START (14) button on the panel the LED (3) will light on. The engine should start. The sequence is as follows:

! The starter motor runs! The engine starts

Once the engine is running,! Generator will be ready to take the load after "control on delay" time period like as

AUTO mode.! It is not possible supply to load on the generator unless "control on delay" time is

elapsed (The contactor open / close button does not work)

2. Once "control on delay" time is elapsed, press the MAINS CONTACTOR OPEN (21) button to disconnect the load from the mains supply. LED (9) should light. LED (4) should go off.

3. Press the GENERATOR CONTACTOR CLOSE (16) button to connect the load to the generator supply. LED (5) should light. LED (10) should go off.

6.5 Manual Stop

The LED (8) is lit and engine is stopped when the MAN ENGINE STOP (20) button is pressed. When the MAN ENGINE STOP (20) button is pressed while the load connected to the generator first generator contactor is released then engine is stopped after a cool down period.

6.6 Auto Operation

Press the AUTO (18) button to select Auto mode. The LED (7) in the corner of the button will light to indicate this mode has been selected.

In the event of a mains voltage failure, the unit will start up the generator and, once the generator is running and alternator voltage available, will transfer the load to the generator. When the mains is restored and stable, it will transfer the load back to the mains and, after a cool-down period, shut down the generator.

6.7 Test Operation

Press the TEST (11) button to select Test mode the LED (1) will light on. This mode allows for testing of the generator off load. All alarm circuits will operate so that any faults will be reported. If a mains failure occurs while the unit is in Test mode, the unit will revert to Auto mode and will switch the load to the generator.

7 Fault Finding

39

Indicators on the central section of the panel will flash if a fault is detected. See Section 6.2 Failure Indicators Description. Fault conditions except Battery Voltage Failure are latched so that further operation is prevented. If a failure is indicated, proceed as follows:

1. Find and fix the fault.

2. Press the RESET (13) button to enable a restart.

In addition to the indicators on the centre panel, the LED will flash in the event of

an engine stopping error. To display the fault message reported by the LED,

press repeatedly DISPLAY MODE (23) button until the ALARM option has been selected. If there isn't fault message, the ALARM option will be skipped.

ALARM

ALARM

Symptom Possible Remedy

Unit is in operativeCheck the battery and wiring to the unit.Check the DC supply. ( measure voltage between pins 1 and 2 )

Check the DC fuse.Check engine oil level and pressure.Check oil pressure switch and wiring.Check that oil pressure switch is of the normally closed type (opens on oil pressure).Check engine temperature and cooling systems.Check switch and wiring.Check that temperature switch is of normally open type (closes on high temperature).Check fuel solenoid and wiring, fuel and battery. Reset the EAOM-19 and restart the engine.Check for battery + output at pin 5, (Fuel Solenoid if selected)Check the signals that the EAOM-19 is using to determine if the engine has started. Refer to engine manual.Check wiring to starter solenoid.Check battery supply.

Check battery supply is present on the Start output pin 4 of the EAOM-19.

Low oil pressure fault after engine has started.

High engine temperatureFault after engine has started.

Failed to Start fault.Engine failed to start after Pre-set number of Attempts.

Starter motor inoperative.

Tablo 7.1 Fault Finding

Disconnect the equipment totally from electricity in the best and correct way during mechanical and electrical maintenance. When this is not possible, the equipment must be in the "OFF" position for preventing any accident.c

8. Specifications

40

Equipment Use : Electrical control equipment for generating sets

Housing & Mounting : 72mm x 72mm x 95mm. (Including connectors) ¼ DIN43700 plastic housing for panel mounting.

Panel Cut-Out : 69mm x 69mm.

Protection : NEMA 4X (Ip65 at front panel, Ip20 at rear side).

Weight : Approximately 270gr.

Enviromental Rating : Standard, indoor at an altitude of less then 2000 meters with non-condensing humidity.

Operating / StorageTemperature: -25 C to +70 C / -40 C to +85 C.

Operating / Storage Humidity : 90 % max. (non-condensing)

Installation Over Voltage : II Appliances, portable equipment

Category

Pollution Degree : II, Normal office or workplace, non conductive pollution.

Mode Of Operation : Continuous.

DC Battery Voltage Supply : 8 to 32 V Z, max. operating current is 240 mA.

Cranking Dropouts : Battery voltage can be "0" Volt for max. 100 ms during cranking (battery voltage should be at least nominal voltage before cranking).

Battery Voltage Measurement : 8 to 32 V Z, accuracy; 1 % FS, resolution; 0,1 V.

Mains Voltage Measurement : Selectable three phase or single phase, 4 wire connection for three phase, 2 wire connection for single phase gen-set. 35 to 300 V V Ph-N, 15.6 to 99.9 Hz. Accuracy; 1 % FS, Resolution; 1 V.

Generator Voltage : 35 to 300 V V Ph-N, 15.6 to 99.9 Hz.Measurement Accuracy; 1 % FS, Resolution; 1V.

Generator Speed (Frequency) : 15.6 to 99.9 Hz. (min 35 V V Ph-N) Accuracy; 0,25 % FS, Resolution; 0,1 Hz.

Charge Generator Excitation : 220 mA, max 4W.

Contact Sensing Inputs : Oil Pressure Switch (NC) Temperature Switch (NO) Configurable Input-1 (NO) Configurable Input-2 (NO)

Relay Outputs : Start relay (1NO. 16A@32V Z ) Fuel relay (1NO. 16A@32V Z ) Horn relay (1NO. 16A@32V Z ) Mains contactor relay (1NC. 5A@250V V ) Generator contactor relay (1NO. 5A@250V V )

41

Display : 4 digits, 7 segments, LED display showin; Mains voltage (Ph-Ph or Ph-N) Alternator voltage (u only) Alternator frequency Battery voltage Program parameters

Failure Indicators : Start failure LED High temperature LED Low oil pressure LED Over speed LED Generator voltage failure LED Charge generator failure LED Battery voltage failure LED Configurable input-1 LED Configurable input-2 LED

Status Indicators : TEST mode LED PROG mode LED OFF mode LED AUTOMATIC mode LED Man Engine Start LED Man Engine Stop LED Mains contactor open LED Generator contactor open LED Mains contactor close LED Generator contactor close LED Generator voltage okay LED Mains voltage okay LED

9. Block Diagram

42

POWERSUPPLY

RELAYOUTPUTS


MICROCONTROLLER

ANALOGTO

DIGITALCONVERTOR

COUNTER&

TIMER

MAINS&


&CONDITIONING

FREQUENCYSENSING

FROMGENERATOR

VOLTAGE

LED DISPLAYS&

INDICATORS

+BATTERY

MAINS L1

GEN. NGEN. L1

MAINS L2MAINS L3

MAINS N

EAOM-19 BLOCK DIAGRAM

FAILURE&

CONTROLINPUTS

PUSHBUTTONS

10. User Defined Parameters

43

Prm. No. Definition of Parameter User Defined ValueP00 Mains voltage connection level

P01 Mains voltage disconnection level

P02 Mains voltage upper limit

P03 Alternator voltage lower limit

P04 Alternator voltage upper limit

P05P06

P24 Horn output selection

P25 Choke time

P07P08

Speed upper limitNumber of starting attemptsEngine cooling time

Horn durationP09 Mains transition delay

P10 Single / Three phase selection

P11 Battery voltage lower limit

P12 Mains-Generator or Generator-Mains change over delay

P18 Speed limit for crank disconnection

P19 Control on delay

P20 Alternator voltage fault control delay

P21 Speed fault control delayP22P23 Spare input-2 (Pin10)

Spare input-1 (Pin9)

P13 Stop / Fuel solenoid selection

P14 Stop magnet energising time

P16 Starting attempt duration

P15.0P15.1P15.2P15.3

P15

P17 Alternator voltage limit for crank disconnection


Charge generatorSpeedAlternator voltageOil pressure

List - 1

Change Date : . . . . . / . . . . . / . . . . . . .Change Technician Name :

P26 Generator start delayP27 Oil sensor selectionP28 Operator password (P00 to P09, and P28)

P29 Technician password (P00 to P29)

unidades automaticas de... · off test r es auto test manual prog mains start load stop engine...

Documents